ADTRAN Total Access 604 T1 TDM, T1 ATM, ADSL, SDSL, SHDSL, Total Access 608 T1 TDM, T1 ATM, ADSL, SDSL, SHDSL, Total Access 612 T1 TDM, T1 TDM with Echo Cancellation, ADPCM Module, T1 ATM, SDSL, SHDSL, Total Access 616 T1 TDM, T1 ATM, SDSL System Manual
Below you will find brief information for Total Access 604 T1 TDM, Total Access 604 T1 ATM, Total Access 604 ADSL, Total Access 604 SDSL, Total Access 604 SHDSL, Total Access 608 T1 TDM, Total Access 608 T1 ATM, Total Access 608 ADSL. These devices are designed to provide a cost-effective way for businesses to deploy voice and data services over various types of connections, including T1, ADSL, and SDSL. The units have built-in IP routers, support multiple network protocols, and can be managed remotely. The Total Access 604 and 608 models are particularly well-suited for small businesses that need a reliable and affordable way to connect to the internet and make calls.
Advertisement
Advertisement
TOTAL ACCESS 600 SERIES System Manual 4200641L1 Total Access 604,T1 TDM 4200641L2 Total Access 604, T1 ATM 4200644L1 Total Access 604, ADSL 4200642L1 Total Access 604, SDSL 4200643L1 Total Access 604, SHDSL 4200681L1 Total Access 608, T1 TDM 4200681L2 Total Access 608, T1 ATM 4200684L1 Total Access 608, ADSL 4200682L1 Total Access 608, SDSL 4200683L1 Total Access 608, SHDSL 4200612L1#TDM Total Access 612, T1 TDM 4200612L2#TDM Total Access 612, T1 TDM with Echo Cancellation, ADPCM Module 4200612L1#ATM Total Access 612, T1 ATM 4200612L2 Total Access 612, SDSL 4200612L3 Total Access 612, SHDSL 4200616L1#TDM Total Access 616, T1 TDM 4200616L2#TDM Total Access 616, T1 TDM with Echo Cancellation, ADPCM Module 4200616L1#ATM Total Access 616, T1 ATM 4200616L2 Total Access 616, SDSL 4200616L3 Total Access 616, SHDSL 4200624L1#TDM Total Access 624, T1 TDM 4200624L2#TDM Total Access 624, T1 TDM with Echo Cancellation, ADPCM Module 4200624L1#ATM Total Access 624, T1 ATM 4200624L2 Total Access 624, SDSL 4200624L3 Total Access 624, SHDSL 61200624L1-1A October 2002 Trademarks Any brand names and product names included in this manual are trademarks, registered trademarks, or trade names of their respective holders. To the Holder of the Manual The contents of this manual are current as of the date of publication. ADTRAN reserves the right to change the contents without prior notice. In no event will ADTRAN be liable for any special, incidental, or consequential damages or for commercial losses even if ADTRAN has been advised thereof as a result of issue of this publication. 901 Explorer Boulevard P.O. Box 140000 Huntsville, AL 35814-4000 Phone: (256) 963-8000 ©2002 ADTRAN, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Printed in U.S.A. About this Manual This manual provides a complete description of the Total Access 600 Series system and system software. The purpose of this manual is to provide the technician, system administrator, and manager with general and specific information related to the planning, installation, operation, and maintenance of the Total Access 600 Series. This manual is arranged so that needed information can be quickly and easily found. The following is an overview of the contents. Section 1 System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Provides managers with a system overview, features and benefits, and a list of resource modules supported. Section 2 Engineering Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Provides equipment dimensions, power requirements, front panel design, rear panel design, LEDs, and at-a-glance specifications. Section 3 Network Turnup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Provides shipment contents list, grounding instructions, mounting options, and specifics of supplying power to the unit. Section 4 User Interface Guides (UIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Provides detailed definitions, ranges, and default values for all ATM and TDM menu options. Section 5 Detail Level Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Provides instructions on how to perform basic unit functions such as: Connection Log-in Adding/removing telnet users and changing passwords Setting IP parameters and verifying LAN communication Telnet Firmware upgrade Saving and loading config files Section 6 ADTRAN Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Provides instructions for configuring and using the ADTRAN Utilities software programs including Telnet, VT100, and TFTP. Section 7 MIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Provides the MIB compilation order and the MIBs, Traps, and MIB Variables supported by the unit. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 3 Revision History This is the first issue of this manual. In this manual, unit refers to the Total Access 604, 608, 612, 616, and 624. If a statement only applies to a particular unit, the unit will be specified by number. 4 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Notes provide additional useful information. Cautions signify information that could prevent service interruption. Warnings provide information that could prevent damage to the equipment or endangerment to human life. Safety Instructions When using your telephone equipment, please follow these basic safety precautions to reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock, or personal injury: 1. Do not use this product near water, such as a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. 2. Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless-type) during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of shock from lightning. 3. Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak. 4. Use only the power cord, power supply, and/or batteries indicated in the manual. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire. They may explode. Check with local codes for special disposal instructions. Save These Important Safety Instructions 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 5 FCC regulations require that the following information be provided in this manual: 1. This equipment complies with Part 68 of FCC rules. On the back of the equipment housing is a label showing the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN). If requested, provide this information to the telephone company. 2. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may temporarily discontinue service. If possible, advance notification is given; otherwise, notification is given as soon as possible. The telephone company will advise the customer of the right to file a complaint with the FCC. 3. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the proper operation of this equipment. Advance notification and the opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service are given. 4. If experiencing difficulty with this equipment, please contact ADTRAN for repair and warranty information. The telephone company may require this equipment to be disconnected from the network until the problem is corrected or it is certain the equipment is not malfunctioning. 5. This unit contains no user-serviceable parts. 6. An FCC compliant telephone cord with a modular plug is provided with this equipment. This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using an FCC compatible modular jack, which is Part 68 compliant. 7. The following information may be required when applying to the local telephone company for leased line facilities. Product TA 600 Series T1 Products Reg. Number Service Type REN/SOC FIC USOC HDCUSA-44556-DE-N 1.544 Mbps - SF 1.544 Mbps - SF and B8ZS 1.544 Mbps - ESF 1.544 Mbps - ESF and B8ZS 6.0N 04DU9-BN 04DU9-DN 04DU9-1KN 04DU9-1SN RJ-48 C Analog Loop Start/ Ground Start Service 0.1B/9.0F 02LS2 02GS2 RJ-11C TA 600 Series SDSL & SHDSL Products HDCUSA-44560-OT-N Analog Loop Start/Ground Start Service 0.1B/9.0F 02LS2 02GS2 RJ-11C TA 600 Series ADSL Products US: HDCDL02B4200644L1 Analog Loop Start/Ground Start Service 0.1B/9.0F 02LS2 02GS2 RJ-11C ADSL Service 0.2B/9.0F 02LS2 8. The REN is useful in determining the quantity of devices you may connect to your telephone line and still have all of those devices ring when your number is called. In most areas, the sum of the RENs of all devices should not exceed five. To be certain of the number of devices you may connect to your line as determined by the REN, call your telephone company to determine the maximum REN for your calling area. 9. This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company. Connection to party lines is subject to state tariffs. Contact your state public utility commission or corporation commission for information. 6 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Affidavit Requirements for Connection to Digital Services • • • An affidavit is required to be given to the telephone company whenever digital terminal equipment without encoded analog content and billing protection is used to transmit digital signals containing encoded analog content which are intended for eventual conversion into voiceband analog signals and transmitted on the network. The affidavit shall affirm that either no encoded analog content or billing information is being transmitted or that the output of the device meets Part 68 encoded analog content or billing protection specifications. End user/customer will be responsible for filing an affidavit with the local exchange carrier when connecting unprotected customer premise equipment (CPE) to 1.544 Mbps or subrate digital services. Until such time as subrate digital terminal equipment is registered for voice applications, the affidavit requirement for subrate services is waived. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 7 Affidavit for Connection of Customer Premises Equipment to 1.544 Mbps and/or Subrate Digital Services For the work to be performed in the certified territory of ___________________ (telco name) State of ________________ County of ________________ I, _______________________ (name), ____________________________________ (business address), ____________________ (telephone number) being duly sworn, state: I have responsibility for the operation and maintenance of the terminal equipment to be connected to 1.544 Mbps and/or ________ subrate digital services. The terminal equipment to be connected complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules except for the encoded analog content and billing protection specifications. With respect to encoded analog content and billing protection: ( ) I attest that all operations associated with the establishment, maintenance, and adjustment of the digital CPE with respect to analog content and encoded billing protection information continuously complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and Regulations. ( ) The digital CPE does not transmit digital signals containing encoded analog content or billing information which is intended to be decoded within the telecommunications network. ( ) The encoded analog content and billing protection is factory set and is not under the control of the customer. I attest that the operator(s)/maintainer(s) of the digital CPE responsible for the establishment, maintenance, and adjustment of the encoded analog content and billing information has (have) been trained to perform these functions by successfully having completed one of the following (check appropriate blocks): ( ) A. A training course provided by the manufacturer/grantee of the equipment used to encode analog signals; or ( ) B. A training course provided by the customer or authorized representative, using training materials and instructions provided by the manufacturer/grantee of the equipment used to encode analog signals; or ( ) C. An independent training course (e.g., trade school or technical institution) recognized by the manufacturer/grantee of the equipment used to encode analog signals; or ( ) D. In lieu of the preceding training requirements, the operator(s)/maintainer(s) is (are) under the control of a supervisor trained in accordance with _________ (circle one) above. 8 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A I agree to provide ______________________ (telco’s name) with proper documentation to demonstrate compliance with the information as provided in the preceding paragraph, if so requested. _________________________________Signature _________________________________Title _________________________________ Date Transcribed and sworn to before me This ________ day of _______________, _______ _________________________________ Notary Public My commission expires: _________________________________ 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 9 Federal Communications Commission Radio Frequency Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio frequencies. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Shielded cables must be used with this unit to ensure compliance with Class A FCC limits. Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 10 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Industry Canada Compliance Information Notice: The Industry Canada label applied to the product (identified by the Industry Canada logo or the “IC:” in front of the certification/registration number) signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met. Notice: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this terminal equipment is supplied in the documentation or on the product labeling/markings. The REN assigned to each terminal device indicates the maximum number of terminals that can be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices should not exceed five (5). Canadian Emissions Requirements This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus,” ICES-003 of the Department of Communications. Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioelectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Class A prescrites dans la norme sur le materiel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques,” NMB-003 edictee par le ministre des Communications. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 11 Warranty and Customer Service ADTRAN will repair and return this product within ten years from the date of shipment if it does not meet its published specifications or fails while in service. For detailed warranty, repair, and return information refer to the ADTRAN Equipment Warranty and Repair and Return Policy Procedure. Return Material Authorization (RMA) is required prior to returning equipment to ADTRAN. For service, RMA requests, or further information, contact one of the numbers listed at the end of this section. LIMITED PRODUCT WARRANTY ADTRAN warrants that for ten years from the date of shipment to Customer, all products manufactured by ADTRAN will be free from defects in materials and workmanship. ADTRAN also warrants that products will conform to the applicable specifications and drawings for such products, as contained in the Product Manual or in ADTRAN's internal specifications and drawings for such products (which may or may not be reflected in the Product Manual). This warranty only applies if Customer gives ADTRAN written notice of defects during the warranty period. Upon such notice, ADTRAN will, at its option, either repair or replace the defective item. If ADTRAN is unable, in a reasonable time, to repair or replace any equipment to a condition as warranted, Customer is entitled to a full refund of the purchase price upon return of the equipment to ADTRAN. This warranty applies only to the original purchaser and is not transferable without ADTRAN's express written permission. This warranty becomes null and void if Customer modifies or alters the equipment in any way, other than as specifically authorized by ADTRAN. EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY DESCRIBED ABOVE, THE FOREGOING CONSTITUTES THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE CUSTOMER AND THE EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY OF ADTRAN AND IS IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED). ADTRAN SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, INCLUDING (WITHOUT LIMITATION), ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THIS EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO CUSTOMER. In no event will ADTRAN or its suppliers be liable to the Customer for any incidental, special, punitive, exemplary or consequential damages experienced by either the Customer or a third party (including, but not limited to, loss of data or information, loss of profits, or loss of use). ADTRAN is not liable for damages for any cause whatsoever (whether based in contract, tort, or otherwise) in excess of the amount paid for the item. Some states do not allow the limitation or exclusion of liability for incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to the Customer. 12 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Customer Service, Product Support Information, and Training ADTRAN will repair and return this product if within ten years from the date of shipment the product does not meet its published specification or the product fails while in service. A return material authorization (RMA) is required prior to returning equipment to ADTRAN. For service, RMA requests, training, or more information, use the contact information given below. Repair and Return If you determine that a repair is needed, please contact our Customer and Product Service (CAPS) department to have an RMA number issued. CAPS should also be contacted to obtain information regarding equipment currently in house or possible fees associated with repair. CAPS Department (256) 963-8722 Identify the RMA number clearly on the package (below address), and return to the following address: ADTRAN Customer and Product Service 901 Explorer Blvd. (East Tower) Huntsville, Alabama 35806 RMA # _____________ Pre-Sales Inquiries and Applications Support Your reseller should serve as the first point of contact for support. If additional pre-sales support is needed, the ADTRAN Support web site provides a variety of support services such as a searchable knowledge base, latest product documentation, application briefs, case studies, and a link to submit a question to an Applications Engineer. All of this, and more, is available at: http://support.adtran.com When needed, further pre-sales assistance is available by calling our Applications Engineering Department. Applications Engineering (800) 615-1176 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 13 Post-Sale Support Your reseller should serve as the first point of contact for support. If additional support is needed, the ADTRAN Support web site provides a variety of support services such as a searchable knowledge base, updated firmware releases, latest product documentation, service request ticket generation and trouble-shooting tools. All of this, and more, is available at: http://support.adtran.com When needed, further post-sales assistance is available by calling our Technical Support Center. Please have your unit serial number available when you call. Technical Support (888) 4ADTRAN Installation and Maintenance Support The ADTRAN Custom Extended Services (ACES) program offers multiple types and levels of installation and maintenance services which allow you to choose the kind of assistance you need. This support is available at: http://www.adtran.com/aces For questions, call the ACES Help Desk. ACES Help Desk (888) 874-ACES (2237) Training The Enterprise Network (EN) Technical Training Department offers training on our most popular products. These courses include overviews on product features and functions while covering applications of ADTRAN's product lines. ADTRAN provides a variety of training options, including customized training and courses taught at our facilities or at your site. For more information about training, please contact your Territory Manager or the Enterprise Training Coordinator. 14 Training Phone (800) 615-1176, ext. 7500 Training Fax (256) 963-6700 Training Email [email protected] © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CONTENTS System Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration and Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Firmware Upgradeable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame Relay Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Routing Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V.35 DTE Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integrated Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 17 18 18 18 18 18 18 19 19 19 19 IAD Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADSL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SDSL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHDSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 20 20 20 20 Resource Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 15 Section 1 System Description 16 Total Access 600 Series System Manual © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual 1. Section 1 System Description SYSTEM OVERVIEW The products of the Total Access 600 Series are Integrated Access Devices (IAD) designed for cost-effective deployment of voice and data services at the customer premises. The Total Access 600 Series benefits integrated communications providers (such as CLECs, ILECs, and ISPs) who require a customer premises device with integrated voice and data functions, and provides a viable migration path from TDM to packet-based technology. These IADs support applications such as VoDSL and VoATM. The Total Access 600 Series features remote management, built-in IP router, and life-line voice backup. An optional battery backup is also available for many of the models. The units include a Nx56/64 V.35 interface, 10/100BaseT interface, FXS ports, and network interfaces (T1, ADSL, SDSL, and SHDSL). The last two digits of the product name indicate the number of on-board FXS ports. The Total Access 604 contains four FXS ports, the Total Access 608 contains eight FXS ports, etc. The units can provision, test, and provide status for any of the voice and data interfaces. All connections are made via the rear panel. This line of IADs includes both the ATM and TDM versions of the Total Access 604/608/612/616/624. Until now, the Total Access TDM units have been running firmware version A.03.XX. Recently, A.04.XX has been released to support the TDM Total Access IADs. The development of A.04.XX code is a significant step in the evolution of the Total Access product line, as it allows all Total Access family members to share the same base code. This means that features and fixes are more easily implemented and are propagated across the product line. The TDM User Interface Guide section of this manual represents the A.04 firmware. There are two possible upgrade paths: (1) Upgrading from A.03 to A.04 directly (2) Upgrading from A.03 to A.03.90 (Transition Build) to A.04. Upgrading from A.03 to A.03.90 (Transition Build) to A.04 will save the unit’s configuration. Upgrading from A.03 to A.04 directly (or from A.04 to A.03 directly) will erase the unit’s configuration. See DLP-016, A.03 to A.04 Firmware Upgrade for more details. Units manufactured after October 2002 will not be compatible with some older versions of Total Access 612, 616, and 624 software. Refer to the following information if an older version of software is to be loaded into the unit. For TDM applications, please use software revision A.03.58 or later. For ATM applications, software revision D.01.30 or later is required. Using incompatible software will cause the unit to malfunction. For more information or technical assistance, please call ADTRAN Technical Support at 888-4ADTRAN. Please have the unit serial number available when contacting Technical Support. 2. FEATURES AND BENEFITS Below is a list of unit features and benefits. Some features are model-dependent. Configuration and Management • • • • VT100 Emulation via the Craft port Telnet SNMP Support for VoDSL gateway management systems and firmware download 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 17 Section 1 System Description Total Access 600 Series System Manual Firmware Upgradeable • • TFTP download XMODEM via Craft port Network Interface • • • • T1 ADSL SDSL SHDSL ATM Support • • • • • • • • • AAL2 (voice), AAL5 (data, voice) 6 PVCs (1 voice, 5 data) RFC 1483 (multiprotocol over ATM) PPPoA (RFC 2364) QoS Support: VBR-rt (voice), UBR (data) I.610 F5 OAM loopback G.165/G.168 echo cancellation, 8 ms echo tail Voice Codes: PCM (G.711), 32k ADPCM (G.726) Idle channel suppression Frame Relay Support • • Copper Mountain CE fragmentation support FRF.5 and FRF.8 support (V.35) Analog Ports • Analog FXS ports per TR-57, 50-Pin Amp (number of ports is unit dependent) • • Supports popular CLASSTM features Modes: FXS Loop Start, FXS Ground Start, TR08 Single, TR08 UVG, DP0, Tandem (E&M) • • • • • • Assured DialtoneTM Lifeline POTS port Unbalanced ringing, 5 REN per port not to exceed 35 REN (Total Access 612/616/624) Balanced ringing, 3.75 REN per port not to exceed 15 REN (Total Access 604/608) Fixed 88 Vrms ringer (Total access 612/616/624) Programmable ring voltage from 45 Vrms-62 Vrms (Total Access 604/608) Distance up to 1000 feet Routing Capability • 18 Ethernet: 10/100BaseT (RJ-45) © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual • • • • • Section 1 System Description IEEE 802.3 and 802.1D (MAC Bridging) IP Support: TCP, RIP V1, RIP V2, UDP, ICMP, ARP, UDP Relay, SYSLOG PPP Support: LCP, IPCP, BCP DHCP Server to LAN, DHCP from network (NAT) Copper Mountain Compatible Security • • • • • • PAP, CHAP, EAP, and Radius NAT with multi-point to single-point Future support of NAT multi-point to multi-point PAT with DHCP Filtering (Pattern, IP, Bridge) Password protection V.35 DTE Interface • • • Data Rate: Nx56 or Nx64 kbps (N=1 to 24) Electrical and Mechanical: CCITT V.35, 34-pin Frame Relay (FRF.5, FRF.8 capable) Integrated Components • • • • • • IP router Life-line voice backup Network connection 10/100 BaseT connection V.35 Nx56/64 DTE interface Craft port Testing • • • Local/Remote Loopbacks Payloads FXS Tests 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 19 Section 1 System Description 3. Total Access 600 Series System Manual IAD SYSTEMS The units support a variety of WAN technologies. The units are listed below in categories based on these technologies. T1 • • • • • • • • • • • • • P/N 4200641L1 P/N 4200641L2 P/N 4200681L1 P/N 4200681L2 P/N 4200612L1#TDM P/N 4200612L1#ATM P/N 4200612L2#TDM P/N 4200616L1#TDM P/N 4200616L1#ATM P/N 4200616L2#TDM P/N 4200624L1#TDM P/N 4200624L1#ATM P/N 4200624L2#TDM Total Access 604 T1 TDM Total Access 604 T1 ATM Total Access 608 T1 TDM Total Access 608 T1 ATM Total Access 612 T1 TDM Total Access 612 T1 ATM Total Access 612 T1 TDM with Echo Cancellation, ADPCM Module Total Access 616 T1 TDM Total Access 616 T1 ATM Total Access 616 T1 TDM with Echo Cancellation, ADPCM Module Total Access 624 T1 TDM Total Access 624 T1 ATM Total Access 624 T1 TDM with Echo Cancellation, ADPCM Module ADSL • • P/N 4200644L1 P/N 4200684L1 Total Access 604 ADSL Total Access 608 ADSL SDSL • • • • • P/N 4200642L1 P/N 4200682L1 P/N 4200612L2 P/N 4200616L2 P/N 4200624L2 Total Access 604 SDSL Total Access 608 SDSL Total Access 612 SDSL Total Access 616 SDSL Total Access 624 SDSL SHDSL • • • • • 20 P/N 4200643L1 P/N 4200683L1 P/N 4200612L3 P/N 4200616L3 P/N 4200624L3 Total Access 604 SHDSL Total Access 608 SHDSL Total Access 612 SHDSL Total Access 616 SHDSL Total Access 624 SHDSL © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual 4. Section 1 System Description RESOURCE MODULES Echo Canceller with ADPCM The Echo Canceller Module provides G.165/G.168 echo cancellation for voice over ATM applications and is available with Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation (ADPCM). ADPCM is a speech coding method which uses fewer bits than traditional Pulse Code Modulation (PCM), allowing the user to get more analog voice calls on less bandwidth. Echo cancellation and ADPCM resources are built into all Total Access 604/608 units and the third generation Total Access 612/616/624 units (P/N 1203612L1, 1203616L1, and 1203624L1). The Total Access 612/616/624 T1 TDM units (P/N 4200612L1#TDM, 4200616L1#TDM, and 4200624L1#TDM) may be upgraded to include echo cancellation via three methods: 1. The upgrade package may be purchased from ADTRAN. This package includes EC/ADPCM (P/N 1200613L1) and the ADTRAN installation and test. If this package is ordered, the customer must send their TDM 612/616/624 unit back to ADTRAN. Once received the EC/ADPCM module is installed along with the latest VoATM firmware. The upgraded unit is then tested and returned to the customer. Please call ADTRAN CAPs department at 800-9-ADTRAN extension 7722 for this service. 2. An EC/ADPCM module may be purchased separately and installed by the customer. The latest VoATM firmware may be obtained from the ADTRAN website (http://www.ADTRAN.com) and loaded into the unit by the customer. For more detailed instructions, refer to DLP-015 TDM to ATM Upgrade. 3. For customers who plan to initially operate a TDM application, but eventually upgrade to an ATM application, a Total Access 612/616/624 unit may be purchased with the EC/ADPCM card installed (P/N 4200612L2#TDM, 4200616L2#TDM, 4200642L2#TDM). When the circuit is converted to ATM, the ATM firmware must be obtained from the ADTRAN website (http://www.ADTRAN.com) and loaded into the unit by the customer. For more detailed instructions, refer to DLP-015 TDM to ATM Upgrade. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 21 Section 1 System Description 22 Total Access 600 Series System Manual © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A ENGINEERING GUIDELINES CONTENTS Equipment Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Total Access 604/608 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Total Access 612/616/624. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Reviewing the Front Panel Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Total Access 604/608 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Total Access 612/616/624. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Front Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Reviewing the Rear Panel Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Voice Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Life Line Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 NTWK Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Craft Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 10/100BaseT Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 V.35 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Battery Backup Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 AC Power Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 DB-9 to RJ Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 At-A-Glance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 FIGURES Figure 1. Figure 2. Figure 3. Figure 4. Figure 5. Total Access 604/608 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total Access 612/616/624 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total Access 604/608 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total Access 612/616/624 Rear Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice Connector Pin Assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 26 26 30 30 31 23 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Total Access 600 Series System Manual TABLES Table 1. Table 2. Table 3. Table 4. Table 5. Table 6. Table 7. Table 8. Table 9. Table 10. Table 11. Table 12. Table 13. Table 14. 24 AC Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Total Access 604/608 TDM Front Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Total Access 612/616/624 TDM Front Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Total Access 604/608/612/616/624 ATM Front Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 LIFE LINE Connection Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 T1 NTWK Connection Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 ADSL Network Connection Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 SDSL Network Connection Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 SHDSL Network Connection Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 CRAFT Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 10/100BaseT Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 V.35 Interface Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 DB-9 to RJ Adapter Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual 1. Section 2 Engineering Guidelines EQUIPMENT DIMENSIONS Total Access 604/608 The Total Access 604/608 units measure 11.25” W, 7.5” D, and 2” H and come equipped for table top or wall mount use. Total Access 612/616/624 The Total Access 612/616/624 units measure 17” W, 8.5” D, and 1.75” H and come equipped for table top or wall mount use. They can also be mounted in a 19” or 23” rack with the purchase of mounting brackets (P/N1200627L1 - 19” and P/N1200627 L2- 23”). 2. POWER REQUIREMENTS AC Power The units vary in their maximum power consumption and current draw. See Table 1 for details. Table 1. AC Power Requirements Maximum Power Consumption Maximum Current Draw Total Access 604 90-125 VAC 60 Hz 300 mA Total Access 608 90-125 VAC 60 Hz 300 mA Total Access 612 90-120 VAC 60 Hz 1.3 A Total Access 616 90-120 VAC 60 Hz 1.3 A Total Access 624 90-120 VAC 60 Hz 1.3 A Product 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 25 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines 3. Total Access 600 Series System Manual REVIEWING THE FRONT PANEL DESIGN Total Access 604/608 The front panels of the Total Access 604/608 units are identical. Figure 1 shows the Total Access 608 as a representative of both models. Table 2 on page 27 and Table 4 on page 29 describe the LEDs and their functions. Figure 1. Total Access 604/608 Front Panel Total Access 612/616/624 The front panels of the Total Access 612/616/624 units are identical. Figure 2 shows the Total Access 612 as a representative of all three models. Table 3 on page 28 and Table 4 on page 29 describe the LEDs and their functions. Figure 2. Total Access 612/616/624 Front Panel 26 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Front Panel LEDs The front panel provides eight status LEDs to monitor operation and activity. The LED functionality varies based on product and software load (TDM vs ATM). The following tables provide LED activity explanations for the various combinations. Table 2. Total Access 604/608 TDM Front Panel LEDs For these LEDs... This color light... Indicates that... TX/RX Off There is no data traffic on the LAN. Green (blinking) There is data traffic on the LAN. Off The physical link is down, there is no Ethernet connection. Green (solid) There is link integrity on the LAN (physical link is up). Off No data traffic is being received on the V.35. Green (blinking) Data is being received on the V.35. Off No data traffic is being transmitted on the V.35. Green (blinking) Data is being transmitted on the V.35. Red (solid) The T1 is in red alarm or T1 sync loss has occurred. Yellow (solid) The T1 is in test. Green (solid) Layer 2 is up. Off The T1 is down. Green (blinking) The phone is off hook. Green (solid) The T1 is up and the phone is on hook. Off AC has failed and no battery. Green (solid) AC is operational and battery is good. Red/Green (alternating) AC is operational and battery is bad. Amber (solid) AC has failed and the battery is good. Red/Amber (alternating) AC has failed and the battery is bad. Green (solid) Layer 1 is up. Green (blinking) Layer 1 is not up. LINK V.35 RX V.35 TX DATA VOICE BATT PWR NET 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 27 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Total Access 600 Series System Manual Table 3. Total Access 612/616/624 TDM Front Panel LEDs For these LEDs... This color light... Indicates that... TX/RX Off There is no data traffic on the LAN. Green (blinking) There is data traffic on the LAN. Off The physical link is down, there is no Ethernet connection. Green (solid) There is link integrity on the LAN (physical link is up). Off No data traffic is being received on the V.35. Green (blinking) Data is being received on the V.35. Off No data traffic is being transmitted on the V.35. Green (blinking) Data is being transmitted on the V.35. Red (solid) The T1 is in red alarm or T1 sync loss has occurred. Yellow (solid) The T1 is in test. Green (solid) Layer 2 is up. Red (solid) The T1 is down. Green (blinking) The phone is off hook. Green (solid) The T1 is up and the phone is on hook. Off AC has failed and no battery. Green (solid) AC is operational and battery is good. Red/Green (alternating) AC is operational and battery is bad. Amber (solid) AC has failed and the battery is good. Red/Amber (alternating) AC has failed and the battery is bad. Green (solid) Layer 1 is up. Green (blinking) Layer 1 is not up. LINK V.35 RX V.35 TX DATA VOICE BATT PWR NET The only difference in the 604/608 TDM LEDs and the 612/616/624 TDM LEDs is in the Voice LED. For the 604/608, the Voice LED is off if the T1 is down. For the 612/616/624, the Voice LED is solid red if the T1 is down. 28 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Table 4. Total Access 604/608/612/616/624 ATM Front Panel LEDs For these LEDs... This color light... Indicates that... TX/RX Off There is no data traffic on the LAN. Green (blinking) There is data traffic on the LAN. Off The physical link is down, there is no Ethernet connection. Green (solid) There is link integrity on the LAN (physical link is up). Off No data traffic is being received on the V.35. Green (blinking) Data is being received on the V.35. Off No data traffic is being transmitted on the V.35. Green (blinking) Data is being transmitted on the V.35. Red (solid) Layer 2 is not up. Green (solid) Layer 2 is up. Red (solid) The T1 is down. Green (blinking) The phone is off hook. VOICE Red (solid) Gateway link is down. (if Gateway is Jetstream) Green (solid) Gateway link is up. VOICE Red (solid) Layer 2 is down. (if Gateway is Coppercom or LES-CAS) Green (solid) Layer 2 is up. VOICE Red (solid) Gateway status is inactive. (if Gateway is Tollbridge) Green (solid) Gateway status is active. VOICE Yellow (blinking) The phone is off hook. (if no Gateway) Off The phone is on hook. LINK V.35 RX V.35 TX DATA VOICE 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 29 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Total Access 600 Series System Manual Table 4. Total Access 604/608/612/616/624 ATM Front Panel LEDs (Continued) For these LEDs... This color light... Indicates that... BATT Off AC has failed and no battery. Green (solid) AC is operational and battery is good. Red/Green (alternating) AC is operational and battery is bad. Amber (solid) AC has failed and the battery is good. Red/Amber (alternating) AC has failed and the battery is bad. Green (solid) Layer 1 is up. Green (blinking slowly) Unit was unable to train -- Layer 1 is down. Green (blinking rapidly) Layer 1 is training (SDSL and SHDSL only). PWR NET 4. REVIEWING THE REAR PANEL DESIGN The Total Access 600 Series rear panel contains the same 8 ports regardless of the model. Figure 3 shows the Total Access 604/608 rear panel and Figure 4 shows the Total Access 612/616/624 rear panel. The sections following the figures provide detailed information about each port’s functionality and pinouts. Figure 3. Total Access 604/608 Rear Panel Figure 4. Total Access 612/616/624 Rear Panel 30 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Voice Connection A single 50-pin female amphenol connector provides the interconnect wiring for the analog circuits. Figure 5 on page 31 shows the pinouts for the Voice connector. Connector type 50-pin female amphenol 25 24 50 49 23 48 22 47 21 46 20 45 19 44 18 43 17 42 16 41 15 40 14 39 13 38 12 37 11 36 10 35 9 34 8 33 7 32 6 31 5 30 4 29 3 28 2 1 27 26 P P P Slot 6 P P P P Slot 5 P P P P Slot 4 P P P P Slot 3 P P P P Slot 2 P P P P Slot 1 P NC NC T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R Circuit 4 Circuit 3 Circuit 2 Circuit 1 Circuit 4 Circuit 3 Circuit 2 Circuit 1 Circuit 4 Circuit 3 Circuit 2 Circuit 1 Circuit 4 Circuit 3 Circuit 2 Circuit 1 Circuit 4 Circuit 3 Circuit 2 Circuit 1 Circuit 4 Circuit 3 Circuit 2 Circuit 1 50 PIN AMP RECEPTACLE Figure 5. Voice Connector Pin Assignments 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 31 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Total Access 600 Series System Manual Life Line Connection The LIFE LINE connector provides assured voice for port 1. If the unit loses power or goes into alarm, the network voice service is inhibited and the on-board relay opens. The first port of the voice connector is provided with analog voice from the LIFE LINE connection. A regular POTS line needs to be plugged into the Life Line port. Table 5 shows the LIFE LINE Connection pinout. Connector type 8-pin modular Table 5. LIFE LINE Connection Pinout PIN DESCRIPTION 1-2 Not used 3 Life Line ring 4 Life Line tip 5-6 Not used NTWK Connection The NTWK connection pinout is unit-dependent. The possibilities are T1, ADSL, SDSL, and SHDSL. Table 6 through Table 9 show the pinouts for these network connections. Connector type RJ-48C Table 6. T1 NTWK Connection Pinout PIN 32 NAME DESCRIPTION 1 R1 RXDATA-RING Receive data from the network 2 T1 RXDATA-TIP Receive data from the network 3 — UNUSED — 4 R TXDATA-RING Transmit data toward the network 5 T TXDATA-TIP Transmit data toward the network 6, 7, 8 — UNUSED — © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Table 7. ADSL Network Connection Pinout PIN NAME DESCRIPTION 1 Network Rx Ring Receive data from the network 2 Network Rx Tip Receive data from the network 3 — — 4 Network Tx Ring Transmit data toward the network 5 Network Tx Tip Transmit data toward the network — — 6-8 Table 8. SDSL Network Connection Point PIN NAME DESCRIPTION 1 Network Rx Ring Receive data from the network 2 Network Rx Tip Receive data from the network 3 — — 4 Network Tx Ring Transmit data toward the network 5 Network Tx Tip Transmit data toward the network — — 6-8 Table 9. SHDSL Network Connection Pinout PIN NAME DESCRIPTION 1 Network Rx Ring Receive data from the network 2 Network Rx Tip Receive data from the network 3 — — 4 Network Tx Ring Transmit data toward the network 5 Network Tx Tip Transmit data toward the network — — 6-8 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 33 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Total Access 600 Series System Manual Craft Port The CRAFT port connects to a computer or modem. The CRAFT port input provides the following functions: • Accepts input from a PC or a modem for controlling the unit. • Operates at 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 bps. • Acts as input for either VT 100 or PC control. • Acts as an interface for flash memory software downloads using XMODEM. The CRAFT connection follows, and Table 10 shows the pinout. Connector type RJ-48C Table 10. CRAFT Pinout PIN 34 NAME DESCRIPTION 1 GND Ground - connected to unit chassis 2 RTS Request to send - flow control 3 RXDATA Data received by the unit. 4 DTR Data terminal ready 5 TXDATA Data transmitted by the unit. 6 CD Carrier detect 7 UNUSED — 8 CTS Clear to send - flow control © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 2 Engineering Guidelines 10/100BaseT Connection The 10/100BaseT port (RJ-48C) provides a 10/100BaseT Ethernet LAN connection, which is used for IP Routing, TFTP, SNMP, and Telnet connections. The 10/100BaseT connection follows, and Table 11 shows the pinout. Connector type RJ-48C Table 11. 10/100BaseT Pinout PIN NAME DESCRIPTION 1 TX1 Transmit Positive 2 TX2 Transmit Negative 3 RX1 Receive Positive 4, 5 UNUSED — 6 RX2 Receive Negative 7, 8 UNUSED — V.35 Connection The DTE interface is compliant with ITU Recommendation V.35 through a standard 34-pin Winchester connector. The V.35 connection follows, and Table 12 shows the pinout. Connector type 34-pin Winchester Table 12. V.35 Interface Pinout PIN CCITT A 101 Protective ground (PG) B 102 Signal ground (SG) C 105 Request to send (RTS) from DTE D 106 Clear to send (CTS) to DTE E 107 Data set ready (DSR) to DTE F 109 Received line signal detector (DCD) to DTE H — Data terminal ready (DTR) from DTE J — Ring indicator (RI) R 104 Received data (RD-A) to DTE T 104 Received data (RD-B) to DTE V 115 RX clock (RC-A) to DTE X 115 RX clock (RC-B) to DTE 61200624L1-1A DESCRIPTION © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 35 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Total Access 600 Series System Manual Table 12. V.35 Interface Pinout (Continued) PIN CCITT DESCRIPTION P 103 Transmitted data (TD-A) from DTE S 103 Transmitted data (TD-B) from DTE Y 114 TX clock (TC-A) to DTE AA 114 TX clock (TC-B) to DTE U 113 External TX clock (ETC-A) from DTE W 113 External TX clock (ETC-B) from DTE NN — Test mode (TM) to DTE Battery Backup Connection An optional battery backup system is available for the Total Access 604/608 (P/N 1200641L1) and the Total Access 612/616/624 (P/N 1175044L1, 1175044L2, or 1175044L4). Refer to the documentation available for your specific battery backup unit. AC Power Connection Each unit includes an auto ranging 90-250 VAC, 50/60 Hz power supply with a 3-prong removable cable. Connect the power supply to a standard 120 VAC, 60 Hz electrical outlet for proper operation. 5. DB-9 TO RJ ADAPTER The DB-9 to RJ adapter is used to connect a PC or VT100 terminal to the CRAFT port. This adapter does not ship with the unit. A customer can obtain a free adapter (P/N 3196ADPT001) by contacting ADTRAN Technical Support or can order the adapter with the unit. Customers can also build their own adapters by purchasing unassembled adapter kits through companies like Black Box and Datacomm Warehouse. The adapter pinout is shown in Table 13. Table 13. DB-9 to RJ Adapter Pinout DB-9 RJ-45 DESCRIPTION 2 5 TX Data 3 3 RX Data 5 1 GND Note: All other pins are unused. 36 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual 6. Section 2 Engineering Guidelines AT-A-GLANCE SPECIFICATIONS Table 14 lists the unit specifications. Table 14. Specifications Application Feature Specification T1 Network Interface Physical Interface RJ-48C Line Rate 1.544 Mbps +/- 75 bps Framing D4 (SF)/ESF AT&T 54016 ANSI T1.403 Line Code AMI/B8ZS ADSL Network Interface (ITU G.992.1) Throughput Up to 8 Mbps downstream/ Up to 1 Mbps upstream Interoperability Interoperate with G.992.1 compliant DSLAMs G.SHDSL Network Interface (ITU G.991.2) Line Rate 192 kbps to 2.3 Mbps SDSL Network Interface (2B1Q Conexant-based) Line Rate 160 kbps to 2.3 Mbps Training Conexant Autobaud capable Voice Codes PCM (G.711) 32K ADPCM (G.726) PVC Capability 6 PVCs (1 voice, 5 data) Echo Cancellation G.165/G.168 Echo Cancellation, 8 ms echo tail QoS Support VBR-rt (voice) UBR (data) Specifications AAL2 (voice) AAL5 (data, voice) RFC 1483 (multiprotocol over ATM) RFC 2364 (PPPoA) Specifications FRF.5 FRF.8 ATM Support Frame Relay Support 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 37 Section 2 Engineering Guidelines Total Access 600 Series System Manual Table 14. Specifications (Continued) Application Feature Specification Analog Ports Number of FXS Ports 4 ports for Total Access 604 8 ports for Total Access 608 12 ports for Total Access 612 16 ports for Total Access 616 24 ports for Total Access 624 Modes FXS Loop Start FXS Ground Start TR08 Single TR08 UVG DP0 Tandem (E&M) Ringing Unbalanced ringing, 5 REN per port not to exceed 35 REN (Total Access 612/616/624) Balanced ringing, 3.75 REN per port not to exceed 15 REN (Total Access 604/608) Ring Voltage Fixed 88 Vrms ringer (Total Access 612/616/624) Programmable ring voltage from 45 Vrms-62 Vrms (Total Access 604/608) Specifications IEEE 802.3 IP Support TCP, RIP V1, RIP V2, UDP, ICMP, ARP, UDP Relay, SYSLOG PPP Support LCP, IPCP, BCP DHCP DHCP Server to LAN DHCP from network (NAT) Craft Interface EIA 232, Physical RJ-48C Ethernet 10/100BaseT Interface SNMP V1 support • 604/608 ATM units running D.01.36 firmware or previous • 612/616/624 ATM units running D.01.30 firmware or previous SNMP V2 support • TDM units running A.04 firmware or later Routing (Ethernet) Management Full menu-driven Telnet access Software download via TFTP Support for VoDSL gateway management systems and firmware download 38 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A NETWORK TURNUP PROCEDURE CONTENTS Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Unpack and Inspect the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Contents of ADTRAN Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Grounding Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 DC Power (Optional Battery Backup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Supplying Power to the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 AC Powered Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 DC Powered Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Mounting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Total Access 604/608 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Total Access 612/616/624. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc 39 Section 3 Network Turnup Procedure 40 Total Access 600 Series System Manual © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual 1. Section 3 Network Turnup Procedure INTRODUCTION This section discusses the unit installation process. 2. TOOLS REQUIRED The tools required for unit installation are: • • Screws (customer-provided for wallmount installation) Screwdriver (for wall or rackmount installation) To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm. During installation, power should be the last connection made. Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling modules, wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electrical components. Place modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing. When working on modules, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded. 3. UNPACK AND INSPECT THE SYSTEM Each unit is shipped in its own cardboard shipping carton. Open each carton carefully and avoid deep penetration into the carton with sharp objects. After unpacking the unit, inspect it for possible shipping damage. If the equipment has been damaged in transit, immediately file a claim with the carrier, then contact ADTRAN Customer Service (see Customer Service, Product Support Information, and Training in the front of this manual). Contents of ADTRAN Shipment Your ADTRAN shipment of the unit (regardless of product or software load -- ATM vs TDM) includes the following items: • • • • • • Mounting Instructions (P/N 61200680L1-19B) CD (P/N 3253052@A) Cable Tie (P/N 3292032) Silver Satin Cable (P/N 3127004) Four Rubber Feet (P/N 3270BF003) Power Cord (P/N 3127009) 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc 41 Section 3 Network Turnup Procedure • 4. Total Access 600 Series System Manual The Total Access 600 Series base unit (Total Access 604, Total Access 608, Total Access 612, Total Access 616, Total Access 624). The units come with installed wallmount brackets. GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS The following provides grounding instruction information from the Underwriters’ Laboratory UL 60950 Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment Including Electrical Business Equipment, with revisions dated March 15, 2002. AC Power The attachment-plug receptacles in the vicinity of the product or system are all to be of a grounding type, and the equipment grounding conductors serving these receptacles are to be connected to earth ground at the service equipment. DC Power (Optional Battery Backup) The Total Access units are not DC powered. However, an optional DC battery backup system is available for the Total Access 604/608 (P/N 1200641L1) and the Total Access 612/616/624 (P/N 1175044L1, 1175044L2, or 1175044L4). A supplementary equipment grounding conductor shall be installed between the product or system and ground that is in addition to the equipment grounding conductor in the power supply cord. The supplementary equipment grounding conductor shall not be smaller in size than the ungrounded branch-circuit supply conductors. The supplementary equipment grounding conductor shall be connected to the product at the terminal provided, and shall be connected to ground in a manner that will retain the ground connection when the product is unplugged from the receptacle. The connection to ground of the supplementary equipment grounding conductor shall be in compliance with the rules for terminating bonding jumpers at Part K or Article 250 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70. Termination of the supplementary equipment grounding conductor is permitted to be made to building steel, to a metal electrical raceway system, or to any grounded item that is permanently and reliably connected to the electrical service equipment ground. The supplemental grounding conductor shall be connected to the equipment using a number 8 ring terminal and should be fastened to the grounding lug provided on the rear panel of the equipment. The ring terminal should be installed using the appropriate crimping tool (AMP P/N 59250 T-EAD Crimping Tool or equivalent.) 5. SUPPLYING POWER TO THE UNIT AC Powered Systems The AC powered unit comes equipped with a detachable power cord with a 3-prong plug for connecting to a grounded power receptacle. As shipped, the unit is set to factory default conditions. After installing the chassis, the unit is ready for power-up. To power-up the unit, ensure that the unit is properly connected to an appropriate power source. 42 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual • • • • Section 3 Network Turnup Procedure This unit shall be installed in accordance with Article 400 and 364.8 of the NEC NFPA 70 when installed outside of a Restricted Access Location (i.e., central office, behind a locked door, service personnel only area). Power to the unit’s AC system must be from a grounded 90-130 VAC, 50/60 Hz source. The power receptacle uses double-pole, neutral fusing. Maximum recommended ambient operating temperature is 45 ºC. DC Powered Systems An optional battery backup system is available for the Total Access 604/608 (P/N 1200641L1) and the Total Access 612/616/624 (P/N 1175044L1, 1175044L2, or 1175044L4). Refer to the documentation available for your specific battery backup unit. • • The backup system shall be installed in accordance with Article 400 and 364.8 of the NEC NFPA 70 when installed outside of a Restricted Access Location (i.e., central office, behind a locked door, service personnel only area). Power to the backup system must be from a grounded 90-130 VAC, 50/60 Hz source which is electrically isolated from the AC source. The power receptacle for the backup system uses double-pole, neutral fusing. • Maximum recommended ambient operating temperature is 45 oC. • 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc 43 Section 3 Network Turnup Procedure 6. Total Access 600 Series System Manual MOUNTING OPTIONS Total Access 604/608 • The Total Access 604/608 units come equipped for table top or wallmount use. The units come with installed wallmount brackets. If wallmounted, the Total Access 604/608 units must be mounted with the LEDs pointing down or sideways as shown in the mounting instructions (61200624L1-19A). Total Access 612/616/624 • The Total Access 612/616/624 units come equipped for table top or wallmount use. The units come with installed wallmount brackets. The units can also be mounted in a 19” or 23” rack with the purchase of mounting brackets (P/N 1200627L1 for the 19” rack and P/N 1200627L2 for the 23” rack). If wallmounted, the Total Access 612/616/624 units must be mounted with the LEDs pointing down or sideways as shown in the mounting instructions (61200624L1-19A). If rack mounted, the installed wallmount brackets must first be removed. 44 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc 61200624L1-1A SECTION 4.0 USER INTERFACE GUIDES (UIG) The UIG section of this system manual provides detailed definitions, ranges, and default values for all menu items. Due to the inherent differences associated with the various physical interfaces and software loads, it was necessary to create separate UIGs for each combination of these parameters. The commons UIG provides terminal navigation information and defines any parameter which appears regardless of physical interface or software load. The UIGs contained in this section are shown below. Section 4.1 Commons User Interface Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Section 4.2 T1 TDM User Interface Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Section 4.3 T1 ATM User Interface Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Section 4.4 ADSL ATM User Interface Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Section 4.5 SDSL ATM User Interface Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM User Interface Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Section 4.7 FXS User Interface Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 45 Section 4.0 UIG Index 46 Total Access 600 Series System Manual © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A SECTION 4.1 COMMONS USER INTERFACE GUIDE This section covers all the common features and attributes for all models in the Total Access 600 Series of products (regardless of physical interface or software load). It contains information about VT100 control and navigation, and system control. It is designed for use by network administrators and others who will configure and provision the system. SECTION INDEX Navigating the Terminal Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Terminal Menu Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Navigating using the Keyboard Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Terminal Menu and System Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Selecting the Appropriate Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Telnet Security Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 FIGURES Figure 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top-Level Terminal Menu Window49 Figure 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alternate Window View50 TABLES Table 1. Telnet Password Security Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 47 Section 4.1 Commons User Interface Guide 48 Total Access 600 Series System Manual © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual 1. Section 4.1 Commons User Interface Guide NAVIGATING THE TERMINAL MENU Terminal Menu Window The unit uses a multi-level menu structure that contains both menu items and data fields. All menu items and data fields display in the terminal menu window (see Figure 1), through which you have complete control of the unit. All figures in this section will be representative of the Total Access 624 unit. Menu Path Left Pane Right Pane Network Status Extended Help Tool Tip Slot Status Navigation Help System Time Figure 1. Top-Level Terminal Menu Window Menu Path The first line of the terminal menu window (the menu path) shows the session’s current position (path) in the menu structure. For example, Figure 1 shows the top-level menu with the cursor on the System Info submenu; therefore, the menu path reads TA 624 IAD/System Info. Window Panes When you first start a terminal menu session, the terminal menu window is divided into left and right panes. The left pane shows the list of available submenus, while the right pane shows the contents of the currently selected submenu. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 49 Section 4.1 Commons User Interface Guide Total Access 600 Series System Manual You can view the terminal windows in two ways: with fields and submenus displaying horizontally across the right pane, or with fields and submenus displaying vertically down the right pane. Viewing submenus vertically rather than horizontally allows you to see information at a glance rather than scrolling horizontally across the window. To change the view, move your cursor to an index number and press <Enter>. Figure 2 shows this alternate view. Fields and submenu names may vary slightly in this view. Figure 2. Alternate Window View Window Pane Navigation Use the following chart to assist you in moving between and within the two window panes. To do this... Press this key... Move from left pane to right pane Tab, Enter, or Right arrow Move from right pane to left pane Tab, Escape, Left arrow, or Backspace Move within each pane Up/Down or Left/Right arrows Right Window Pane Notation The right window pane shows the contents of the currently selected menu. These contents can include both submenu items and data fields. Some submenus contain additional submenus and some data fields contain additional data fields. The following chart explains the notation used to identify these additional items. 50 This notation... Means that... [+] More items are available when selected <+> An action is to be taken, such as activating a test Highlighted menu item You can enter data in this field Underlined field The field contains read-only information © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.1 Commons User Interface Guide Additional Terminal Menu Window Features • • • • • • Tool Tip - provides a brief description of the currently selected mode Network Status - displays network status information, Up or Down Slot Status - displays type of module installed in each slot. No entry will appear for slots not containing a module. Extended Help - displays information about selected commands (CTRL+A) Navigation Help - lists characters used for navigating the terminal menu and session management (CTRL+Z) System Time - displays current time Navigating using the Keyboard Keys You can use various keystrokes to move through the terminal menu, to manage a terminal menu session, and to configure the system. Press <CTRL+Z> to activate a pop-up screen listing the navigation keystrokes. Moving Through the Menus To do this... Press this key... Return to the home screen H Jump between two menu items Press <J> while the cursor is located on a menu item, and you jump back to the main screen. Go to another menu item, press <J>, and you jump back to the screen that was displayed the first time you pressed <J>. Press <J> anytime you want to jump between these items. J Select items Arrows Edit a selected menu item Enter Cancel an edit Escape Close pop-up help screen Escape Move between the left and right panes Tab Arrows Move to the top of a screen A Move to the bottom of a screen Z Ascend one menu level Backspace Jump to terminal mode (only supported in T1 TDM code) Ctrl + T Jump to NAT menu (only supported in T1 TDM code) Ctrl + N Return to Login prompt (CRAFT Port connection only) Ctrl + L Return to Login prompt (CRAFT Port connection only) Ctrl + S 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 51 Section 4.1 Commons User Interface Guide Total Access 600 Series System Manual Session Management Keystrokes To do this... Press this key... Log out of a session (Telnet Connection) CTRL+L Refresh the screen CTRL+R To save time, only the portion of the screen that has changed is refreshed. This option should only be necessary if the display picks up incorrect characters. Configuration Keystrokes To do this... Press this key... F Restore factory default settings. This setting restores the factory defaults based on the location of the cursor. Copy selected items to the clipboard. C The amount of information you can copy depends on the cursor location when you press <C>: If the cursor is over an editable field, only that item is copied. If the cursor is over the index number of a list, then all of the items in the row of the list are copied. For example, if the cursor is over the DS0 field in the EDIT/VIEW MAP screen, all of the information associated with the DS0 is copied. Paste the item stored in the clipboard, if the information is compatible. P You must confirm all pastes - except those to a single editable field. Increment the value of certain types of fields by one when you paste information into those fields. > Decrement the value of certain types of fields by one when you paste information into those fields. < Insert a new list item. For example, add a new item to the TELNET USER LIST connection list by pressing <I> while the cursor is over the index number. I Delete a list item. For example, delete an item from the TELNET USER LIST connection list by pressing <D> while the index number is active. 52 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. D 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual 2. Section 4.1 Commons User Interface Guide TERMINAL MENU AND SYSTEM CONTROL Selecting the Appropriate Menu The terminal menu is the access point to all other operations. Each terminal menu item has several functions and submenus that identify and provide access to specific operations and parameters. Use the chart below to help select the appropriate terminal menu. To do this... Go to this menu... Review and monitor general system information SYSTEM INFO Set up the management, syslog, and network time SYSTEM CONFIG Upgrade firmware, do config transfers, ping, traceroute, reset unit, and access terminal mode SYSTEM UTILITY Configure and monitor the T1, ethernet, V.35, and FXS interfaces INTERFACES Configure and monitor the L2 protocol for the T1 and ethernet interfaces L2 PROTOCOL Configure and monitor bridging parameters BRIDGE Define, configure, and monitor all router functions ROUTER Configure the filter defines and Radius server SECURITY Configure and apply DS0 maps DS0 MAPS Telnet Security Levels To edit terminal menu items via Telnet, you must have a password and the appropriate security level. Table 1 describes the security levels. Table 1. Telnet Password Security Levels Security Level Description Full The user has all access to view and configure all menus (same as logging in to the Craft port) Support The user has access to view SYSTEM INFO. The user has privileges to view and change everything under the SYSTEM CONFIG menu except for the Craft port settings, telnet access lists, and the SNMP management communities. The user has full access to the SYSTEM UTILITY menu, including the ability to upgrade firmware and reset the unit. The user has full access to the INTERFACES, L2 PROTOCOL, BRIDGE, ROUTER, and DS0 menus. The user does not have the ability to set RADIUS SERVER settings under the SECURITY menu. Config The same privileges as support, except that the user does not have privileges to download firmware or configuration from the SYSTEM UTILITY menu. The user additionally does not have the privilege to reset the unit remotely, or enter the terminal menu. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 53 Section 4.1 Commons User Interface Guide Total Access 600 Series System Manual Table 1. Telnet Password Security Levels (Continued) Security Level 54 Description Router The user has view only privileges of SYSTEM INFO. There is no access to the SYSTEM CONFIG menu. The user has PING and TRACEROUTE access from the SYSTEM UTILITY menu. The user is limited to ethernet configuration and status from the INTERFACES menu. The user has full access to the BRIDGE and ROUTER menus. Access is limited to filters only from the SECURITY menu. Voice The user has read privileges of the SYSTEM INFO menu. The user has access to the PING and TRACEROUTE utilities from the SYSTEM UTILITIES menu. The user has full access to the FXS module from the INTERFACES menu. Status The user has read access of all menus except for the following: SYSTEM CONFIG/CRAFT PORT, SYSTEM CONFIG/TELNET ACCESS, SYSTEM CONFIG/SNMP MANAGEMENT, and SECURITY/ RADIUS SERVER. The user does not have access to UPGRADE FIRMWARE, UPGRADE CONFIG, PING, or TRACEROUTE menus. The user cannot reset the unit or enter terminal mode. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A SECTION 4.2 T1 TDM USER INTERFACE GUIDE The T1 TDM User Interface Guide is designed for use by network administrators and others who will configure and provision the system. This section provides details unique to the T1 TDM IADs. It contains an overview, application details, configuration information, and menu descriptions. It is recommended that you review Section 4.1, Commons User Interface Guide in addition to this section. SECTION INDEX T1 TDM Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 T1 TDM Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 System Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Info > System Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Info > System Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Info > System Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Info > Unit Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Info > CLEI Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Info > Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Info > Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Info > Firmware Revision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Info > Bootcode Revision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Info > System Uptime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Info > Date/Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 60 60 61 61 61 61 61 61 61 61 61 System Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Config > Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Config > Syslog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Config > Network Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 62 68 73 System Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Utility > Upgrade Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Utility > Config Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Utility > System Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Utility > Ping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Utility > Traceroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Utility > Reset Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Utility > Terminal Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 75 76 77 78 79 79 79 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Interfaces (T1[0]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces (T1[0]) > Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces (T1[0]) > Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces (T1[0]) > Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 80 81 83 Interfaces (ETH[1]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Interfaces (ETH[1]) > Config. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Interfaces (ETH[1]) > Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 55 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Interfaces (V35[2]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Interfaces (V35[2]) > Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Interfaces (V35[2]) > Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Interfaces (FXS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces (FXS) > Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces (FXS) > Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfaces (FXS) > Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 86 88 89 L2 Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 L2 Protocol (T1[0]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 L2 Protocol (T1[0]) > Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 L2 Protocol (T1[0] - PPP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 L2 Protocol (T1[0] - PPP) > Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 L2 Protocol (T1[0] - PPP) > Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 L2 Protocol (T1[0] - FRE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 L2 Protocol (T1[0] - FRE) > Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 L2 Protocol (T1[0] - FRE) > Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 L2 Protocol (T1[0] - Auto) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 L2 Protocol (T1[0] - Auto) > Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 L2 Protocol (ETH[1]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L2 Protocol (ETH[1]) > Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L2 Protocol (ETH[1]) > Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L2 Protocol (ETH[1]) > Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 100 100 100 Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Bridge > Config. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Bridge > Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Router > Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Router > Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Security > Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Security > Radius Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 DS0 Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DS0 Maps > Active Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DS0 Maps > Apply Template to Map 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DS0 Maps > Edit/View Map 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DS0 Maps > Apply Template to Map 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A. Configuring the Unit for Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B. Configuring the Unit for Bridging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C. Configuring the Unit for Voice Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 137 137 137 137 138 140 146 148 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG FIGURES Figure 1. Figure 2. Figure 3. Figure 4. Figure 5. Figure 6. Figure 7. Figure 8. Figure 9. Figure 10. Typical Total Access TDM Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 System Info Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 System Config Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 System Utility Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Interfaces menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 L2 Protocol Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Bridge Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Router Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Security Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 DS0 Maps Menu.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 TABLES Table 1. Table 2. Instructions for Changing Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Telnet Security Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 57 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG 58 Total Access 600 Series System Manual © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual 1. Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG T1 TDM OVERVIEW Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) is the technology used to transmit several voice, data, and/or video signals at the same time over one communications path. This path is shared by fixed timeslots that transport multiple media. The Total Access 600 Series is a complete solution IAD for Voice and Data applications. The unit includes a network interface, V.35 interface, 10/100BaseT interface, FXS ports, life-line voice backup, built-in IP router, and an optional battery backup for added security. The unit can provision, test, and provide status for any of the voice and data interfaces. 2. T1 TDM APPLICATION The unit connects to the network to provide both voice and high speed data from a single platform. The most common T1 TDM application includes simultaneous support for the following: • • • • • • • Router connection via the V.35 or Network interface LAN connection via a 10/100BaseT interface 4 POTS connections via FXS interfaces for the Total Access 604 8 POTS connections via FXS interfaces for the Total Access 608 12 POTS connections via FXS interfaces for the Total Access 612 16 POTS connections via FXS interfaces for the Total Access 616 24 POTS connections via FXS interfaces for the Total Access 624 Figure 1 shows a typical T1 TDM application. Data Switch Voice Switch NSP Network Customer Premise T1 FXS TX RX LINK V.35 RX V.35 TX DATA VOICE BATT POTS PWR/NET 10/100BaseT Total Access 604/608/612/616/624 Ethernet LAN Figure 1. Typical Total Access TDM Application 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 59 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG 3. Total Access 600 Series System Manual CONFIGURATION SYSTEM INFO The SYSTEM INFO menu provides basic information about the unit as well as data fields for editing information. Figure 2 displays the submenus that are available when you select this menu item. All figures in this section will be representative of the Total Access 624 unit. Firmware revision will reflect A.04.01 for released revisions of software. 0 Figure 2. System Info Menu SYSTEM INFO > SYSTEM NAME Provides a user-configurable text string for the name of the unit. This name can help you distinguish between different installations. You can enter up to 31 alpha-numeric characters in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underscore). This name will appear on the top line of all screens. The factory default is to have no entry in the system name field. SYSTEM INFO > SYSTEM LOCATION Provides a user-configurable text string for the location of the unit. This field is to help you keep track of the actual physical location of the unit. You can enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underscore). The factory default is to have no entry in the system location field. 60 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG SYSTEM INFO > SYSTEM CONTACT Provides a user-configurable text string for a contact name. You can use this field to enter the name, phone number, or E-mail address of a person responsible for the unit. You can enter up to 31 alpha-numeric characters in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underscore). The factory default is to have no entry in the system contact field SYSTEM INFO > UNIT NAME Product-specific name for the unit. SYSTEM INFO > CLEI CODE The CLEI code for the unit. SYSTEM INFO > PART NUMBER ADTRAN part number for the unit. SYSTEM INFO > SERIAL NUMBER The serial number field will reflect serial number located on bottom of the unit’s chassis. SYSTEM INFO > FIRMWARE REVISION Displays the current firmware revision level of the unit. SYSTEM INFO > BOOTCODE REVISION Displays the bootcode revision. SYSTEM INFO > SYSTEM UPTIME Displays the length of time since the last reboot of the unit. Each time you reset the system, this value resets to 0 days, 0 hours, 0 min. and 0 secs. SYSTEM INFO > DATE/TIME Displays the current date and time, including seconds. This field can be edited. Enter the time in 24-hour format (such as 23:00:00 for 11:00 pm). Enter the date in mm-dd-yyyy format (for example, 10-30-1998). 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual SYSTEM CONFIG Set up the unit’s operational configuration from the SYSTEM CONFIG menu. Figure 3 shows the items included in this menu. Figure 3. System Config Menu SYSTEM CONFIG > MANAGEMENT Set up the CRAFT PORT, TELNET ACCESS, SNMP MANAGEMENT, and FDL MANAGEMENT from this menu. SYSTEM CONFIG > MANAGEMENT > CRAFT PORT Set up the CRAFT PORT parameters from this menu. SYSTEM CONFIG > MANAGEMENT > CRAFT PORT > PASSWORD PROTECT The unit’s VT 100 CRAFT port can be accessed via an RJ 48 connector located on the rear of the unit. When PASSWORD PROTECT is set to NO, the CRAFT port is not password protected. When YES (def), the unit will prompt for a password upon startup. SYSTEM CONFIG > MANAGEMENT > CRAFT PORT > PASSWORD This is the text string that is used for comparison when password protecting the CRAFT port. By default, no password is entered. You can enter up to 30 characters in this field. Table 1 provides instructions for changing the password. 62 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG The security level for the CRAFT port is always set to FULL. This gives full access to all menus. Passwords are case-sensitive and can contain up to 30 alphanumeric characters (including spaces and special characters). Table 1. Instructions for Changing Passwords Step Action 1 Select the PASSWORD field—a new PASSWORD field displays. 2 Type the new password in the ENTER field. 3 Type the new password again in the CONFIRM field. SYSTEM CONFIG > MANAGEMENT > CRAFT PORT > BAUD RATE This is the asynchronous rate that the CRAFT port will run. The possible values are 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200. The default value is 9600. SYSTEM CONFIG > MANAGEMENT > CRAFT PORT > DATA BITS This is the asynchronous bit rate that the CRAFT port will run. The possible values are 7 or 8 (def) bits. SYSTEM CONFIG > MANAGEMENT > CRAFT PORT > PARITY This is the asynchronous parity that the CRAFT port will run. The possible values are NONE (def), ODD, or EVEN. SYSTEM CONFIG > MANAGEMENT > CRAFT PORT > STOP BITS This is the number of stop bits used for the CRAFT port. The possible values are 1 (def), 1.5 or 2. SYSTEM CONFIG > MANAGEMENT > TELNET ACCESS Activate the Telnet access and set up the various telnet parameters from this menu. The ATM D.01.XX firmware supports one telnet session active at a time. The TDM A.03.XX firmware supports one telnet session active at a time. The TDM A.04 firmware supports five simultaneous telnet sessions. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 63 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual SYSTEM CONFIG > MANAGEMENT > TELNET ACCESS > ACCESS Sets ACCESS to ON or OFF. The factory default value for this parameter is ON. SYSTEM CONFIG > MANAGEMENT > TELNET ACCESS > AUTHEN METHOD Set up the telnet authentication method from this menu. The choices are PASSWORD, RADIUS, PASSWORD/RADIUS, and RADIUS/PASSWORD. PASSWORD/RADIUS indicates that the unit will try Password Authentication first and if that fails, it will try Radius Authentication. RADIUS/PASSWORD indicates that the unit will try Radius authentication first and if that fails, it will try Password authentication. The default is PASSWORD. SYSTEM CONFIG > MANAGEMENT > TELNET ACCESS > USER LIST Add telnet users and control the telnet access conditions through this menu. # Display the index number of the telnet users. Up to four users can be configured for access to the unit. Each user can be assigned a security level and idle time. NAME The name is a text string of the user name for this session. You can enter up to 15 characters in this field. The factory default is no entry in the NAME field. PASSWORD When the authenticating method is password, or password radius, this text string is used for the password. You can enter up to 30 characters in this field. The factory default is no entry in this field. IDLE TIME (MINS) This sets the amount of time in minutes you can be idle before you are automatically logged off. The factory default is 10 MINUTES. The range is 1-255 minutes. LEVEL This is the security level granted to the user. Table 2 gives a brief description of each level. The factory default is FULL. 64 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Table 2. Telnet Security Levels Security Level Description Full The user has all access to view and configure all menus (same as logging in to the CRAFT port) Support The user has read only access to view the SYSTEM INFO menu. The user has privileges to view and change everything under the SYSTEM CONFIG menu except for the CRAFT port settings, telnet access lists, and the SNMP management communities. The user has full access to the SYSTEM UTILITY menu, including the ability to upgrade firmware and reset the unit. The user has full access to the INTERFACES, L2 PROTOCOL, BRIDGE, ROUTER, and DS0 menus. The user does not have the ability to set RADIUS SERVER settings under the SECURITY menu. Config The same privileges as support, except that the user does not have privileges to download firmware or configuration from the SYSTEM UTILITY menu. The user additionally does not have the privilege to reset the unit remotely, or enter the terminal menu. Router The user has read only privileges for the SYSTEM INFO menu. There is no access to the SYSTEM CONFIG menu. The user has PING and TRACEROUTE access from the SYSTEM UTILITY menu. The user is limited to ethernet configuration and status from the INTERFACES menu. The user has full access to the BRIDGE and ROUTER menus. Access is limited to filters only from the SECURITY menu. Voice The user has read only privileges for the SYSTEM INFO menu. The user has access to the PING and TRACEROUTE utilities from the SYSTEM UTILITIES menu. The user has full access to the FXS module from the INTERFACES menu. Status The user has read access of all menus except for the following: SYSTEM CONFIG/CRAFT PORT, SYSTEM CONFIG/TELNET ACCESS, SYSTEM CONFIG/SNMP MANAGEMENT, and SECURITY/ RADIUS SERVER. The user does not have access to UPGRADE FIRMWARE, UPGRADE CONFIG, PING, or TRACEROUTE menus. The user cannot reset the unit or enter terminal mode. SYSTEM CONFIG > MANAGEMENT > TELNET ACCESS > IP ACCESS LIST Set up the list of allowed telnet managers. NETWORK ADDRESS AND MASK Enter a network address and subnet mask from which telnet access to the unit is allowed. When a remote unit requests telnet access to the unit, if the access list is empty or the remote’s IP address matches a list entry, remote access is granted. A subnet mask of 0.0.0.0 will allow any host telnet access, regardless of the network address. A network address of 0.0.0.0 with corresponding netmask 255.255.255.255 will not allow any host telnet access. The factory default is 0.0.0.0. for both parameters, which will allow all users telnet IP access. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 65 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual SYSTEM CONFIG > MANAGEMENT > SNMP MANAGEMENT Active the SNMP management and configure the SNMP communities and traps from this menu. SYSTEM CONFIG > MANAGEMENT > SNMP MANAGEMENT > ACCESS When set to OFF, SNMP access is denied. When set to ON, the unit will respond to SNMP managers based on the configuration. The factory default is ON. SYSTEM CONFIG > MANAGEMENT > SNMP MANAGEMENT > COMMUNITIES Set up the SNMP communities parameters from this menu. # Displays the index number of the SNMP Communities. This list is used to set up to 8 SNMP communities that the unit will allow. NAME This is the text string used to identify the SNMP community. The factory default is no entry in the name parameter. PRIVILEGE The access for this manager can be assigned three levels. The factory default is NONE. NONE No access is allowed for this community or manager. GET Manager can only read items. GET/SET Manager can read and set items. MANAGER IP This may be used in conjunction with the Netmask field to define a range of manager IPs. A netmask of 255.255.255.255 defines a single IP as the manager host IP. The default value is 0.0.0.0. NETMASK The mask is used to determine which bits of the MANAGER IP are significant. A "0" bit means "don't care." A "1" bit means that the corresponding address bits in the incoming SNMP packet must match the address bit in the defined MANAGER IP. The netmask of 255.255.255.255 defines a single IP as the manager host IP. The default value is 0.0.0.0. 66 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG SYSTEM CONFIG > MANAGEMENT > SNMP MANAGEMENT > TRAPS Sets up the trap manager name and IP from this menu. # Displays the index number in the SNMP traps table. This list allows up to 20 managers to be listed to receive traps. MANAGER NAME is the text string describing the name of the entry. It is intended for easy reference and has no bearing on the SNMP trap function. You can enter up to 31 characters in this field. The factory default is no entry in the manager name field. MANAGER IP This is the IP address of the manager that is to receive the traps. The factory default is 0.0.0.0. SYSTEM CONFIG > MANAGEMENT > FDL MANAGEMENT Enables the FDL management and configures mode and IP addresses from this menu. SYSTEM CONFIG > MANAGEMENT > FDL MANAGEMENT > MODE This enables the FDL (only in ESF mode) to be used for management. Learning mode can also be enabled so the unit can "learn" its IP configuration to be used for its FDL management. Once it learns this information from, for example a Total Access 4303, the configuration items populate. The factory default is ON. SYSTEM CONFIG > MANAGEMENT > FDL MANAGEMENT > LINK IP ADDRESS This is the local IP address used for FDL management. The FDL uses a separate IP network for communication, distinct from the customer data that is configured under the ROUTER menus. The factory default is 0.0.0.0. SYSTEM CONFIG > MANAGEMENT > FDL MANAGEMENT > IP NETMASK This is the subnet mask defining the IP network used for FDL management. The factory default is 0.0.0.0. SYSTEM CONFIG > MANAGEMENT > FDL MANAGEMENT > FAR-END IP ADDRESS This is the far-end IP address used for the FDL management. The FDL is a separate IP network from the customer data that is configured under the ROUTER menus. The factory default is 0.0.0.0. SYSTEM CONFIG > MANAGEMENT > FDL MANAGEMENT > LEARN ADDRESS When set to ON, the destination address on each received packet is assumed to be the FDL interface address. A 255.255.255.252 netmask is used, which determines the far-side address as well (since there can be only two addresses on a subnet with that netmask). When set to OFF, the user must input the IP address assigned to the FDL interface. Default is ON. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 67 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual SYSTEM CONFIG > MANAGEMENT > FDL MANAGEMENT > ACCEPT ALL SNMP When set to ON, SNMP gets/sets received over the FDL link are always accepted regardless of the community table. When set to OFF, the community table is searched for valid manager IP addresses and the SNMP traffic is rejected if a match is not found. Default is ON. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG Configure the unit Syslog client for use with a Syslog server (supplied with ADTRAN Utilities or available on most Unix platforms) from this menu. For additional information, reference RFC3164: The BSD Syslog Protocol. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > SYSLOG IP IP address of the syslog daemon to which log message should be sent. The values must be dotted decimal notation. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > SYSLOG FORMAT The SYSLOG FORMAT is the format of log messages. "ADTRAN" uses a format that is compatible with Adtran Utilities and forces the Syslog Facility to LOCAL0. UNIX uses the traditional Unix format and reports at the configured facility level. Adtran Utilities may malfunction if messages are received in the Unix format. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > SYSLOG FACILITY The choices are: LOCAL0, LOCAL1, LOCAL2, LOCAL3, LOCAL4, LOCAL5, LOCAL6, LOCAL7. SYSLOG FACILITY is the facility level for all messages forwarded from the unit to the syslog server. This allows all messages received from the IAD to be filtered by facility level. See RFC3164: The BSD Syslog Protocol.. This does not have to correspond to the facility level shown in the terminal mode option. See SYSLOG Facility using Terminal Mode 68 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG The remaining Syslog parameters have the following level choices: FATAL (Highest priority) ALERT CRITICAL ERROR WARNING NOTICE INFO DEBUG (Lowest priority) Every log message generated by the IAD has a reporting level priority. If the message priority is lower than the configured priority for the destination log, the message is not forwarded to the syslog daemon. See RFC3164: The BSD Syslog Protocol. The lower the log level, the more messages that will be generated. Setting reporting levels to DEBUG may negatively affect the performance of the IAD, including causing the IAD to reset. ADTRAN recommends using DEBUG for only short periods of time for debug purposes only. SYSLOG using Terminal Mode Another option for configuring syslog is using the terminal mode command log dump <logname>. The logname must be all CAPS and be one of the following names: FATAL ALERT CRITICAL ERROR WARNING NOTICE INFO DEBUG The command will dump all messages for the indicated log (ALL LEVEL shows all log messages) stored in the internal log buffer to the command line display. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > ALL LEVEL This entry allows setting the default reporting level for all log entries. If ALL LEVEL is a lower priority than the individual log entry level, ALL LEVEL overrides the individual log reporting level. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > KERNEL LEVEL Minimum required level for sending KERNEL log messages. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 69 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > DHCP LEVEL Minimum required level for sending DHCP log messages. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > NTP LEVEL Minimum required level for sending NTP log messages. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > TFTP LEVEL Minimum required level for sending TFTP log messages. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > TELNET LEVEL Minimum required level for sending TELNET log messages. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > IP LEVEL Minimum required level for sending IP log messages. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > PPP LEVEL Minimum required level for sending PPP log messages. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > NAT LEVEL Minimum required level for sending NAT log messages. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > ARP LEVEL Minimum required level for sending ARP log messages. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > UDP LEVEL Minimum required level for sending UDP log messages. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > NETWRITE LEVEL This parameter is for ADTRAN internal use only. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > TCP LEVEL Minimum required level for sending TCP log messages. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > COMPSYS LEVEL This parameter is for ADTRAN internal use only. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > CONSOLE LEVEL This parameter is for ADTRAN internal use only. 70 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > CFGXFER LEVEL Minimum required level for sending configuration transfer log messages. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > ROUTER LEVEL Minimum required level for sending router log messages. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > NONVOL LEVEL Minimum required level for sending nonvolatile memory log messages. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > NOKIA LEVEL Minimum required level for sending log messages about communication with the Nokia DSLAM. Messages are only generated for products with an SDSL WAN interface. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > AUTOBAUD LEVEL Minimum required level for sending log messages about communication with the Lucent Stinger DSLAM. Messages are only generated for products with an SDSL WAN interface. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > TOLLBRG LEVEL Minimum required level for sending log messages about communication with the Tollbridge Voice Gateway. Messages are only generated for ATM products. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > CMCP LEVEL Minimum required level for sending log messages about communication with the CopperMountain DSLAM. Messages are only generated for ATM products. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > SDSL LEVEL This parameter is for ADTRAN internal use only. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > L1 LEVEL Minimum required level for sending log messages about WAN physical or Layer 1 connection. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > ETH LEVEL Minimum required level for sending log messages about Ethernet physical connection. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > ICMP LEVEL Minimum required level for sending ICMP log messages. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > CONFIG LEVEL This parameter is for ADTRAN internal use only. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 71 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG >DS0 LEVEL Minimum required level for sending log messages about DSO mapping. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > SELFTEST LEVEL Minimum required level for sending log messages about selftest. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > VOICE LEVEL Minimum required level for sending log messages about AAL2 voices services. Messages are only generated for ATM products. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > JETSTREAM LEVEL Minimum required level for sending log messages about communication with the JetStream Voice Gateway. Messages are only generated for ATM products. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > POTS LEVEL Minimum required level for sending log messages about POTS line cards and services. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > LESCAS LEVEL Minimum required level for sending messages about communication with LESCAS compatible Voice Gateways. Messages are only generated for ATM products. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > ATM LEVEL Minimum required level for sending ATM log messages. Messages are only generated for ATM products. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > COPPERCOM LEVEL Minimum required level for sending log messages about communication with the CopperCom Voice Gateway. Messages are only generated for ATM products. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > VOFR LEVEL Minimum required level for sending voice-over-frame-relay log messages about communication with the CopperMountain DSLAM. Messages are only generated for ATM products. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > XMODEM LEVEL Minimum required level for sending XMODEM log messages for firmware and configuration transfers. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > EMWEB LEVEL This parameter is for ADTRAN internal use only. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > FRELAY LEVEL 72 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Minimum required level for sending frame relay log messages. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > BRIDGE LEVEL Minimum required level for sending bridge mode log messages. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > MAINT LEVEL Minimum required level for sending CRAFT port log messages. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > HDLC LEVEL Minimum required level for sending low level HDLC log messages. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > VOATM LEVEL Minimum required level for sending Voice-over-ATM log messages. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > PPPOA LEVEL Minimum required level for sending PPP-over-ATM log messages. SYSTEM CONFIG > SYSLOG > FDL LEVEL Minimum required level for sending FDL log messages. SYSTEM CONFIG > NETWORK TIME Activate the network time and configure the server type, time zone and various other network time parameters from this menu. SYSTEM CONFIG > NETWORK TIME > SERVER TYPE The unit time can be entered manually from the SYSTEM INFO menu, or the unit can receive time from an NTP/SNTP server. The NETWORK TIME menu includes all parameters relating to how the unit communicates with the time server. The server type defines the port on which the unit will listen to receive timing information from the time server. The choices are NT TIME and SNTP. When set to NT TIME, the unit will receive time from an NT server running SNTP software on its TIME port. When set to SNTP, the unit will receive time directly from an SNTP server. The factory default is SNTP. SYSTEM CONFIG > NETWORK TIME > ACTIVE This network timing feature can be turned on and off. It determines whether the unit will request and receive time from a time server. The factory default is NO. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 73 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual SYSTEM CONFIG > NETWORK TIME > TIME ZONE All time zones are based off of Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). The choices are listed below • • • • • • • GMT GMT -5 (EASTERN) GMT -6 (CENTRAL) GMT -7 (MOUNTAIN) GMT -8 (PACIFIC) GMT -9 (ALASKA) GMT -10 (HAWAII) The factory default is GMT-6 (CENTRAL). SYSTEM CONFIG > NETWORK TIME > ADJUST FOR DAYLIGHT SAVING Since some areas of the world use Daylight Savings Time, the unit is designed to adjust the time on the first Sunday in April and the last Sunday in October accordingly if this option is turned on. The factory default is YES. SYSTEM CONFIG > NETWORK TIME > HOST ADDRESS This is the IP address of the time server that the unit will request and receive time from. The factory default is no entry in the host address field. SYSTEM CONFIG > NETWORK TIME > REFRESH This is the interval of time between each request the unit sends out to the time server. A smaller refresh time guarantees that the unit receives the correct time from the server and corrects possible errors more quickly. This may be more taxing on the machine. A range of refresh times is available for the user to decide which is best for their unit. Choices include 5 MINS, 10 MINS, 15 MINS, 20 MINS, 25 MINS, 30 MINS, 35 MINS, 40 MINS, 45 MINS, 50 MINS, 55 MINS, and 60 MINS. The factory default is 60 MINS. SYSTEM CONFIG > NETWORK TIME > STATUS This displays the current status of the time negotiation process. If an error is displayed, check all connections and configurations to try to resolve the problem. 74 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG SYSTEM UTILITY Use the SYSTEM UTILITY menu to view and set the system parameters shown in Figure 4. Figure 4. System Utility Menu SYSTEM UTILITY > UPGRADE FIRMWARE Select the firmware upgrade method and perform upgrade from this menu. SYSTEM UTILITY > UPGRADE FIRMWARE > TRANSFER METHOD The customer can update firmware when unit enhancements are released. The two methods for upgrading are XMODEM and TFTP. (See the DLP section of this manual for more information.) TFTP requires a TFTP server running on the network. The unit starts a TFTP client function which gets the upgrade code from the TFTP server. Selecting XMODEM will load the upgrade code through the CRAFT port using any PC terminal emulator with XMODEM capability. The factory default is TFTP. SYSTEM UTILITY > UPGRADE FIRMWARE > TFTP SERVER ADDRESS This is required when the transfer method is TFTP. It is the IP address or domain name (if DNS is configured) of the TFTP server. The factory default is no entry in the TFTP server address field. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 75 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual SYSTEM UTILITY > UPGRADE FIRMWARE > TFTP SERVER FILENAME This is required when the transfer method is TFTP. It is the case-sensitive file name which contains the upgrade code. The factory default is no entry in the TFTP server filename field. SYSTEM UTILITY > UPGRADE FIRMWARE > TRANSFER STATUS This appears when TFTP is used. It displays the status of the transfer as it happens. Any error or success message will be displayed here. SYSTEM UTILITY > UPGRADE FIRMWARE > START TRANSFER This activator is used when the configurable items in this menu are complete. This will initiate the transfer for either TFTP or XMODEM upgrades. Before using Start Transfer, the unit should have a valid IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway (if required). See DLP-004, Setting Ethernet IP Parameters for more information. SYSTEM UTILITY > UPGRADE FIRMWARE > ABORT TRANSFER Use this activator to cancel any TFTP transfer in progress. SYSTEM UTILITY > CONFIG TRANSFER Select the config transfer method and perform the transfer from this menu. SYSTEM UTILITY > CONFIG TRANSFER > TRANSFER METHOD Sends a file containing the unit configuration to a PC connected to the CRAFT port using XMODEM protocol or to a file on a TFTP server using the TFTP protocol. CONFIG TRANSFER also lets you save the unit configuration as a backup file, so you can use the same configuration with multiple units. In addition, CONFIG TRANSFER can retrieve a configuration file from a TFTP server. To support these transfers, ADTRAN delivers a TFTP program with the unit called TFTP Server. You can configure any PC running Microsoft Windows with this software, and store a configuration file. Before using Start Transfer, the unit should have a valid IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway (if required). See DLP-004, Setting Ethernet IP Parameters for more information. Only one configuration transfer session (upload or download) can be active at a time. XMODEM and TFTP are supported. 76 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG SYSTEM UTILITY > CONFIG TRANSFER > TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS Specifies the IP address of the TFTP server. Get this number from your system administrator. If using the ADTRAN Utilities TFTP server, this number appears in the TFTP server status window. The factory default value is 0.0.0.0. SYSTEM UTILITY > CONFIG TRANSFER > TFTP SERVER FILENAME Defines the name of the configuration file that you transfer to or retrieve from the TFTP server. The default name is ta_iad.cfg, but you can edit this name. SYSTEM UTILITY > CONFIG TRANSFER > CURRENT TRANSFER STATUS Indicates the current status of the update. SYSTEM UTILITY > CONFIG TRANSFER > PREVIOUS TRANSFER STATUS Indicates the status of the previous update. SYSTEM UTILITY > CONFIG TRANSFER > LOAD AND USE CONFIG Retrieves the configuration file specified in the TFTP SERVER FILENAME field from the server. To start this command, enter Y to begin or enter N to cancel. If you execute this command, the unit retrieves the configuration file, reboots, then restarts using the new configuration. SYSTEM UTILITY > CONFIG TRANSFER > SAVE CONFIG REMOTELY Saves the configuration file specified in TFTP SERVER FILENAME to the server identified in TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS. To start this command, enter Y to begin or enter N to cancel. Before using this command, you must have identified a valid TFTP server in TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS. SYSTEM UTILITY > SYSTEM UTILIZATION View the CPU Utilization stats from this menu. SYSTEM UTILITY > SYSTEM UTILIZATION > PERFORMANCE Clear the System Utilization stats and view the total and current CPU utilization stats from this menu. SYSTEM UTILITY > SYSTEM UTILIZATION > PERFORMANCE > TOTAL AVG CPU UTILIZATION TOTAL AVG CPU UTILIZATION is a running total of CPU utilization since the last reset. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 77 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual SYSTEM UTILITY > SYSTEM UTILIZATION > PERFORMANCE > CURRENT AVG CPU UTILIZATION CURRENT AVG CPU UTILIZATION is the running total of CPU utilization since the last clear. SYSTEM UTILITY > SYSTEM UTILIZATION > PERFORMANCE > CLEAR STATS This activator will clear all the system utilization performance stats. SYSTEM UTILITY > PING Activate the ping test and define the ping packet characteristics from this menu. SYSTEM UTILITY > PING > START/STOP Activator to start and cancel a ping test. Only one ping session can be active at a time. SYSTEM UTILITY > PING > HOST ADDRESS IP address or domain name (if DNS is configured) of device to receive the ping. The factory default is no entry in the host address field. SYSTEM UTILITY > PING > SOURCE ADDRESS Selects whether the ping packet should use the INTERFACE address or the NAPT (if that interface uses NAT) as the source address of the ping packet. This is the address that is used for ICMP requests. INTERFACE means it will use the IP address associated with the WAN for outgoing packets and the Ethernet IP address for ICMP requests made on the LAN. NAPT ADDRESS will replace the WAN IP address with the NAPT address for outgoing ICMP requests. Default is INTERFACE. SYSTEM UTILITY > PING > SIZE (40-1500) Total size of the ping to send. Range is 40 to 1500 bytes. The default is 64. SYSTEM UTILITY > PING > # OF PACKETS Total packets to send every 2 seconds. Setting this to 0 allows the client to ping continuously. The default is 5. SYSTEM UTILITY > PING > # TRANSMITS Total packets sent (read only). SYSTEM UTILITY > PING > # RECEIVES Total packets received (read only). 78 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG SYSTEM UTILITY > PING > % LOSS Percentage loss based on ping returned from host (read only). SYSTEM UTILITY > TRACEROUTE Utility program used to trace a data path to a final destination. SYSTEM UTILITY > TRACEROUTE > TRACE TARGET Specifies the IP address of the remote system to trace the routes to. SYSTEM UTILITY > TRACEROUTE > MAXIMUM HOPS Specifies the maximum number of router exchanges allowed when traveling to the final destination (specified using the TRACE TARGET field) Range is 1 to 30. Default is 30. SYSTEM UTILITY > TRACEROUTE > TIMEOUT (IN SECS) Specifies the maximum delay (in milliseconds) given to a host (along a path to the final destination) to respond to the probe datagram sent before considering the packet a failure. SYSTEM UTILITY > TRACEROUTE > RETRIES Specifies the number of times the probe datagram is sent to each host (along the path to the final destination). SYSTEM UTILITY > TRACEROUTE > BEGIN TRACEROUTE Activator to begin the traceroute process by sending a probe datagram with a Time To Live (TTL) value of 1. SYSTEM UTILITY > RESET UNIT Selecting this activator will power reset the unit. SYSTEM UTILITY > TERMINAL MODE The terminal mode gives the user a command-line prompt. From this prompt, you can: • • • • • Perform a reset with the command "reset" Perform a factory restore with the command "factory_reset" Configure the unit. The unit has the ability to download a text file which contains the configuration of the entire unit. This configuration may then be altered in a text editor, and then uploaded to a unit. (See DLP-013, Saving and Loading Text Configuration Using the Terminal Command Line for further assistance.) Debug and troubleshoot. This function would be carried out with the assistance of ADTRAN Technical Support. Start and stop the fail-safe timer for the auto-config feature (See DLP-014, Unit Installation Using the Auto-Config Feature for details.) 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 79 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual INTERFACES Use the INTERFACES menu to view and configure parameters for the T1, ETHERNET, V.35, and FXS interfaces as shown in figure 5. Figure 5. Interfaces menus INTERFACES (T1[0]) View the T1 interface status and configure T1 parameters from this menu. The 0 in T1[0] represents a physical port. The T1 physical port is always 0. INTERFACES (T1[0]) > CONFIG Configures the various T1 parameters and enable/disable loopbacks from this menu. INTERFACES (T1[0]) > CONFIG > TIMING MODE Choices are NETWORK and INTERNAL. Select NETWORK when the unit will receive timing from the network. Select INTERNAL when the unit will generate the timing. Default is NETWORK. 80 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG INTERFACES (T1[0]) > CONFIG > FORMAT This sets the frame format for the T1 interface. The setting must match the frame format of the circuit to which the interface is connected. Choices are ESF, SF, SLC96 ALARM-16, and SLC96 ALARM-13. Extended Superframe (ESF) provides a non-disruptive means of full-time monitoring on the facility datalink (FDL). Default is ESF. SF is equivalent to the D4 frame format. INTERFACES (T1[0]) > CONFIG > LINE CODE This sets the line code for the T1 interface. The setting must match the line code of the circuit to which the interface is connected. Choices are B8ZS (bipolar with 8-zero substitution) and AMI (alternate mark inversion). Default is B8ZS. INTERFACES (T1[0]) > CONFIG > EQUALIZATION Select the line build out for the T1 interface. These are attenuation settings. 0 dB is the strongest signal and the other settings make the T1 transmit signal weaker. The setting of this field depends on whether the circuit is provisioned for DS1 by the telephone company. The choices are 0 dB, -7.5 dB, -15 dB, -22 dB. Default is 0 dB. INTERFACES (T1[0]) > CONFIG > CSU LPBK Choices are ENABLE, DISABLE, and DISABLE ALL. Default is ENABLE. This allows the unit to either respond or not respond to CSU loop up commands. INTERFACES (T1[0]) > STATUS Displays the T1 status including performance data and alarm histories. INTERFACES (T1[0]) > STATUS > PERFORMANCE Displays the T1 performance data. INTERFACES (T1[0]) > STATUS > PERFORMANCE > TIME FRAME Choices are CURRENT, 15 MIN, and 24 HR. Default is CURRENT. The performance fields -- either CURRENT, 15 MIN, or 24 HR. -- provide status on key performance measures as specified in ANSI T1.403 and AT&T TR 54016 for each of the T1 ports. When CURRENT is chosen, the performance data for the current 15 minute window is shown. INTERFACES (T1[0]) > STATUS > PERFORMANCE > CLEAR Clears information for the selected port. Press <Enter> when the cursor is over this field to clear the data. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 81 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual INTERFACES (T1[0]) > STATUS > PERFORMANCE > ES ES (Errored Second) - For ESF mode, an errored second is defined as a second with one or more Path Code Violations (PCVs), or one or more Out of Frame (OOF) defects, or one or more Controlled Slip events, or a detected AIS (blue alarm) defect. For D4 (SF) mode, the presence of Bipolar Violations (BPVs) also triggers an errored second. INTERFACES (T1[0]) > STATUS > PERFORMANCE > SES SES (Severely Errored Second) - For ESF mode, an SES is a second with 320 or more PCVs, or one or more OOF defects, or a detected AIS defect. For D4 (SF) mode, an SES is a second with one or more Framing Error events, or an OOF defect, or at least 1544 Line Code Violations or more. INTERFACES (T1[0]) > STATUS > PERFORMANCE > SEF SEF (Severely Errored Frame) - An SEF condition occurs when 2 out of 6 consecutive frame bits are in error. INTERFACES (T1[0]) > STATUS > PERFORMANCE > FS FS (Frame Slip) - A frame slip is defined as one or more frame bit errors in a one-second interval. INTERFACES (T1[0]) > STATUS > PERFORMANCE > LCV LCV (Line Code Violation) - A Line Code Violation is defined as a Bipolar Violation (BPV), not including the B8ZS code word if B8ZS is employed. The number displayed is LCV events, which is defined as one or more BPVs in a one-second interval. INTERFACES (T1[0]) > STATUS > PERFORMANCE > SLP SLP (Slip Error Event) - This occurs when a received frame is either repeated or deleted. A SLP error indicates a timing problem. INTERFACES (T1[0]) > STATUS > PERFORMANCE > UAS UAS (Unavailable Seconds) - When 10 consecutive SES have been logged, the unit is declared in an unavailable state, the 10 SES are cleared, and the Unavailable Seconds count begins to increment starting with 10. The unavailable state is cleared when 10 consecutive non-SES seconds have occurred. INTERFACES (T1[0]) > STATUS > ALARMS Displays current alarms and alarm history for T1 interface. 82 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG INTERFACES (T1[0]) > STATUS > ALARMS > CURRENT ALARMS Displays the current alarms on the T1 interface. An asterisk in a field indicates that an alarm is active. LOS Loss of Signal. No signal detected on port interface. RED Not able to frame data received on the port. Alternately referred to as Out of Frame (OOF). YELLOW Remote alarm indicator (RAI) being received on port. BLUE Receiving unframed all ones from the port alarm indicator signal (AIS). INTERFACES (T1[0]) > STATUS > ALARMS > ALARM HISTORY Displays the alarm history for the T1 interface. An asterisk in a field indicates that an alarm has occurred on the T1 interface since the last clear history. LOS Loss of Signal. No signal detected on port interface. RED Not able to frame data received on the port. Alternately referred to as Out of Frame (OOF). YELLOW Remote alarm indicator (RAI) being received on port. BLUE Receiving unframed all ones from the port alarm indicator signal (AIS). INTERFACES (T1[0]) > STATUS > ALARMS > CLEAR HISTORY Selecting this activator will clear the Alarm History for the T1 interface. INTERFACES (T1[0]) > TEST These options are used to initiate local and remote loopback tests and display the test status. INTERFACES (T1[0]) > TEST > LOC LB Loopback of the local unit. Choices are NONE, LINE, AND PAYLOAD. LINE Loopback loops all of the received data back toward the network. The transmitted data is the identical line code that was received, including any bipolar violations. PAYLOAD Loopback is similar to line loopback except that the framing is extracted from the received data and then regenerated for the transmitted data. NONE disables the loopback test. Default is NONE. INTERFACES (T1[0]) > TEST > REM LB Loopback of remote unit. Choices are NONE, LINE, and PAYLOAD. LINE Loopback loops all of the received data back toward the network. The transmitted data is the identical line code that was received, including any bipolar violations. PAYLOAD Loopback is similar to line loopback except that the framing is extracted from the received data and then regenerated for the transmitted data. NONE disables the loopback test. Default is NONE. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 83 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual INTERFACES (T1[0]) > TEST > TEST STATUS Indicates whether a test is in progress. INTERFACES (ETH[1]) View the Ethernet interface status and configure the Ethernet parameters from this menu. The 1 in ETH[1] represents a physical port. The Ethernet physical port is always 1. INTERFACES (ETH[1]) > CONFIG Enable the AUTONEGOTIATION and configure the Ethernet rate from this menu. INTERFACES (ETH[1]) > CONFIG > AUTONEGOTIATION If set to ON, AUTONEGOTIATION automatically detects 10 or 100 Mb Ethernet and negotiates the duplex setting. ON is the default setting. INTERFACES (ETH[1]) > CONFIG > DATA RATE (This option is only available if AUTONEGOTIATION is set to OFF.) Data rate sets the speed of the Ethernet interface. Choices are 10BASET and 100BASET. The default value is 10BASET. INTERFACES (ETH[1]) > CONFIG > DUPLEX TYPE (This option is only available if AUTONEGOTIATION is set to OFF.) Duplex type configures the Ethernet interface for FULL DUPLEX or HALF DUPLEX. FULL DUPLEX allows the Ethernet interface to send and receive simultaneously. HALF DUPLEX allows the Ethernet interface to either send or receive at any given moment, but not simultaneously. The default is HALF DUPLEX. If the DATA RATE is set to 10BASET or 100BASET the DUPLEX TYPE must be configured as FULL DUPLEX or HALF DUPLEX. INTERFACES (ETH[1]) > STATUS Displays the MAC ADDRESS, DATA LINK, DATA RATE and DUPLEX TYPE. INTERFACES (ETH[1]) > STATUS > MAC ADDRESS This is a read-only field which displays the unique MAC address programmed at ADTRAN. INTERFACES (ETH[1]) > STATUS > DATA LINK Displays the status of the data link as up or down. This is a read only field. 84 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG INTERFACES (ETH[1]) > STATUS > DATA RATE Displays the data rate present on the Ethernet interface. The possibilities are 10BASET, 100BASET, and N/A. N/A indicates the AUTONEGOTIATION is set to ON and there is no Ethernet connection. This is read only field. INTERFACES (ETH[1]) > STATUS > DUPLEX TYPE Displays the duplex type present on the Ethernet interface. The possibilities are FULL DUPLEX and HALF DUPLEX. This is a read only field. INTERFACES (V35[2]) View the V.35 interface status and configure the V.35 parameters from this menu. The 2 in V35[2] represents a physical port. The V.35 physical port is always 2. INTERFACES (V35[2]) > CONFIG Configure the DTE leads from this menu. INTERFACES (V35[2]) > CONFIG > CTS Sets the control characteristic of the clear-to-send lead. Choices are NORMAL (follows RTS) or FORCE ON. Default is NORMAL. INTERFACES (V35[2]) > CONFIG > DCD Sets the control characteristic of the carrier detect lead. Choices are NORMAL (follows valid signal on the network interface) or FORCE ON. Default is NORMAL. INTERFACES (V35[2]) > CONFIG > DSR Sets the control characteristic of the data set ready lead. Choices are NORMAL (follows DTR) or FORCE ON. Default is NORMAL. INTERFACES (V35[2]) > STATUS View the status of the DTE leads from this menu. INTERFACES (V35[2]) > STATUS > RTS View the status of Request to Send (RTS) lead. Possibilities are OFF or ON. This is a read only field. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 85 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual INTERFACES (V35[2]) > STATUS > DTR View the status of the Data Terminal Read (DTR) lead. Possibilities are OFF and ON. This is a read only field. INTERFACES (FXS) View the FXS interface status and configure the FXS parameters from this menu. INTERFACES (FXS) > CONFIG Configure the FXS mode, line impedance and Tandem parameters from this menu. INTERFACES (FXS) > CONFIG > PORT Indicates the port on which the FXS is installed. INTERFACES (FXS) > CONFIG > MODE Choices are given below. Default is LOOP START. This mode needs to be set based on how the network is set up and how each port is being used. Each port does not need to be set to the same mode. 86 LOOP START Sets the port to use FXS loop start signaling on the T-span and loop start supervision on the analog 2-wire interface. GROUND START Sets the port to use FXS ground start signaling on the T-span and ground start supervision on the analog 2-wire interface. TR08 SINGLE Sets the port to use Single Party Channel Unit signaling on the T-span (as defined by TR-TSY-000008) and loop start supervision on the analog 2-wire interface. TR08 UVG Sets the port to use Universal Voice Grade signaling on the T-span (as defined by TR-TSY-000008) and either loop start or ground start supervision on the analog 2-wire interface. DPO Sets the port to use Dial Pulse signaling to originate dialed numbers. TANDEM (E&M) Sets the port to use E&M signaling on the T-span and either loop start or ground start supervision on the analog 2-wire interface. See the Tandem submenus for more information. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG INTERFACES (FXS) > CONFIG > TX (dB) Sets the TX direction level points. This signal will change the volume of the voice. TX (dB) is the signal that is transmitted out the T1, with 0 dB being the strongest. If the volume is too loud across the T1, this number should be increased. A higher number indicates more attenuation which equals lower volume. The value entered must be less than 10 dB. Default is 6.0 dB. INTERFACES (FXS) > CONFIG > RX (dB) Sets the RX direction level points. This signal will change the volume of the voice. A higher number indicates more attenuation which equals lower volume. The value entered must be less than 10 dB. Default is 3.0 dB. 0.0. dB is the maximum signal. INTERFACES (FXS) > CONFIG > SVC MODE Indicates whether the module is IN SERVICE or OUT OF SVC. This does not indicate whether the port has been mapped. For proper operation, the port must be mapped using the DS0 MAPS menu. Default is IN SERVICE. INTERFACES (FXS) > CONFIG > LINE Z Sets the line impedance. Choices are 600 OHMS, 900 OHMS, 600 OHMS + 2.16µF, 900 OHMS + 2.16µF, and AUTO. The line impedance of each port is based on the size of the network. Default is 600 OHMS. INTERFACES (FXS) > CONFIG > MSG IND This is better referred to as On-Hook Message Waiting. When this is set to ENABLE, talk path is always open, even in On-Hook conditions, in order for these FXS message tones to pass through. Default is DISABLE. Enabling on-hook message waiting will allow message lamp usage but will cause a lower on-hook voltage. Disabling this feature will allow higher on-hook voltage but will not allow on-hook messaging other than caller ID. INTERFACES (FXS) > CONFIG > TANDEM Set the port to use E&M signaling on the T-Span and either loop start or ground start supervision on the analog 2-wire interface. To access submenus for this item, use the arrow keys to scroll to the TANDEM column for the corresponding module, and then press <Enter>. INTERFACES (FXS) > CONFIG > TANDEM > CONVERSION MODE Sets the port to either LOOP START or GROUND START mode. Default is LOOP START. INTERFACES (FXS) > CONFIG > TANDEM > SUPERVISION Sets the supervision method used to either IMMEDIATE or WINK. Default is IMMEDIATE. INTERFACES (FXS) > CONFIG > TANDEM > DIAL TONE (This option is only available for the Total Access 612/616/624.) Used to enable or disable the on-board dial tone generation. Dial Tone is supplied for 5 sec, then it drops. It cannot be broken when dialing digits. Default is DISABLE. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 87 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual INTERFACES (FXS) > CONFIG > TANDEM > RING BACK TONE (This option is only available for the Total Access 612/616/624.) Used to enable or disable the option of generating ring back tone towards the T-span. Default is DISABLE. INTERFACES (FXS) > CONFIG > TANDEM > ANSWER SUPERVISION Causes the polarity of tip and ring to be reversed when the far-end answers. Can be enabled or disabled. Default is DISABLE. INTERFACES (FXS) > CONFIG > TANDEM > DNIS OPTIONS This parameter is used in conjunction with DNIS Delay. Choices are DISABLE, ENABLE, and ENABLE W/ NO ANSWER WINK. Default is DISABLE. INTERFACES (FXS) > CONFIG > TANDEM > DNIS DELAY Sets the amount of time the voice module waits after it receives a wink before forwarding a DNIS digit if the DNIS OPTION is set to Enable. Choices are 0.5 SEC, 1.0 SEC, 1.5 SEC, 2.0 SEC, 2.5 SEC, 3.0 SEC, and 5.0 SEC. Default is 3.0 SEC. INTERFACES (FXS) > CONFIG > TANDEM > FWD DISC DELAY In Tandem mode, FWD DISC DELAY defines the delay between the time the forward disconnect is received and the actual battery removal/reversal. Choices are 250 MSEC, 500 MSEC, 750 MSEC, 1 SEC, and 2 SEC. Default is 1 SEC. INTERFACES (FXS) > CONFIG > TANDEM > FWD DISC BATTERY In Tandem mode, selects whether battery is to be removed or reversed during forward disconnect. Choices are REMOVE and REVERSE. Default is REMOVE. INTERFACES (FXS) > STATUS Displays the status of the FXS signal bits. INTERFACES (FXS) > STATUS > PORT Displays the port number. INTERFACES (FXS) > STATUS > TA SIG This parameter displays the status of the Transmit A signal bit. The high/low status is indicated by a 0 or 1. INTERFACES (FXS) > STATUS > TB SIG This parameter displays the status of the Transmit B signal bit. The high/low status is indicated by a 0 or 1. INTERFACES (FXS) > STATUS > RA SIG This parameter displays the status of the Receive A signal bit. The high/low status is indicated by a 0 or 1. 88 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG INTERFACES (FXS) > STATUS > RB SIG This parameter displays the status of the Receive B signal bit. The high/low status is indicated by a 0 or 1. INTERFACES (FXS) > TEST Activate tests and monitor test status on a per port basis from this menu. INTERFACES (FXS) > TEST > PORT Displays the port number. INTERFACES (FXS) > TEST > TEST Choices are given below. Default is NONE. NONE Indicates that no test is currently active. DIGITAL NETWORK LPBK Used to loop back DS0 data coming from the network for each channel. Received data is latched in on the appropriate receive time slot on the receive bus. This data is then placed on the transmit bus in the unit’s transmit time slot. NETWORK ON HOOK TEST Used to test signaling sent to the network by the unit. On-hook signaling is sent to the network. The customer loop is forced on-hook while this test is active. NETWORK OFF HOOK TEST Used to test signaling sent to the network by the unit. Off-hook signaling is sent to the network. The customer loop is forced on-hook while this test is active. 1 KHZ TONE-NEAR END For Near End, the 2-wire side sends out a 1 kHz tone to verify talk path. 1 KHZ TONE-FAR END For Far End, the tone side is sent out across the Network and can be heard if monitoring on the T1 as well as off of the Far End 2-wire side. This verifies talk path. CUSTOMER RING TEST The customer ring test will activate the unit’s ring relay in a 2-on /4-off cadence, providing ringing to the customer loop. INTERFACES (FXS) > TEST > TEST STATUS This option indicates whether a test is in progress. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 89 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual L2 PROTOCOL Use the L2 protocol menu to select the L2 protocol, configure the protocol specific parameters and view the status as shown in Figure 6. Figure 6. L2 Protocol Menu L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0]) Configure the L2 protocol and view the status parameters from this menu. The 0 in T1[0] represents a physical port. The T1 physical port is always 0. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0]) > PROTOCOL Configure the L2 protocol mode. Choices are PPP, FRE, and AUTO. The default is AUTO. Selecting AUTO enables the Auto-config feature. Reference DLP-014, Unit Installation Using the Auto-Config Feature, for more information. 90 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0]) > PROTOCOL > PPP Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) is an 8-bit serial protocol which allows a PC to connect as a TCP/IP host to a network through an asynchronous port. PPP is used for connection from a PC to an Internet Service Provider (ISP) for Internet access. PPP works over synchronous and asynchronous circuits. Router-to-router and host-to-network connections can be made via PPP. PPP includes error detection while Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP) and other protocols do not. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0]) > PROTOCOL > FRE Frame Relay is a switched data link layer protocol that handles multiple virtual circuits using High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC) encapsulation. Frame Relay uses statistical multiplexing as opposed to time-division-multiplexing to multiplex many logical connections over a single physical link. It contains a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) for detecting bad data, but leaves the error correction algorithms to be performed by the higher protocol layers. Similarly, Frame Relay uses simple congestion notification. This notification in turn can alert higher-layer protocols to exercise flow control. These characteristics allow Frame Relay to provide a more flexible and efficient use of bandwidth. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0]) > PROTOCOL > AUTO Setting the L2 PROTOCOL to AUTO allows the unit to automatically detect the L2 PROTOCOL from the network. The L2 PROTOCOL must be set to AUTO in order to use the Auto-config feature. Reference DLP-12 Unit Installation Using the Auto-Config Feature, for more information. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - PPP) Configure the L2 PROTOCOL parameters and view the status of the T1 interface using PPP protocol from this menu. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - PPP) > CONFIG Configure the L2 PROTOCOL parameters for the T1 interface using PPP protocol. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - PPP) > CONFIG > MODE Select the L2 PROTOCOL mode. Choices are ROUTE IP, BRIDGE ALL, and ROUTE IP/BRIDGE OTHER. The Default is ROUTE IP. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - PPP) > CONFIG > AUTHENTICATION The authentication menu contains the required parameters for the authentication of the PPP peer and for being authenticated by the PPP peer. Authentication is applied between the unit and the PPP peer as described in the AUTHENTICATION submenus. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 91 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - PPP) > CONFIG > AUTHENTICATION > TX METHOD This parameter specifies how the unit is to be authenticated by the PPP peer. There are four possible selections. Default is NONE. NONE The connection will not allow the PPP peer to authenticate it. PAP, CHAP, OR EAP The unit will ask for EAP during the first PPP LCP negotiation and allow the PPP peer to negotiate down to CHAP or PAP. CHAP OR EAP The unit will ask for EAP during the first PPP LCP negotiation and allow the PPP peer to negotiate down to CHAP but not PAP. EAP ONLY The unit will only allow EAP to be negotiated. If the PPP peer is not capable of doing EAP, then the connection will not succeed. PAP ONLY The unit will only allow PAP to be negotiated. If the PPP peer is not capable of doing PAP, then the connection will not succeed. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - PPP) > CONFIG > AUTHENTICATION > TX USERNAME (This option is not available when the TX METHOD is set to NONE.) This is the username that is used when being authenticated by the PPP peer. You can enter up to 31 characters in this field. Default is no entry in the TX USERNAME field. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - PPP) > CONFIG > AUTHENTICATION > TX PASSWORD (This option is not available when the TX METHOD is set to NONE.) This is the password or secret that is used when being authenticated by the PPP peer. You can enter up to 30 characters in this field. Default is no password. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - PPP) > CONFIG > AUTHENTICATION > RX METHOD This parameter specifies how the unit is to be authenticated by the PPP peer. There are four possible selections. Default is NONE. 92 NONE The connection will not allow the PPP peer to authenticate it. PAP, CHAP, OR EAP The unit will ask for EAP during the first PPP LCP negotiation and allow the PPP peer to negotiate down to CHAP or PAP. CHAP OR EAP The unit will ask for EAP during the first PPP LCP negotiation and allow the PPP peer to negotiate down to CHAP but not PAP. EAP The unit will only allow EAP to be negotiated. If the PPP peer is not capable of doing EAP, then the connection will not succeed. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - PPP) > CONFIG > AUTHENTICATION > RX USERNAME (This option is not available when the RX METHOD is set to none.) This is the username used to authenticate the PPP peer. You can enter up to 31 characters in this field. Default is no entry in the RX USERNAME field. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - PPP) > CONFIG > AUTHENTICATION > RX PASSWORD (This option is not available when the RX METHOD is set to none.) This is the password or secret that is used to authenticate the PPP peer. You can enter up to 30 characters in this field. Default is no password. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - PPP) > CONFIG > PPP Configure the PPP specific parameters such as MAX CONFIG, MAX TIMER, MAX FAILURE, and FORCE PEER IP ADDRESS from this menu. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - PPP) > CONFIG > PPP > MAX CONFIG This value is the number of unanswered configuration-requests that should be transmitted before resetting PPP negotiations. The possible values are 5, 10, 15 and 20 (default). L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - PPP) > CONFIG > PPP > MAX TIMER (SEC) This value is the number of seconds to wait between unanswered configuration-requests. The possible values are 1 SEC, 2 SECS, 3 SECS (DEFAULT), 5 SECS and 10 SECS. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - PPP) > CONFIG > PPP > MAX FAILURE Due to the nature of PPP, configuration options may not be agreed upon between two PPP peers. This value is the number of configuration-naks that should occur before an option is configuration-rejected. The possible values are 5 (DEFAULT), 10, 15 and 20. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - PPP) > CONFIG > PPP > FORCE PEER IP ADDRESS This option forces the PPP to negotiate the IP address entered instead of allowing the other an address to be assigned by the remote end. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - PPP) > STATUS View the L2 PROTOCOL status for the T1 interface using the PPP protocol. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - PPP) > STATUS > LCP Link Control Protocol. Reflects LCP layer active. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - PPP) > STATUS > BCP Shows UP if PPP Bridge Control Protocol has negotiated successfully. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - PPP) > STATUS > IPCP 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 93 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Shows UP if PPP IP Control Protocol has negotiated successfully. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - PPP) > STATUS > UP TIME Displays how long the PPP session has been connected. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - PPP) > STATUS > TX PKTS Number of packets transmitted. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - PPP) > STATUS > RX PKTS Number of packets received. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - PPP) > STATUS > TX BYTES Number of bytes transmitted. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - PPP) > STATUS > RX BYTES Number of bytes received. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - PPP) > STATUS > CLEAR STATS Selecting this activator will clear the PPP stats. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) Configure the L2 PROTOCOL parameters and view the status of the T1 interface using Frame Relay protocol from this menu. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > CONFIG Configure the L2 PROTOCOL parameters for the T1 interface using the Frame Relay protocol. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > CONFIG > MAINTENANCE PROTOCOL The Frame Relay maintenance protocol is used on the WAN port. The maintenance protocol is used to send link status and virtual circuit information between Frame Relay switches and other devices (such as routers) that communicate with them. Possible choices are as follows: ANNEX D (ANSI) This is ANSI standard ANSI T1.617-D and is the most commonly used in the United States. ANNEX A (Q933A) This is the CCITT European standard, ITU-T Q.933-A. LMI 94 This was developed by a vendor consortium and is also known as the “Consortium” management interface specification. It is still used by some carriers in the United States. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual STATIC (NO SIG) Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG This should be selected when there is no Frame Relay switch in the circuit. The DLCIs are assigned in the DLCI Mapping and must be the same for the device it will communicate with. The default value is ANNEX D (ANSI). L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > CONFIG > POLLING FREQUENCY (5-30) This parameter is the interval that the unit polls the Frame Relay switch using the maintenance protocol selected. The unit is required to poll the Frame Relay switch periodically to determine whether the link is active. The value is in seconds and ranges from 5 TO 30 seconds with a default of 10 SECONDS. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > CONFIG > DLCI MAPPING This menu allows each DLCI to be mapped to a particular Frame Relay maintenance protocol. Each protocol parameter can be individually configured for each DLCI. By factory default, the DLCI map is empty. When empty and a maintenance protocol other than static is used, the unit will poll the switch to determine which DLCIs are active. These active DLCIs will attempt to determine the IP addresses on the other end of the virtual circuit using Inverse ARP (IARP). If there is a response, the network learned will be added to the router tables and the virtual circuit will be treated as an unnumbered interface. Bridge connections are made using bridge group 1. When more than one DLCI mapping is listed, the unit will try to match the DLCIs learned from the Frame Relay switch with the DLCI values in the map. If there is a match, the protocols specified in the map are used. However, if an active DLCI is not in the list, it looks for an entry that has 0 in the DLCI field. This entry is considered the default entry to use when no match occurs. If this default entry is not present, the unit falls back to using IARP to determine the protocols to use with that particular virtual circuit. If a static maintenance protocol is used, at least one DLCI mapping must be specified. To insert a new profile, press the I key when over the Num column. A new inserted profile will always be set up with the default parameters. To copy parameters from an old profile to this newly inserted profile, use the copy (C) and paste (P) keys. Entire configuration trees can be copied with this method. To delete an unused profile, use the D key when the cursor is over the number in the Num column. Once deleted, the profile is gone permanently. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > CONFIG > DLCI MAPPING > NUM Displays the index number in the DLCI mapping table. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > CONFIG > DLCI MAPPING > ACTIVE When this parameter is set to YES (def), the mapping is used to determine the protocols used. If set to NO, the unit will ignore the virtual circuit with this DLCI. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 95 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > CONFIG > DLCI MAPPING > INTERFACE Shows the user the physical and logical port associated with each DLCI. This is a read-only field. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > CONFIG > DLCI MAPPING > DLCI The Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI) number identifies the virtual circuit being configured. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > CONFIG > DLCI MAPPING > MODE The mode identifies how the data will be forwarded. The choices are; ROUTE IP All IP data for this DLCI will be routed BRIDGE ALL All data for this DLCI will be bridged ROUTE IP/BRIDGE OTHER All IP data will be routed. All other data will be bridged. The default is ROUTE IP. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > CONFIG > BECN TIMEOUT (MSEC) This value is expressed in milliseconds and represents the amount of time the unit will stop transmitting over a PVC which received a packet with the BECN bit set. Range is 50-5000 msec, the default is 50 SECONDS. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > STATUS View the L2 protocol status for the T1 interface using the Frame Relay protocol. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > STATUS > PORT View the Frame Relay statistics on the WAN port. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > STATUS > PORT > PORT INDEX Integer used for identifying DLCIs on an interface. A single DLCI will always be port index 0. Subsequent DLCIs will have incrementing port indices. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > STATUS > PORT > SIGNAL STATE Displays “up” when the unit is communicating with the Frame Relay switch; otherwise displays “down”. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > STATUS > PORT > TX FRAMES Total frames transmitted out the WAN port. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > STATUS > PORT > RX FRAMES Total frames received on the WAN port. 96 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > STATUS > PORT > TX BYTES Total bytes transmitted out the WAN port L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > STATUS > PORT > RX BYTES Total bytes received on the WAN port L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > STATUS > PORT > FULL STATUS TX FRAMES Number of full status frames transmitted out the WAN port. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > STATUS > PORT > FULL STATUS RX FRAMES Number of full status frames received on the WAN port. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > STATUS > PORT > LINK INTEGRITY STATUS TX FRAMES Number of Link-Integrity (LI) only Frames transmitted out the WAN port. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > STATUS > PORT > LINK INTEGRITY STATUS RX FRAMES Number of LI only Frames received on the WAN port. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > STATUS > PORT > DROP UNKNOWN DLCI Number of frames received that were not associated with any known PVC. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > STATUS > PORT > DROP INVALID DLCI Number of frames received that had illegal DLCIs. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > STATUS > PORT > CLEAR STATS Selecting this activator will clear the port Frame Relay Statistics. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > STATUS > PVC'S View the Frame Relay status on a per PVC basis. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > STATUS > PVC'S > DLCI The DCLI number identifies the virtual circuit being monitored. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 97 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > STATUS > PVC'S > STATE The state of the virtual circuit: INACTIVE The circuit exists but has been deactivated by the Frame Relay switch. EXISTS The circuit exists at this point and should be activated soon. ACTIVE The circuit is fully active. OFF The circuit has been turned off by the DLCI mapping active selection. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > STATUS > PVC'S > TX FRAMES Number of Frame Relay packets that have been transmitted via this DLCI. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > STATUS > PVC'S > RX FRAMES Number of Frame Relay packets that have been received via this DLCI. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > STATUS > PVC'S > TX BYTES Number of Frame Relay bytes that have been transmitted via this DLCI. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > STATUS > PVC'S > RX BYTES Number of Frame Relay bytes that have been received via this DLCI. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > STATUS > PVC'S > DE COUNT Number of packets received on this DLCI with the Discharge Eligible (DE) bit set. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > STATUS > PVC'S > CR COUNT Number of packets received on this DLCI with the command response (CR) bit set. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > STATUS > PVC'S > BECN COUNT Number of packets received on this DLCI with the Backward Explicit Congestion Notification (BECN) bit set. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > STATUS > PVC'S > FECN COUNT Number of packets received on this DLCI with the Forward Explicit Congestion Notification (FECN) bit set. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - FRE) > STATUS > PVC'S > UNKNOWN FRAME RX Number of frames that have been received that the unit does not know where to route. 98 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - AUTO) View the status of the T1 interface with the L2 PROTOCOL set to AUTO (using Auto-config feature). Reference DLP-014, Unit Installation Using the Auto-Config Feature for further details. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - AUTO) > STATUS View the status of the auto detect function and traffic flow for the T1 interface with a L2 protocol set to auto. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - AUTO) > STATUS > STATE This field represents the state of the auto detect/configuration function. The possible states are: OFF The T1 interface is down so the auto detect/configuration process is currently idle. DETECTING L2 PROTOCOL The T1 interface is up and waiting for the first control/signaling packet. CONFIRMING FR The T1 interface is up and one FR signaling packet has been received. CONFIRMED FR The T1 interface is up and two FR signaling packets have been received. It takes two consecutive control/signaling packets of the same type to confirm the detected protocol. CONFIRMING PPP The T1 interface is up and one PPP control packet has been received. CONFIRMED PPP The T1 interface is up and two PPP control packets have been received. It takes two consecutive control/signaling packets of the same type to confirm the detected protocol. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - AUTO) > STATUS > TX PKTS Number of packets transmitted out of the WAN port. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - AUTO) > STATUS > RX PKTS Number of packets received on the WAN port. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - AUTO) > STATUS > TX BYTES Number of bytes transmitted out of the WAN port. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - AUTO) > STATUS > RX BYTES Number of bytes received out the WAN port. L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0] - AUTO) > STATUS > CLEAR STATS Selecting this activator will clear the statistics. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 99 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual L2 PROTOCOL (ETH[1]) Configure the L2 PROTOCOL parameters and view the status of the Ethernet interface from this menu. The 1 in ETH[1] represents a physical port. The Ethernet physical port is always 1. L2 PROTOCOL (ETH[1]) > PROTOCOL Displays the L2 protocol for the 10/100BASET Ethernet port. Currently only 802.3 is supported. L2 PROTOCOL (ETH[1]) > CONFIG Configure the mode for this 10/100BASET Ethernet port from this menu. L2 PROTOCOL (ETH[1]) > CONFIG > MODE The mode identifies how the data will be forwarded. The choices are; ROUTE IP All IP data will be routed BRIDGE ALL All data will be bridged ROUTE IP/BRIDGE OTHER All IP data will be routed. All other data will be bridged. The default is ROUTE IP. L2 PROTOCOL (ETH[1]) > STATUS View the L2 protocol statistics for the 10/100BaseT Ethernet port from this menu. L2 PROTOCOL (ETH[1]) > STATUS > TX PACKETS Total number of packets transmitted out the Ethernet port. L2 PROTOCOL (ETH[1]) > STATUS > RX PACKETS Total number of packets received from the Ethernet port. L2 PROTOCOL (ETH[1]) > STATUS > TX ERRORS Total number of transmit errors encountered on Ethernet port. L2 PROTOCOL (ETH[1]) > STATUS > SINGLE COLLISIONS Total number of single collisions before successful transmission. 100 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG L2 PROTOCOL (ETH[1]) > STATUS > MULTIPLE COLLISIONS Total number of multiple collisions before successful transmission. L2 PROTOCOL (ETH[1]) > STATUS > EXCESSIVE COLLISIONS Total number of collisions that resulted in packet being dropped. L2 PROTOCOL (ETH[1]) > STATUS > DEFERRED TRANSMISSIONS Total number of packets deferred due to collisions. L2 PROTOCOL (ETH[1]) > STATUS > CARRIER SENSE ERRORS Total number of carrier sense errors encountered (no link integrity). L2 PROTOCOL (ETH[1]) > STATUS > RX ERRORS Number of packets received in error and dropped. L2 PROTOCOL (ETH[1]) > STATUS > CRCS Number of packets detected with CRC errors. L2 PROTOCOL (ETH[1]) > STATUS > RX COLLISIONS Number of collisions which occurred during reception. L2 PROTOCOL (ETH[1]) > STATUS > NON-ALIGNED The NON-ALIGNED parameter is set when the number of bits received is not divisible by 8. L2 PROTOCOL (ETH[1]) > STATUS > CLEAR COUNTS Selecting this activator clears all the Ethernet stats. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 101 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual BRIDGE Configure the bridge parameters and view bridging statistics from this menu as shown in Figure 7. Figure 7. Bridge Menu BRIDGE > CONFIG Configure the interfaces and bridge table parameters from this menu. BRIDGE > CONFIG > INTERFACES (T1[0]) Configure the T1 interface bridging parameters from this menu. The T1[0] interface will not appear as a bridge interface entry if the mode is set to route IP. BRIDGE > CONFIG > INTERFACES (T1[0]) > SUB-INTERFACE The T1 sub-interface is PPP [0.0] if the L2 PROTOCOL is set for PPP. The [0.0] represents the T1 physical and logical ports respectively. This is a read-only field. The T1 sub-interface is FRE [0.X] if the L2 PROTOCOL is set for FRAME RELAY. The [0.X] represents the T1 physical and logical ports respectively. The T1 physical port is always 0. The X represents the Frame Relay logical port and will be a number between 0-9 corresponding to the interface number under L2 PROTOCOL > CONFIG > DLCI MAPPING. This is a read-only field. 102 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG BRIDGE > CONFIG > INTERFACES (ETH[1]) Configure the Ethernet Bridging parameters from this menu. The ETH[1] interface will not appear as a bridge interface entry if the mode is set to route IP. BRIDGE > CONFIG > INTERFACES (ETH[1]) > SUB-INTERFACE The Ethernet sub-interface is 802.3[1.0]. The [1.0] represents the Ethernet physical and logical ports, where 1 is the physical port and 0 is the logical port assigned to the Ethernet interface. This is a read-only field. BRIDGE > CONFIG > BRIDGE TABLE Configure the bridge table parameters from this menu. BRIDGE > CONFIG > BRIDGE TABLE > BRIDGE TABLE AGING (0-65535) BRIDGE TABLE AGING is how soon an entry ages out of the Bridge table (in minutes). Default is 5. BRIDGE > STATUS View the bridging statistics from this menu. BRIDGE > STATUS > BRIDGE TABLE View the bridge table status from this menu. BRIDGE > STATUS > BRIDGE TABLE > MAC ADDRESS Ethernet address for device learned. This is a read only field. BRIDGE > STATUS > BRIDGE TABLE > LOCATION Location indicates if it is LAN or WAN. This is a read-only field. BRIDGE > STATUS > BRIDGE TABLE > TTL Time to Live (TTL) is the number of seconds until the address is removed from the table. This is a read only field. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 103 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual ROUTER Configure the router parameters and view routing statistics from this menu as shown in Figure 8. Figure 8. Router Menu ROUTER > CONFIG Configure the interfaces, routes, DHCP Server, and UDP Relay options from this menu. ROUTER > CONFIG > INTERFACES Configure the layer 3 options for the Ethernet and T1 interfaces from this menu. ROUTER > CONFIG > INTERFACES (ETH[1]) Configure the layer 3 options for the Ethernet parameters from this menu. The 1 in ETH[1] represents a physical port. The Ethernet physical port will always be 1. The Ethernet port will always appear in the Router > Config > Interfaces table regardless of the L2 protocol mode setting. 104 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG ROUTER > CONFIG > INTERFACES (ETH[1]) > SUB-INTERFACE The Ethernet sub-interface is 802.3[1.0]. The [1.0] represents the Ethernet physical and logical ports, where 1 is the physical port and 0 is the logical port assigned to the Ethernet interface. This is a read-only field. ROUTER > CONFIG > INTERFACES (ETH[1])> SETUP Configure the Ethernet addressing, RIP, and Proxy ARP from this menu. PRIMARY IP This is used to setup the IP addresses for the LAN on the unit. IP ADDRESS The IP address assigned to the unit's Ethernet port is set here. This address must be unique within the network. Default is 10.0.0.1. SUBNET MASK This is the IP network mask that is to be applied to the unit's Ethernet port. Default is 255.255.255.0. RIP Use this menu to enable RIP on the LAN interface. VERSION Enables or disables RIP and specifies the RIP protocol. Choices are; OFF (which disables RIP), V1 (RIP Version 1) or V2 (RIP Version 2). The default is OFF. METHOD Specifies the way the RIP protocol sends out its advertisements. The following options are available: SPLIT HORIZON (DEF) Only routes not learned from this circuit are advertised. POISON REVERSE All routes are advertised, but the routes learned from this port are “poisoned” with an infinite metric. DIRECTION Allows the direction at which RIP advertisements are sent and received to be specified. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 105 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual TX AND RX (DEF) RIP advertisements are periodically transmitted and are listened to on this port. TX ONLY RIP advertisements are periodically transmitted but are not listened to on this port. RX ONLY RIP advertisements are listened to on this port, but are not transmitted on this port. V2 SECRET Enter the secret used by RIP version 2 here. PROXY ARP This feature allows the network portion of a group of addresses to be shared among several physical network segments. The ARP protocol provides a way for devices to create a mapping between physical addresses and logical IP addresses. Proxy ARP makes use of this mapping feature by instructing a router to answer ARP requests as a "proxy" for the IP addresses behind one of its ports. The device which sent the ARP request will then correctly assume that it can reach the requested IP address by sending packets to the physical address that was returned. This technique effectively hides the fact that a network has been (further) subnetted. If this option is set to YES, when an ARP request is received on the Ethernet port the address is looked up in the IP routing table. If the forwarding port is not on the Ethernet port and the route is not the default route, the unit will answer the request with its own hardware address. Default is NO. SECONDARY IP This allows the unit to specify additional IP addresses and networks on its Ethernet. The maximum number of entries is 5. NUM Displays the index number in the secondary IP list. IP ADDRESS This is the second IP address the unit will respond to on the Ethernet. Default is 0.0.0.0. SUBNET MASK This is the mask for the network. Default is 255.255.255.255. 106 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG ROUTER > CONFIG > INTERFACES (T1[0]) Configure the T1 interface parameters from this menu. The 0 in T1[0] represents a physical port. The T1 physical port will always be 0. The T1 interface will not appear in the ROUTER > CONFIG > INTERFACES table if the L2 PROTOCOL MODE is set for BRIDGE ALL. The T1 interface will not appear if a DLCI is not entered in the DLCI MAPPING table (L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0]-FRE) > CONFIG > DLCI MAPPING) when the L2 PROTOCOL is set to Frame Relay (FRE). ROUTER > CONFIG > INTERFACES (T1[0])> SUB-INTERFACE The T1 sub-interface is PPP [0.0] if the L2 protocol is set for PPP. The [0.0] represents the T1 physical and logical ports respectively. This is a read-only field. The T1 sub-interface is FRE [0.X] if the L2 protocol is set for FRAME RELAY. The [0.X] represents the T1 physical and logical ports respectively. The T1 physical port is always 0. The X represents the Frame Relay logical port and will be a number between 0-9 corresponding to the interface number under L2 PROTOCOL > CONFIG > DLCI MAPPING. This is a read-only field. ROUTER > CONFIG > INTERFACES (T1[0]) > SET-UP Configure the addressing, address mode, MTU, NAT, and RIP parameters from this menu. ACTIVE This option allows this DLCI to be assumed as active (set to YES) and begin transmitting data packets. If set to No, the interface will not be put in the route table and will not be seen by other devices on the network. This can be set to NO if waiting on future turnup from Frame Relay provider. Default is set to YES. DLCI (This option is only available when the L2 PROTOCOL is set to FRAME RELAY.) This DLCI is the number associated with the virtual circuit on the T1 interface. This number corresponds to the DLCI number in the L2 PROTOCOL > CONFIG > DLCI MAPPING Table. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 107 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual ADDRESS MODE This option determines how the WAN interface receives its IP address. USER SPECIFIED is the normal mode of operation. • • • • • The choices are USER SPECIFIED (default) and IPCP ASSIGNED if the L2 PROTOCOL is set to PPP. The choices are USER SPECIFIED (default), IARP, and DHCP CLIENT if the L2 PROTOCOL is set to FRAME RELAY. IARP can be used to learn the far end IP address. If using the Auto-config option and the L2 PROTOCOL is PPP, the default is IPCP ASSIGNED. This means the unit will learn its IP address from a router on the WAN during IPCP negotiation. It is the same mechanism used by the auto detection algorithm. If using the Auto-config option and the L2 PROTOCOL is FRAME RELAY, the default is DHCP CLIENT. This means a DHCP Server from the service provider will issue this unit an IP address using DHCP. If the Auto-config option is not used, the USER SPECIFIED option for both PPP and FRAME RELAY allows the IP addresses to be statically programed into the unit. LOCAL IP ADDRESS (This option is only applicable in User Specified address mode.) For PPP, this IP address is the local WAN IP address and can be statically assigned if using numbered interfaces. For FRAME RELAY, this is the numbered IP associated with this DLCI interface. This address is used by the unit to respond to Inverse ARP requests. If this IP address is left as 0.0.0.0, the link is treated as unnumbered and the unit responds to the Inverse ARP with its Ethernet IP address. Default is 0.0.0.0. IP NETMASK (This option is not available for FRAME RELAY DHCP CLIENT ADDRESS MODE.) For Frame Relay, the IP netmask which is applied to the FAR-END IP ADDRESS and LOCAL IP ADDRESS is specified here. Default is 0.0.0.0. For the PPP protocol, this network mask is applied to the FAR-END IP ADDRESS for determining the PPP peer’s network. If left as 0.0.0.0, a standard network mask is used. Default is 0.0.0.0. FAR-END IP ADDRESS (This option is not available for FRAME RELAY DHCP CLIENT ADDRESS MODE, FRAME RELAY IARP ADDRESS MODE or PPP IPCP ASSIGNED ADDRESS MODE.) For Frame Relay, this is the IP address of the device on the other end of the virtual circuit. When this DLCI becomes active, the unit will add a route in the IP routing table. Default is 0.0.0.0. For the PPP protocol, the PPP peer’s IP address or network can be set here, if known. Leaving this at 0.0.0.0 means that the unit will determine the PPP peer’s IP and network (if unnumbered) using the PPP IPCP. Default is 0.0.0.0. 108 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG MTU (This option is not available if the L2 PROTOCOL is set to PPP.) The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) is the largest possible data unit that can be transmitted. The range is 64 to 1500. The default is 1500. NAT The unit can perform Network Address Translation (NAT). This feature is most widely used when connecting to the Internet. The Ethernet network can consist of private network numbers. When this profile is enabled, all IP addresses on the Ethernet side are translated into the one real IP address. Multiple stations on the Ethernet side can access the Internet simultaneously. PORT TRANSLATION By enabling port translation, IP packets are modified as they pass through this interface. During transmission, private addresses are translated into a single public (NAPT) IP address. Incoming packets are translated from the public to private address based on the protocol port numbers. Default is DISABLED. When disabled, the unit will route across the connection normally. PUBLIC IP ADDRESS MODE (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled.) The port translation requires at least a single real IP address for translating. This value can use the IP assigned to the interface (or assigned via layer 2 protocol like PPP), obtained using DHCP client, or statically specified on this menu. If the address cannot be learned, then it must be specified in order for the translation to work. Choices are INTERFACE, SPECIFIED, and DHCP CLIENT. Default is INTERFACE. PUBLIC IP ADDRESS (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled and the PUBLIC IP ADDRESS MODE is set to SPECIFIED.) This is the specified address used as the NAT address. Default is 0.0.0.0. TRANSLATE BODY OF UNMAPPED PORTS If this option is set to DISABLED, the user must add an entry in the translation table for every port which needs to be translated. If set to enabled, every port will be translated. The default is DISABLED which is sufficient for most circuits. TRANSLATION TABLE (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled.) Add translation entries to specify port address translations or to setup 1:1 translations. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 109 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual PUBLIC ADDRESS MODE (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled.) The public IP address used for this translation entry can be the NAPT IP address assigned to the link or can be specified. You specify an address to direct packets with certain protocols to different servers. Choices are NAPT ADDR and SPECIFIED. Default is NAPT ADDR. PUBLIC ADDRESS (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled and the PUBLIC ADDRESS MODE is set to SPECIFIED.) Default is 0.0.0.0. PROTOCOL MODE (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled.) The upper layer protocol that is to be monitored for translation. For TCP and UDP, a port number must also be specified. Choices are TCP; UDP; ICMP; ANY (TCP, UDP, or ICMP); ALL; SPECIFIED; and NONE. Default is NONE. PROTOCOL (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled and PROTOCOL MODE is set to SPECIFIED.) Default is 0 (decimal). PROTOCOL TYPE (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled and PROTOCOL MODE is set to SPECIFIED.) For well known protocols, this status will populate with the protocol. This is a read-only field. PUBLIC TYPE MODE (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled and PROTOCOL MODE is set to either TCP or UDP.) The public destination port associated with this entry can be specified to add more control over certain types of traffic. Choices are SPECIFIED and ANY PORT. The default, ANY PORT, covers all port types. PUBLIC PORT (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled and PUBLIC PORT MODE is set to SPECIFIED.) However, it will not be available if PROTOCOL MODE is set to ICMP; ANY (TCP, UDP, or ICMP); ALL; SPECIFIED; or NONE. Default is 0 (decimal). PUBLIC PORT TYPE (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled and PUBLIC PORT MODE is set to SPECIFIED.) However, it will not be available if PROTOCOL MODE is set to ICMP; ANY (TCP, UDP, or ICMP); ALL; SPECIFIED; or NONE. Read-only. 110 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG PRIVATE ADDRESS MODE (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled.) The private IP address can be specified to steer certain protocols and ports to specific servers in the private network. Likewise, internal hosts can be steered to certain servers on the public network. A new request from the public network matching this entry’s public parameters will be dropped if this mode is set to ANY INTERNAL. Choices are SPECIFIED and ANY INTERNAL. Default is ANY INTERNAL. PRIVATE ADDRESS (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled and PRIVATE ADDRESS MODE is set to SPECIFIED.) Default is 0.0.0.0. PRIVATE PORT MODE (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled. However, it will not be available if PROTOCOL MODE is set to ICMP; ANY (TCP, UDP, or ICMP); ALL; SPECIFIED; or NONE.) The private destination port associated with this entry can be specified to add more control over certain types of traffic. Leave as Any Port to cover all port types. Choices are ANY PORT and SPECIFIED. Default is ANY PORT. PRIVATE PORT (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled and PRIVATE PORT MODE is set to SPECIFIED. However, it will not be available if PROTOCOL MODE is set to ICMP; ANY (TCP, UDP, or ICMP); ALL; SPECIFIED; or NONE. Default is 0 (decimal).) TRANSLATE BODY (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled.) When set to YES, the application payload in the packet is scanned for occurrences of the private/public IP address in binary or ASCII form. Set this to NO (default) for applications where this will cause problems. NAT VIEW Shows the protocols that are actively being translated. ENTRY Indicates the entry number in the NAT View Table. PRIV ADDR (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled.) This shows the private address of the host that the entry is used for. PUB ADDR (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled.) This shows the public address this entry is using for its NAPT. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 111 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual SERV ADDR (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled.) This is the destination of the packet. PROTO (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled.) This shows the protocol used (TCP, UDP, ICMP, etc.). PRIV PORT (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled.) This is the private port used for the entry. SPOOF PORT (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled.) If the same private port is already used in the table, it will spoof a different port for the entry. SERVER PORT (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled.) This port is used on the public side. TIME (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled.) This is the time since the entry was last used. IN CNT (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled.) This is the number of packets that came in. OUT CNT (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled.) This is the number of packets sent out. NAPT ADDRESS (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled.) Represents the public address that is being used as the NAPT address. Read-only. ENTRY COUNT (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled.) The number of entries in the NAT table. Maximum is 1500. ENTRY OVERFLOW COUNT (This option is only available when NAT PORT TRANSLATION is enabled.) A count of the dropped entries due to entry count being 1500 or greater; i.e., the NAT table is full. 112 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG RIP Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is based on the shortest path (hops) between two IP addresses on a network. Each router maintains and broadcasts a routing table of known addresses/routes. VERSION The RIP protocol can be specified per DLCI. The possible selections are OFF (default) (meaning no RIP packets are listened to or sent), V1 (RIP version 1) or V2 (which is RIP version 2). METHOD This specifies the way the RIP protocol sends out its advertisements. NONE (DEF) All routes in the router table are advertised out this virtual circuit with no modification of the metrics. SPLIT HORIZON Only routes not learned from this particular virtual circuit are advertised. POISON REVERSE All routes are advertised, but the routes learned from this port are “poisoned” with an infinite metric. DIRECTION This parameter specifies the direction at which RIP advertisements are sent and listened. TX AND RX (DEF) RIP advertisements are periodically transmitted and are listened to on this virtual circuit. TX ONLY RIP advertisements are periodically transmitted but are not listened to on this virtual circuit. RX ONLY RIP is not transmitted on this virtual circuit but they are listened to. V2 SECRET Enter the secret used by RIP version 2 here. ROUTER > CONFIG > ROUTES Configures the default gateway and static routes from this menu. ROUTER > CONFIG > ROUTES > DEFAULT GATEWAY The default gateway is used by the unit to send IP packets whose destination address is not found in the route table. Default is 0.0.0.0. This is a default gateway for the entire unit, not just for the Ethernet port. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 113 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual ROUTER > CONFIG > ROUTES > STATIC ROUTES Use this menu to enter static routes to other networks. NUM Displays the index number in the static route table. ACTIVE Adds this static route entry to the IP routing table when set to YES and removes it (if it was previously added) if set to NO. Default is NO. IP ADDRESS The IP address of the host or network address of the device being routed to. Default is 0.0.0.0. SUBNET MASK Determines the bits in the previous IP address that are used. If this is to be a host route, it must be set to all ones (255.255.255.255). Default is 0.0.0.0. GATEWAY The IP address of the router to receive the forwarded IP packet. Default is 0.0.0.0. HOPS The number of router hops required to get to the network or host. Maximum distance is 16 hops. Default is 1. PRIVATE When set to NO, the unit will advertise this static route using RIP. Setting to YES means that the route is kept private. Default is NO. ROUTER > CONFIG > DHCP SERVER Use this menu to set up the DHCP server. ROUTER > CONFIG > DHCP SERVER > DHCP MODE When set to ON, the unit acts as a DHCP server and will dynamically assign IP, network mask, default gateway, and DNS addresses to any device which transmits a broadcast DHCP request. The addresses assigned are based on the unit’s own IP address and will be within the same network. Default is OFF. 114 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG ROUTER > CONFIG > DHCP SERVER > DHCP RENEWAL TIME (HOURS) The number of hours that the DHCP server should allow the device to keep its previous IP assignment, before it is required to send a new DHCP request. The default is 0 HOURS which represents an infinite lease. ROUTER > CONFIG > DHCP SERVER > DOMAIN NAME Text string used to represent the domain name used by the unit. ROUTER > CONFIG > DHCP SERVER > PRIMARY DNS First server to which domain name requests are sent. ROUTER > CONFIG > DHCP SERVER > SECONDARY DNS Server used as a backup, in case the primary address does not respond to the request. ROUTER > CONFIG > DHCP SERVER > PRIMARY NBNS/WINS Primary address of the NBNS/WINS server. ROUTER > CONFIG > DHCP SERVER > SECONDARY NBNS/WINS Secondary address of the NBNS/WINS server. ROUTER > CONFIG > UDP RELAY This menu configures the unit to act as a UDP relay agent for applications requiring a response from UDP hosts that are not on the same network segment as their clients. ROUTER > CONFIG > UDP RELAY > MODE When this option is set to ON, the unit will act as a relay agent. Default is OFF. ROUTER > CONFIG > UDP RELAY > UDP RELAY LIST Up to four relay destination servers can be specified in this list. # Indicates the entry number in the UDP Relay List table. RELAY ADDRESS This is the IP address of the server that will receive the relay packet. Default is 0.0.0.0. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 115 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual UDP PORT TYPE The choices are STANDARD (def) and SPECIFIED. The following standard UDP protocols are relayed when set: DHCP, TFTP, DNS, NTP (Network Time Protocol, port 123), NBNS (NetBios Name Server, port 137), NBDG (NetBIOS Datagram, port 138), and BootP. When SPECIFIED is set, the UDP port (1 to 65535) can be specified in the UDP Port columns (up to three per server). UDP PORT 1, 2, 3 Used for specifying UDP ports to be relayed. These fields only apply when UDP PORT TYPE is set to SPECIFIED. Default is 0. ROUTER > STATUS View the IP ROUTES, IP STATS, and ARP CACHE statistics from this menu. ROUTER > STATUS > IP ROUTES This lists the contents of the unit’s IP route table. ROUTER > STATUS > IP ROUTES > IP ADDRESS Network or host destination address. ROUTER > STATUS > IP ROUTES > NETMASK Network mask applied to the destination address. ROUTER > STATUS > IP ROUTES > GATEWAY Host or router to receive this packet. ROUTER > STATUS > IP ROUTES > PORT Port gateway is located on: LOCAL sent directly to the unit’s router ETH0 The unit’s ethernet port WAN0 The unit’s first PPP bundle FR 0 . . . FR 9 The unit is connected up to 10 DLCIs ROUTER > STATUS > IP ROUTES > USE Number of times the unit has referenced the route. 116 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG ROUTER > STATUS > IP ROUTES > FLAGS Important tags associated with this route entry H route is a host route G route is a gateway route S Static route, or learned via IPCP, IARP, DHCP R1 learned from RIP Version 1 R2 learned from RIP Version 2 I route learned from an ICMP redirect C directly connected interface P route is private and is not advertised with RIP T route is to a triggered port (updates only when table changes) U learned by unknown method ROUTER > STATUS > IP ROUTES > HOPS Number of routers that must go through to get to destination. Ranges from 0-15 or 16 for infinite (can’t get there from here). ROUTER > STATUS > IP ROUTES > TTL Seconds until address is removed from table. Value of 999 means route is static. ROUTER > STATUS > IP STATS This section describes the following STATISTICS submenus (and see the tables on the pages following): • IP • ICMP • TCP • UDP All of these statistics are taken from the MIB-II variables in RFC 1156. To clear the accumulated statistics, press the Enter key on CLEAR COUNTS. ROUTER > STATUS > IP STATS > IP View the IP statistics from this menu. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 117 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual DEFAULT TTL The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live field of the IP header of datagrams originated at this unit, whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol. IP DATAGRAMS RECEIVED The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including those received in error. BAD HEADER PACKETS The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers, including bad check sums, version number mismatch, other format errors, time-to-live exceeded, errors discovered in processing their IP options, etc. BAD IP ADDRESSES The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this unit. This count includes invalid addresses (e.g., 0.0.0.0) and addresses of unsupported Classes (e.g., Class E). For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams, this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address. TOTAL FORWARDED DATAGRAMS The number of input datagrams for which this unit was not their final IP destination, as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination. In entities which do not act as IP Gateways, this counter will include only those packets which were Source-Routed via this unit, and the Source-Route option processing was successful. BAD PROTOCOL DISCARDS The number of locally-addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. DATAGRAMS DISCARDED The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing, but which were discarded (e.g., for lack of buffer space). Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly. SENT DATAGRAMS TO UPPER LAYERS The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user-protocols (including ICMP). IP DATAGRAMS SENT IP packets from the unit's IP stack. 118 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG ERRORFREE DISCARDS The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination, but which were discarded (e.g., for lack of buffer space). Note that this counter would include datagrams counted in TOTAL FORWARDED DATAGRAMS if any such packets met this (discretionary) discard criterion. ROUTELESS DISCARDS The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination. Note that this counter includes any packets counted in TOTAL FORWARDED DATAGRAMS which meet this “no-route” criterion. Note also that this includes any datagrams which a host cannot route because all of its default gateways are down. IP REASSEMBLY TIMEOUT The maximum number of seconds which received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at this unit. DISASSEMBLED FRAGMENTS The number of IP fragments received which needed to be reassembled at this unit. IP DATAGRAMS REASSEMBLED The number of IP datagrams successfully reassembled. IP REASSEMBLY FAILURES The number of failures detected by the IP reassembly algorithm (for whatever reason: timed out, errors, etc.). Note that this is not necessarily a count of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms (notably RFC 815s) can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received. SUCCESSFUL FRAGMENTS The number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this unit. FAILED FRAGMENTS The number of IP datagrams that have been discarded because they needed to be fragmented at this unit but could not be, e.g., because their “Don't Fragment” flag was set. TOTAL IP FRAGMENTS The number of IP datagram fragments that have been generated as a result of fragmentation at this unit. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 119 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual DISCARDED ROUTING ENTRIES A packet the unit couldn't route. CLEAR COUNTS Setting this activator will clear the IP Statistics. ROUTER > STATUS > IP STATS > ICMP ICMP MESSAGES RECEIVED The total number of ICMP messages which the unit received. Note that this counter includes all those counted by ICMP SPECIFIC ERRORS. ICMP SPECIFIC ERRORS The number of ICMP messages which the unit received but determined as having errors (bad ICMP checksums, bad length, etc.) ICMP DEST. UNREACHABLE MSGS RCVD The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received. ICMP TIMEOUTS RECEIVED The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received. ICMP PARAMETER PROBLEM MSGS RCVD The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received. ICMP SOURCE QUENCH MSGS RCVD The number of ICMP Source Quench messages received. ICMP REDIRECTED MESSAGES RCVD The number of ICMP Redirect messages received. ICMP ECHO REQUEST MSGS RCVD The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received. ICMP ECHO REPLY MSGS RCVD The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received. 120 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG ICMP TIMESTAMP REQUEST MSGS RCVD The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages received. ICMP TIMESTAMP REPLY MSGS RCVD The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received. ICMP ADDRESS MASK REQUEST MSGS RCVD The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received. ICMP ADDRESS MASK REPLY MSGS RCVD The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received. ICMP MESSAGES SENT The total number of ICMP messages which this unit attempted to send. Note that this counter includes all those counted by ICMP PACKET ERRORS. ICMP PACKET ERRORS The number of ICMP messages which this unit did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffers. This value should not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route the resultant datagram. In some implementations there may be no types of error which contribute to this counter's value. ICMP DEST. UNREACHABLE MSGS SENT The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent. ICMP TIME EXCEEDED MSGS SENT The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent. ICMP PARAMETER PROBLEM MSGS SENT The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent. ICMP SOURCE QUENCH MSGS SENT The number of ICMP Source Quench messages sent. ICMP REDIRECT MSGS SENT The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 121 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual ICMP ECHO REQUEST MSGS SENT The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent. ICMP ECHO REPLY MSGS SENT The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent. ICMP TIMESTAMP REQUEST MSGS SENT The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages sent. ICMP TIMESTAMP REPLY MSGS SENT The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent. ICMP ADDR MASK REQUEST MSGS SENT The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent. ICMP ADDR MASK REPLY MSGS SENT The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent. CLEAR COUNTS Selecting this activator will clear the ICMP statistics. ROUTER > STATUS > IP STATS > UDP View the UDP statistics from this menu UDP DATAGRAMS RECEIVED The total number of UDP datagrams delivered to UDP users. NO APPLICATION AT DEST. PORT The total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no application at the destination port. UDP BAD PACKETS The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for reasons other than the lack of an application at the destination port. 122 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG UDP DATAGRAMS SENT The total number of UDP datagrams sent from this unit. CLEAR COUNTS Selecting this activator will clear the UDP statistics. ROUTER > STATUS > IP STATS > UDP TABLE View the UDP table statistics from this menu. LOCAL IP ADDRESS The destination IP address of the packet PORT The destination UDP port of the packet. ROUTER > STATUS > IP STATS > TCP View the TCP statistics from this menu. RETRANSMISSION TIMEOUT ALGORITHM The algorithm used to determine the timeout value used for retransmitting unacknowledged octets. MIN RETRANSMISSION TIMEOUT (MS) The minimum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout, measured in milliseconds. More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout. In particular, when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3), an object of this type has the semantics of the LBOUND quantity described in RFC 793. MAX RETRANSMISSION TIMEOUT (MS) The maximum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout, measured in milliseconds. More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout. In particular, when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3), an object of this type has the semantics of the UBOUND quantity described in RFC 793. MAX TCP CONNECTIONS The limit on the total number of TCP connections the unit can support. In entities where the maximum number of connections is dynamic, this object should contain the value -1. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 123 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual ACTIVE TCP CONNECTIONS The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-SENT state from the CLOSED state. TCP PASSIVE CONNECTIONS The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-RCVD state from the LISTEN state. TCP FAILED ATTEMPTS The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the SYN-SENT state or the SYN-RCVD state, plus the number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the LISTEN state from the SYN-RCVD state. TOTAL TCP RESETS The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the ESTABLISHED state or the CLOSE-WAIT state. TCP CURRENT CONNECTIONS The number of TCP connections for which the current state is either ESTABLISHED or CLOSE-WAIT. TCP SEGMENTS RECEIVED The total number of segments received, including those received in error. This count includes segments received on currently established connections. TCP SEGMENTS SENT The total number of segments sent, including those on current connections but excluding those containing only retransmitted octets. TOTAL TCP RETRANSMITS The total number of segments retransmitted - that is, the number of TCP segments transmitted containing one or more previously transmitted octets. CLEAR COUNTS Selecting this activator will clear the TCP statistics. 124 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG ROUTER > STATUS > IP STATS > TCP CONNS View the TCP Conns Statistics from this menu. This table shows the different states of each TCP connection. STATE The possible states are FREE, CLOSED, LISTEN, SYNC SENT, SYNC RECEIVED, ESTABLISHED, FINWAIT1, FINWAIT2, CLOSEWAIT, LASTACK, CLOSING, and TIMEWAIT. LOCAL IP ADDRESS Local IP address of the TCP connection. LOCAL PORT Local port of the TCP connection. REMOTE IP ADDRESS Remote IP address of the TCP connection. REMOTE PORT Remote port of the TPC connection. ROUTER > STATUS > IP STATS > ARP CACHE This lists the contents of the units’s ARP table. All resolved cache entries time out after 20 minutes. Unresolved entries time out in 3 minutes. The ARP cache can be cleared by pressing “f” while on the menu or by pressing “d” on the individual number for that entry. IP ADDRESS IP address used for resolving MAC address. MAC ADDRESS Ethernet address resolved (0=no resolution). TIME Minutes since entry was first entered. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 125 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual SECURITY Configure the SECURITY FILTERS and RADIUS SERVER parameters from this menu as shown in Figure 9. Figure 9. Security Menu SECURITY > FILTERS Configure the filter characteristics from this menu. SECURITY > FILTERS > FILTER DEFINES The unit can filter packets based on certain parameters within the packet. The method used by the unit allows the highest flexibility for defining filters and assigning them to a PVC or PPP link. The filters are set up in two steps: (1) defining the filter types, and (2) applying them to a list under the PVC or PPP configuration. This menu is used to define the individual filter defines based on packet type. The Filter Defines option works for Frame Relay and PPP. SECURITY > FILTERS > FILTER DEFINES > MAC FILTER DEFINES The MAC filter is applied to bridge packets only. Bridge packets which are forwarded by the bridge functionality of the unit are defined here. Up to 32 MAC defines can be specified. 126 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG NUM Indicates the entry number in the MAC Filter Defines table. NAME Identifies the filter entry. Default is no entry in name field. SRC ADDR 48-bit MAC source address used for comparison. Values are in hexadecimal format. Default is 00:00:00:00:00:00. SRC MASK Bits in the MAC source address which are compared. Values are in hexadecimal format. Default is 00:00:00:00:00:00. DEST ADDR 48-bit MAC destination address used for comparison. Values are in hexadecimal format. Default is 00:00:00:00:00:00. DEST MASK Bits in the MAC destination address used for comparison. Values are in hexadecimal format. Default is 00:00:00:00:00:00. TYPE 16-bit type field used for comparison. Values are in hexadecimal format. Default is 00:00. TYPE MASK Bits in the type field used for comparison. Values are in hexadecimal format. Default is 00:00. SECURITY > FILTERS > FILTER DEFINES > PATTERN FILTER DEFINES The pattern filter is applied to bridge packets only. That is any packet which is forwarded by the bridge functionality of the unit. Up to 32 pattern defines can be specified. NUM Indicates the entry number in the Pattern Filter Defines table. NAME Identifies the filter entry. Default is no entry in name field. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 127 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual OFFSET Offset from beginning of packet of where to start the pattern comparison. Default is 0. PATTERN 64 bits used for comparison. Values are in hexadecimal format. Default is 00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00. MASK Bits in the pattern to be compared. Values are in hexadecimal format. Default is 00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00. SECURITY > FILTERS > FILTER DEFINES > IP FILTER DEFINES The IP filter defines apply to any IP packet, whether it is routed or bridged. Up to 32 IP defines can be specified. NUM Indicates the entry number in the IP Filter Defines table. NAME Identifies the filter entry. Default is no entry in name field. SRC ADDR IP address compared to the source address. Value is in dotted decimal format. Default is 0.0.0.0. SRC MASK Bits which are used in the source comparison. Value is in dotted decimal format. Default is 0.0.0.0. DEST ADDR IP address compared to the destination address. Value is in dotted decimal format. Default is 0.0.0.0. DEST MASK Bits which are used in the destination comparison. Value is in dotted decimal format. Default is 0.0.0.0. SRC PORT IP source port number used for comparison. Value is in decimal format. Range: 0 TO 65535. Default is 0. 128 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG SRC PORT COMP Type of comparison that is performed. Default is NONE. = means ports equal to not = means port not equal to > means port greater than < means port less than None - means the source port is not compared DEST PORT IP destination port number used for comparison. Value is in decimal format. Range: 0 TO 65535. Default is 0. DEST PORT COMP Type of comparison that is performed. Default is NONE. = means ports equal to not = means port not equal to > means port greater than < means port less than None - means the source port is not compared PROTO PORT Protocol used for comparison. Value is in decimal format. Range: 0 TO 255. Default is 0. PROTO PORT COMP Type of comparison that is performed. Default is NONE. = means ports equal to not = means port not equal to > means port greater than < means port less than None - means the source port is not compared 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 129 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual TCP ESTAB Yes - only when TCP established No - only when TCP not established Ignore - ignore TCP flags (default) SECURITY > FILTERS > INTERFACES The unit can block packets in and out of an interface by use of the filters. They are set up in two steps: 1) define the types of packets that would be of interest in the SECURITY > FILTERS > FILTER DEFINES menu, and 2) set up the filter type and combination of defines that will cause a packet block. SECURITY > FILTERS > INTERFACES (T1[0]) Define the filters for the T1 interfaces from this menu. The T1 interface will only appear in the SECURITY > FILTERS > INTERFACE list if the L2 PROTOCOL is set to FRAME RELAY or PPP. SECURITY > FILTERS > INTERFACES (T1[0]) > SUB-INTERFACE If the L2 PROTOCOL is FRAME RELAY, the SUB-INTERFACE will be FRE [0.X], where the [0.X] represents the T1 physical and logical ports respectively. The T1 physical port is always zero. The X represents the Frame Relay logical port and will always be a number 0-9 corresponding to the interface number under L2 PROTOCOL > CONFIG > DLCI MAPPING. This is a read-only field. If the L2 PROTOCOL is PPP, the SUB-INTERFACE is PPP [0.0]. The [0.0] represents the T1 physical and logical ports respectively. This is a read-only field. SECURITY > FILTERS > INTERFACES (T1[0]) > SET-UP Enable the T1 interface filtering and define filters from this menu. IN FROM VC The packets which come into the unit can be filtered in three ways: 130 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG DISABLE (DEF) Turns off packet input filtering. No incoming packets are blocked. BLOCK ALL All incoming packets from the WAN are blocked except as defined in the SECURITY > FILTERS > INTERFACES > SETUP > IN EXCEPTIONS list. FORWARD ALL All incoming packets from the WAN are not blocked except as defined in the SECURITY > FILTERS > INTERFACES > SETUP > IN EXCEPTIONS list. IN EXCEPTIONS This is a list of up to 32 filter entries which can be combined using the operations field. The operations are performed in the order they appear on the list. # Indicates the entry number in the In Exceptions table. ACTIVE Turns this entry active when set to YES. Default is NO. TYPE Selects the filter define list to reference (default is MAC): MAC from the SECURITY/FILTERS/FILTER DEFINES/MAC FILTER DEFINES list. PATTERN from the SECURITY/FILTERS/FILTER DEFINES/PATTERN FILTER DEFINES list. IP from the SECURITY/FILTERS/FILTER DEFINES/IP FILTER DEFINES list. FILTER LIST NAME Selects between filters defined in the list. Default is no entry in filter list name. NEXT OPER The next operation to use to combine with the next filter in the list (default is END): 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 131 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual END the last filter to combination. AND logically AND this filter with the next filter in the list. OR logically OR this filter with the next filter in the list. OUT TO VC The packets which come from the unit to the WAN can be filtered in three ways: DISABLE (DEF) Turns off packet output filtering. No outgoing packets are blocked. BLOCK ALL All outgoing packets to the WAN are blocked except as defined in the SECURITY > FILTERS > INTERFACES > SETUP > OUT EXCEPTIONS list. FORWARD ALL All outgoing packets to the WAN are not blocked except as defined in the SECURITY > FILTERS > INTERFACES > SETUP > OUT EXCEPTIONS list. OUT EXCEPTIONS This is a list of up to 32 filter entries which can be combined using the operations field. The operations are performed in the order they appear on the list. # Indicates the entry number in the In Exceptions table. ACTIVE Turns this entry active when set to YES. Default is NO. TYPE Selects the filter define list to reference (default is MAC): 132 MAC from the SECURITY > FILTERS > FILTER DEFINES > MAC FILTER DEFINES list. PATTERN from the SECURITY > FILTERS > FILTER DEFINES > PATTERN FILTER DEFINES list. IP from the SECURITY > FILTERS > FILTER DEFINES > IP FILTER DEFINES list. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG FILTER LIST NAME Selects between filters defined in the list. Default is no entry in filter list name. NEXT OPER The next operation to use to combine with the next filter in the list (default is END): END The last filter to combination. AND logically AND this filter with the next filter in the list. OR logically OR this filter with the next filter in the list. SECURITY > FILTERS > INTERFACES (ETH[1]) Define the filters for the Ethernet interface from this menu. SECURITY > FILTERS > INTERFACES (ETH[1]) > SUB-INTERFACE The Ethernet sub-interface is 802.3[1.0]. This is a read-only field. SECURITY > FILTERS > INTERFACES (ETH[1]) > SET-UP Enable the Ethernet interface filtering and define filters from this menu. IN FROM VC The packets which come into the unit can be filtered in three ways: DISABLE (DEF) Turns off packet input filtering. No incoming packets are blocked. BLOCK ALL All incoming packets from the WAN are blocked except as defined in the SECURITY > FILTERS > INTERFACES > SETUP > IN EXCEPTIONS list. FORWARD ALL All incoming packets from the WAN are not blocked except as defined in the SECURITY > FILTERS > INTERFACES > SETUP > IN EXCEPTIONS list. IN EXCEPTIONS This is a list of up to 32 filter entries which can be combined using the operations field. The operations are performed in the order they appear on the list. # Indicates the entry number in the In Exceptions table. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 133 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual ACTIVE Turns this entry active when set to YES. Default is NO. TYPE Selects the filter define list to reference (default is MAC): MAC from the SECURITY > FILTERS > FILTER DEFINES > MAC FILTER DEFINES list. PATTERN from the SECURITY > FILTERS > FILTER DEFINES > PATTERN FILTER DEFINES list. IP from the SECURITY > FILTERS > FILTER DEFINES > IP FILTER DEFINES list. FILTER LIST NAME Selects between filters defined in the list. Default is no entry in filter list name. NEXT OPER The next operation to use to combine with the next filter in the list (default is END): END the last filter to combination. AND logically AND this filter with the next filter in the list. OR logically OR this filter with the next filter in the list. OUT TO VC The packets which come from the unit to the WAN can be filtered in three ways: 134 DISABLE (DEF) Turns off packet output filtering. No outgoing packets are blocked. BLOCK ALL All outgoing packets to the WAN are blocked except as defined in the SECURITY > FILTERS > INTERFACES > SETUP > OUT EXCEPTIONS list. FORWARD ALL All outgoing packets to the WAN are not blocked except as defined in the SECURITY > FILTERS > INTERFACES > SETUP > OUT EXCEPTIONS list. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG OUT EXCEPTIONS This is a list of up to 32 filter entries which can be combined using the operations field. The operations are performed in the order they appear on the list. # Indicates the entry number in the In Exceptions table. ACTIVE Turns this entry active when set to YES. Default is NO. TYPE Selects the filter define list to reference (default is MAC): MAC from the SECURITY > FILTERS > FILTER DEFINES > MAC FILTER DEFINES list. PATTERN from the SECURITY > FILTERS > FILTER DEFINES > PATTERN FILTER DEFINES list. IP from the SECURITY > FILTERS > FILTER DEFINES > IP FILTER DEFINES list. FILTER LIST NAME Selects between filters defined in the list. Default is no entry in filter list name. NEXT OPER The next operation to use to combine with the next filter in the list (default is END): END the last filter to combination. AND logically AND this filter with the next filter in the list. OR logically OR this filter with the next filter in the list. SECURITY > RADIUS SERVER The parameters for the RADIUS SERVER are configured in this menu. Telnet radius is only available in A.04 firmware or later. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 135 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual SECURITY > RADIUS SERVER > SERVER 1 This is the IP address of the first RADIUS SERVER that the unit should attempt to communicate with when authenticating a telnet session. Default is 0.0.0.0. SECURITY > RADIUS SERVER > SERVER 2 This is the IP address of the second RADIUS SERVER that the unit should attempt to communicate with when the primary server does not respond. Default is 0.0.0.0. SECURITY > RADIUS SERVER > SERVER 3 This is the IP address of the third RADIUS SERVER that the unit should attempt to communicate with when authenticating a telnet session. Default is 0.0.0.0. SECURITY > RADIUS SERVER > UDP PORT This is the UDP port that the unit should use when communicating with the RADIUS SERVER. The default is 1812, which is the commonly used port. SECURITY > RADIUS SERVER > SECRET The RADIUS SERVER and unit share this text string. It is used by the RADIUS SERVER to authenticate the unit, the RADIUS client. The factory default is not to use a secret. SECURITY > RADIUS SERVER > RETRY COUNT (1-10) This is the number of times the unit should send a request packet to the RADIUS SERVER without a response before giving up. If the number of attempts to communicate with the primary server is equal to the retry count, the second server (if defined) is tried. If the second server does not respond within the retry count the third server (if defined) is tried. If the third server does not respond within the retry count, the Telnet session is not authenticated and is dropped. The default is 5. 136 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG DS0 MAPS The DS0 MAPS menu allows you to map data and voice ports to the network T1 time slots. You may edit either of the two maps at any time. If you make changes to the current map, only those DS0s that have changed will be updated (unchanged DS0s will not be affected). The DS0 menu is shown in Figure 10. Figure 10. DS0 Maps Menu. DS0 MAPS > ACTIVE MAP Activates one of the two dedicated maps (MAP 1 or MAP 2). Default is MAP 1. DS0 MAPS > APPLY TEMPLATE TO MAP 1 Choices are CURRENT MAP 1, CURRENT MAP 2, D4 MAP, D1D MAP, and CLEAR MAP. Default is CURRENT MAP 1. D4 MAP automaps the voice port in a 1-to-1 configuration. D1D MAP maps voice ports in an SLC-96 configuration. CLEAR MAP clears the entire map. DS0 MAPS > EDIT/VIEW MAP 1 Define map 1. The map allows the user to assign services and ports to individual DS0s 1-24. In the default configuration for TDM A.04.XX firmware, DS0 24 is mapped to the router at 64K on MAP 1. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 137 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual DS0 MAPS > EDIT/VIEW MAP 1 > DS0 Displays the network T1 time slot to be assigned. DS0 MAPS > EDIT/VIEW MAP 1 > SERVICE When you select this option, a list of all of the slots and the modules will display. The first option is OPEN, which unassigns the slot if selected. For modules, the slot number and name are shown. For example, FXS indicates that an FXS card is installed. Use TA IAD to map network timeslots to the V.35 port or to the router. Pick the appropriate SERVICE and press <Enter>. Default is OPEN. DS0 MAPS > EDIT/VIEW MAP 1 > PORT When you select this option, a list of ports appears. Pick the appropriate port, and press <Enter>. The selection list shows only the remaining ports available to be assigned. It may be necessary to unassign a port in order to reassign it elsewhere. Once a SERVICE is assigned, the choices are module-dependent. For the FXS, the port choices are UNASSIGNED, and PORTS 1-24. For the TA IAD, the port choices are UNASSIGNED, ROUTER 64K, ROUTER 56K, V.35 64K, and V.35 56K. Default is N/A. DS0 MAPS > EDIT/VIEW MAP 1 > RBS Robbed Bit Signaling. Default is N/A. Once a service and port are assigned, this will automatically change to ON or OFF. The unit will automatically assign OFF where RBS is not an option. ON preserves the signaling bits between the connections. OFF ignores the signaling bits. For the FXS, RBS defaults to ON. The RBS parameter remains at N/A for the TA IAD, because RBS is not applicable to data connections. DS0 MAPS > APPLY TEMPLATE TO MAP 2 Choices are CURRENT MAP 1, CURRENT MAP 2, D4 MAP, D1D MAP, and CLEAR MAP. Default is CURRENT MAP 2. D4 MAP automaps the voice port in a 1-to-1 configuration. D1D MAP maps voice ports in an SLC-96 configuration. CLEAR MAP clears the entire map. DS0 MAPS > EDIT/VIEW MAP 2 Define map 2. The map allows the user to assign services and ports to individual DS0s 1-24. DS0 MAPS > EDIT/VIEW MAP 2 > DS0 Displays the network T1 time slot to be assigned. DS0 MAPS > EDIT/VIEW MAP 2 > SERVICE When you select this option, a list of all of the slots and the modules will display. The first option is OPEN, which unassigns the slot if selected. For modules, the slot number and name are shown. For example, FXS indicates that an FXS card is installed. Use TA IAD to map network timeslots to the V.35 port or to the router. Pick the appropriate SERVICE and press <Enter>. Default is OPEN. 138 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG DS0 MAPS > EDIT/VIEW MAP 2 > PORT When you select this option, a list of ports appears. Pick the appropriate port and press <Enter>. The selection list shows only the remaining ports available to be assigned. It may be necessary to unassign a port in order to reassign it elsewhere. Once a SERVICE is assigned, the choices are module-dependent. For the FXS, the port choices are UNASSIGNED, and PORTS 1-24. For the TA IAD, the port choices are UNASSIGNED, ROUTER 64K, ROUTER 56K, V.35 64K, and V.35 56K. Default is N/A. DS0 MAPS > EDIT/VIEW MAP 2 > RBS Robbed Bit Signaling. Default is N/A. Once a service and port are assigned, this will automatically change to ON or OFF. The unit will automatically assign OFF where RBS is not an option. ON preserves the signaling bits between the connections. OFF ignores the signaling bits. For the FXS, RBS defaults to ON. The RBS parameter remains at N/A for the TA IAD because RBS is not applicable to data communications. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 139 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Appendix A. Configuring the Unit for Routing Initial Setup Before the unit can be configured for routing, the DS0s must be mapped. DS0 Mapping DS0 Mapping Instructions Step 1. Action From the Main menu, select DS0 MAPS. Verify that the ACTIVE MAP is set to either MAP 1 or MAP 2. This is the map that is actively running on the unit. The unit has the ability to store two maps. 2. • To edit the current map, press ENTER on EDIT/VIEW MAP 1 to view the map. (If Map 1 is the Active Map) • To edit the standby map, press ENTER on EDIT/VIEW MAP 2 to view the map. (If Map 2 is the Active Map) The T1 line entering the unit is broken up into 24 DS0s or channels. At least one DS0 needs to be mapped to the router in order to use the unit for routing purposes. 3. Scroll down to the DS0 that will be mapped. (Any DS0 can be mapped to the router.) 4. Set the SERVICE for the DS0 that you are mapping to TA IAD. 5. Set the PORT of the DS0 that you are mapping to ROUTER 64K or ROUTER 56K. 6. Map all the DS0s as desired, and exit this menu by pressing the left arrow button. Your changes will automatically save when exiting the map. 7. Make sure the ACTIVE MAP is set to the correct map (the map you want running) before exiting the DS0 MAPS menu. Setting up Routing Options The unit can support IP routing and bridging. These procedures are described on the pages that follow. 140 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG IP Routing After completing the DS0 mapping, there are three remaining steps required for the unit to be used for IP Routing: (1) Ethernet Interface Configuration, (2) T1 Interface Configuration, and (3) Default Gateway Configuration. All of these procedures are described in the pages that follow. Router Ethernet Interface Setup Router Ethernet Interface Setup Instructions Step Action 1 From the Main Menu, select ROUTER, select CONFIG, select INTERFACES and then select ETH [1] SETUP and press ENTER. 2 Press Enter on the PRIMARY IP [+] option to enter primary ethernet configuration. 3 Set the IP ADDRESS of the Ethernet port. 4 Set the SUBNET MASK of the Ethernet port. 5 RIP on the Ethernet is disabled by default. If RIP needs to be enabled, press Enter on RIP [+]. 6 Press ENTER on VERSION and select V1 or V2 to activate RIP. 7 Press the down arrow and select the appropriate RIP METHOD, DIRECTION, and V2 SECRET (where applicable). 8 Press the left arrow key to return to the Ethernet menu showing PRIMARY IP and SECONDARY IPS. 9 If the unit needs additional secondary IP addresses, press Enter on SECONDARY IPS [+].The unit supports up to 5 additional LAN segments. Enter each additional secondary IP address and subnet mask. Press "I" to insert additional entries. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 141 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Router T1 Interface Setup Before configuring the Router T1 Interface, choose L2 PROTOCOL and select PPP, FRE, or AUTO. Setup instructions for the PPP and FRE are described on the following pages. For information on setting the L2 PROTOCOL to AUTO, reference DLP-014, Unit Installation Using the Auto-Config Feature. Router T1 Interface Setup Instructions when L2 Protocol = PPP Step Action 1 From the Main Menu, select L2 PROTOCOL and press ENTER. 2 Set the T1 [0] interface protocol to PPP. 3 Press Enter on the CONFIG [+] option. Verify mode is Route IP. 4 Press Enter on the AUTHENTICATION [+] option if you wish to change options related to how the link is established. Default is TX METHOD = NONE and RX METHOD = NONE. If TX METHOD and RX METHOD are set to any option other than NONE, TX/RX USERNAME and PASSWORD options will appear. 5 Left arrow back to the main menu. Select router, select CONFIG, select INTERFACES, and select T1 [0] SETUP. Enter WAN information: 6 • Far-End IP Address The far-end WAN IP address from the unit. • IP Netmask The subnet mask for this WAN link • Local IP Address The local WAN IP address for the unit. The other config items can be left at the defaults. 7 142 For NAT configuration, please see the IP Routing with NAT section of this appendix. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Router T1 Interface Setup Instruction when L2 Protocol = Frame Relay (FRE) (required if the unit is to be used for Frame Relay IP Routing on the WAN interface) Step Action 1 From the Main Menu, select L2 PROTOCOL and press ENTER. 2 Set the T1 [0] interface protocol to FRE. 3 Press Enter on the CONFIG [+] option. 4 Set the MAINTENANCE PROTOCOL to ANNEX D (ANSI), ANNEX A (q 933a), LMI, OR STATIC (no sig). The MAINTENANCE PROTOCOL should be set based on the Frame Relay switch. 5 Down arrow and press Enter on DLCI MAPPING [+]. Right arrow one time to create an entry. 6 Set ACTIVE to YES. 7 Set DLCI to the DLCI number. 8 Set mode to ROUTE IP. 9 Left arrow back to the main menu. Select ROUTER, select CONFIG, select INTERFACES, and select T1 [0] SETUP. Set ACTIVE to YES. 10 Set ADDRESS MODE to USER SPECIFIED and enter a FAR-END IP ADDRESS. This will force the unit to not use IARP. 11 Enter the IP Netmask. 12 Enter the local IP address for the unit. The other config items can be left at the default values. 13 For NAT configuration, please see the IP Routing with NAT section of this appendix. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 143 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Router T1 Interface Setup Instructions - IP Routing with NAT Step 1 Action The NAT menu is found under Router >Config >Interfaces (T1 [0]) > Setup. The NAT menu can be easily accessed by pressing <Ctrl><N>. The T1 interface will not appear if a DLCI is not entered in the DLCI mapping table (L2 Protocol T1[0]-FRE > Config > DLCI mapping) when the L2 protocol is set to Frame Relay (FRE). 2 From the NAT menu, set PORT TRANSLATION to ENABLED. (This will enable translation and populate the corresponding NAT menu options.) Set PUBLIC IP ADDRESS MODE to either INTERFACE or SPECIFIED. 3 • INTERFACE is the default and will use the WAN IP address for the NAPT address. • SPECIFIED allows you to enter another public address for private addresses to be translated into. For basic NAT, this is all of the configuration that needs to be done. For specific port translations or 1:1 mapping, you can enter TRANSLATION TABLE [+]. 4 From the TRANSLATION TABLE menu, create a new entry by using the right arrow to enter the table. Create specific NAT translations based on your application. 5 144 PUBLIC ADDRESS MODE NAPT ADDR (Address) or SPECIFIED. Choice of using the NAPT address or specifying a different public address to be used for this translation. PUBLIC ADDRESS MODE NAPT ADDR (Address) or SPECIFIED. Choice of using the NAPT address or specifying a different public address to be used for this translation. PROTOCOL Protocol for this translation. PUBLIC PORT MODE SPECIFIED or ANY PORT. Choosing SPECIFIED brings up the PUBLIC PORT and PUBLIC PORT TYPE (read-only) settings. PUBLIC PORT Numeric Public Port number to be translated (i.e., 23, 80). PUBLIC PORT TYPE Read-only port type chosen by the user setting of the PUBLIC PORT option. PRIVATE ADDRESS MODE SPECIFIED or ANY INTERNAL. Choosing SPECIFIED brings up the PRIVATE ADDRESS option. PRIVATE PORT MODE SPECIFIED or ANY PORT. Choosing SPECIFIED brings up the PRIVATE PORT option. PRIVATE PORT Numeric Private Port number to be translated to (i.e. 23, 80). TRANSLATE BODY YES or NO. If set to YES, this will translate the body of the data packet and replace the private address with the NAPT address. Default is NO, which is used for most applications. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Default Gateway Setup In A.04 TDM code, the default gateway is for the entire unit, not just for the Ethernet Port. Default Gateway Setup Instructions 61200624L1-1A 1 From the Main Menu, select ROUTER, select CONFIG, and select ROUTES. 2 Press Enter on the DEFAULT GATEWAY and set the corresponding IP address for the DEFAULT GATEWAY. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 145 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Appendix B. Configuring the Unit for Bridging Initial Setup Before the unit can be configured for bridging, DS0s must be mapped. Reference the DS0 Mapping section in Section 4.2 Appendix A. Setting up Bridging Options If the unit will be used for bridging, continue with the steps below. Bridging Bridging is supported by the PPP and Frame Relay protocols. The following procedures described the bridging configuration for those two protocols. PPP Bridging Setup Instructions 1 From the Main Menu, select L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0])>PROTOCOL and select PPP. 2 Select CONFIG and press enter. Then select MODE and select BRIDGE ALL. 3 Use the left arrow to return to the Main Menu and select BRIDGE. 4 The user may confirm that Bridging is activated by selecting CONFIG and pressing enter. If the T1[0] interface appears in the list, the Bridging is active on the WAN link. 5 The time (in minutes) it takes an entry to age out of the Bridge table may be set by down arrowing to BRIDGE TABLE and then using the right arrow to select BRIDGE TABLE AGING. Frame Relay Bridging Setup Instructions 1 From the Main Menu, select L2 PROTOCOL (T1[0])>PROTOCOL and select FRE. 2 Select CONFIG and press enter. 3 Set the MAINTENANCE PROTOCOL TO ANNEX D (ANSI), ANNEX A (q933a), LMI, or STATIC (NO SIG). The MAINTENANCE PROTOCOL should be set based on the Frame Relay switch. 146 4 Select DLCI MAPPING and press enter. Then select MODE and select BRIDGE ALL for all DLCIs which will use bridging. 5 Use the left arrow to return to the Main Menu and select BRIDGE. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Frame Relay Bridging Setup Instructions (Continued) 6 The user may confirm that Bridging is activated by selecting CONFIG and pressing enter. If the T1[0] interface appears in the list, the Bridging is active on the WAN link. 7 The time (in minutes) it takes an entry to age out of the Bridge table may be set by down arrowing to BRIDGE TABLE and then using the right arrow to select BRIDGE TABLE AGING. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 147 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Appendix C. Configuring the Unit for Voice Applications To set the unit up for voice applications, follow the steps below. Mapping the DS0s DS0 Mapping Instructions Step 1 Action From the MAIN menu, select DS0 MAPS. Verify that the ACTIVE MAP is set to either MAP 1 or MAP 2. This is the map that is actively running on the unit. The unit has the ability to store two maps. 2 • To edit the current map, press Enter on EDIT/VIEW MAP 1 [+] to view the map. (If Map 1 is the Active Map) • To edit the standby map, press Enter on EDIT/VIEW MAP 2 [+] to view the map. (If Map 2 is the Active Map) The T1 line entering the unit is broken up into 24 DS0s or channels. You must map each voice port you want to use. 3 Scroll down to the DS0 that will be mapped. 4 Set the SERVICE for the DS0 that you are mapping to FXS. 5 Set the PORT of the DS0 that you are mapping. The port number entered must match the voice port the DS0 is being mapped to. RBS (robbed bit signaling) will automatically turn on when a port number has been selected. 6 Map all the DS0s as desired, and exit this menu by pressing the left arrow key. Your changes will save automatically upon exiting the map. 7 Make sure the ACTIVE MAP is set to the map definition you want implemented before exiting the DS0 MAPS menu. Setting up the T1 Interface T1 Interface Setup Instructions Step Action 1 From the Main Menu, select INTERFACES. 2 Select T1[0] CONFIG [+] and press ENTER. 3 Right arrow to select FORMAT and choose ESF, SF, or SLC96. This format must match the format used by the other units in the network. 4 148 Set the LINE CODE to B8ZS or AMI. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG T1 Interface Setup Instructions (Continued) This line code must match the line code used by the other units in the network. 5 Set the EQUALIZATION or line build out in the lines based on the size of the network. 6 Set the CSU LPBK option to ENABLE, DISABLE or DISABLE ALL based on whether looping to this unit from another unit will be allowed. Setting up the FXS Voice Ports FXS Voice Ports Setup Instructions Step Action 1 From the Main Menu, select INTERFACES. 2 Select FXS CONFIG [+] and press ENTER. 3 Set the MODE of each port to LOOP START, GROUND START, TANDEM (E&M), TR08 SINGLE, TR08 UVG, or DP0. This mode needs to be set based on how the network is set up and how each port is being used. Each port does not need to be set to the same mode. If the mode is set to TANDEM (E&M), be sure to set the TANDEM options as described in Steps 9 and following. 4 Set the TX (dB) or transmit direction level points of each port. Default is recommended. 5 Set the RX (dB) or receive direction level points of each port. Default is recommended. 6 Set the SVC MODE of each port to either IN SERVICE or OUT OF SVC. 7 Set the LINE Z, or line impedance, of each port based on the size of the network. Default is recommended. 8 Set the MSG IND to disable or enable. When set to enable, talk path is always open, even in on-hook conditions, in order for FXS message tones to pass through. Disabling this feature will allow higher on-hook voltage but will not allow on-hook messaging other than caller ID. 9 Press Enter on the TANDEM [+] option to view the TANDEM options if the port mode is set to TANDEM (E&M). 10 Set the CONVERSION MODE of the port to either LOOP START or GROUND START. 11 Set the SUPERVISION of the port to either IMMEDIATE or WINK. Be sure to set the TANDEM options for each port set to TANDEM E&M. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 149 Section 4.2 T1 TDM UIG 150 Total Access 600 Series System Manual © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A SECTION 4.3 T1 ATM USER INTERFACE GUIDE The T1 ATM User Interface Guide is designed for use by network administrators and others who will configure and provision the system. This section provides details unique to the T1 ATM IADs. It contains an overview, application details, configuration information, and menu descriptions. It is recommended that you review Section 1, Commons User Interface Guide in addition to this section. CONTENTS Total Access 600 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Analog Lifeline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Firmware Updates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Voice Over ATM Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Voice Over ATM Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Configuring the Total Access 600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 System Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 System Config. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 System Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Configuring WAN Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Configuring the Router – Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Configuring the Router – Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Configuring the Router – Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Configuring Voice Support – Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Configuring Voice Support – Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Managing the Modules – Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Managing the Modules – V.35 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Appendix A. Voice Gateway Quick Start Procedure (Voice Turn up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Appendix B. RFC1483 Quick Start (IP Routing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Appendix C. RFC1483 Quick Start (IP Routing with NAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Appendix D. RFC1483 Quick Start (Bridging) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Appendix E. Routing in HDIA Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 FIGURES Figure 1. Figure 2. Figure 3. Figure 4. Figure 5. Figure 6. Figure 7. Figure 8. Figure 9. Figure 10. Figure 11. Figure 12. Total Access 600 Rear Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice over ATM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Configuration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Utility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WAN Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Config Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Router/Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Global Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WAN Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 153 154 155 157 160 163 164 165 167 167 172 174 151 Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Figure 13. Figure 14. Figure 15. Figure 16. Figure 17. Figure 18. Figure 19. Figure 20. Figure 21. 152 Total Access 600 Series System Manual Router/Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Router/Logs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice/Config Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice/Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modules Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V.35 Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Routing with Copper Mountain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 180 181 183 184 185 188 191 193 198 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual 1. Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG TOTAL ACCESS 600 OVERVIEW The Total Access 600 is a complete solution Integrated Access Device (IAD) for Voice over ATM (VoATM) applications. The unit includes a modular network interface, Nx64 V.35 interface, 10/100BaseT interface, FXS ports, life-line voice backup, and an optional battery back-up for added security. The Total Access 600 can provision, test, and provide status for any of the voice and data interfaces. All connections are made via the rear panel. In addition to a built-in IP router, the Total Access 600 contains an echo canceller and ADPCM compression modules necessary for VoATM applications. Analog Lifeline The LIFE LINE connector on the rear panel (see Figure 1) provides assured voice for port 1. When a connection to the Voice Gateway is not possible due to loss of power or some other reason, an on-board relay opens and the first port of the voice connector is provided with analog voice from the analog lifeline connection. For the analog lifeline feature to work, the user must subscribe to an analog voice line and it must be connected via the lifeline connector. Figure 1. Total Access 600 Rear Panel Firmware Updates Firmware can be updated by using XMODEM transfer protocol via the unit’s CRAFT port (see Figure 1) or by using TFTP from a network server. (See DLP-007, Upgrading the Firmware Using XMODEM and DLP-008, Upgrading the Firmware Using TFTP.) The terminal menu is the access point to all other operations. Each terminal menu item has several functions and submenus that identify and provide access to specific operations and parameters. These menu selections are described later in this User Interface Guide. See See Section 1, Commons User Interface Guide for instructions about navigating the terminal menus.. See Section 2, Engineering Guidelines, for the CRAFT port connection pin-out. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 153 Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG 2. Total Access 600 Series System Manual VOICE OVER ATM OVERVIEW Voice over ATM (VoATM) is the technology used to transmit voice conversations over a data network using Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM). There are several potential benefits to moving voice over a data network using ATM. First, the small, fixed-length cells require lower processing overhead. Second, these small, fixed-length cells allow higher transmission speeds than traditional packet switching methods. ATM allocates bandwidth on demand, making it suitable for high-speed connection of voice, data, and video services. Conventional networks carry data in a synchronous manner. Because empty slots are circulating even when the link is not needed, network capacity is wasted. ATM automatically adjusts the network capacity to meet the system needs. 3. VOICE OVER ATM APPLICATION The echo canceller is used in ATM voice applications that require G.165 echo cancellation. The Total Access 600 also contains an integrated ADPCM encoder/decoder for voice compression. Figure 2 shows a typical VoATM application. The Total Access 600 connects to the ATM Network to provide both voice and high speed data from a single platform. TX RX LINK V.35 RX V.35 TX DATA VOICE BATT PWR/NET Figure 2. Voice over ATM Refer to the next section, Configuring the Total Access 600, for general configuration instructions. Refer to the appendices at the end of this section for information on using the Total Access 600 in specific applications: • • • • 154 Appendix A. Voice Gateway Quick Start Procedure (Voice Turn up) on page 191. Appendix B. RFC1483 Quick Start (IP Routing) on page 193. Appendix C. RFC1483 Quick Start (IP Routing with NAT) on page 195. Appendix D. RFC1483 Quick Start (Bridging) on page 196. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual 4. Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG CONFIGURING THE TOTAL ACCESS 600 System Info The SYSTEM INFO menu provides basic information about the unit and contains data fields for editing information. Figure 3 displays the submenus available when you select this menu item. Figure 3. System Information Menu >System Name Provides a user-configurable text string for the name of the Total Access 600. This name can help you distinguish between different installations. You can enter up to 31 characters in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underbar). This name will appear on the top line of all screens. >System Location Provides a user-configurable text string for the location of the Total Access 600. This field is to help you keep track of the actual physical location of the unit. You can enter up to 31 characters in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underbar). >System Contact Provides a user-configurable text string for a contact name. You can use this field to enter the name, phone number, or email address of a person responsible for the Total Access 600 system. You can enter up to 31 characters in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underbar). >Unit Name Product-specific name for the product assembly. >CLEI Code CLEI code for the product assembly. > Part Number ADTRAN part number for the product assembly. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 155 Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual >Serial Number Serial number of the product assembly. >Firmware Revision Displays the current firmware revision level of the controller. >Bootcode Revision Displays the bootcode revision. >System Uptime Displays the length of time since the Total Access 600 system reboot. >Date/Time Displays the current date and time, including seconds. This field can be edited. Enter the time in 24-hour format (such as 23:00:00 for 11:00 pm). Enter the date in mm-dd-yyyy format (for example, 10-30-1998). Each time you reset the system, this value resets to 0 days, 0 hours, 0 min and 0 secs. 156 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG System Config Set up the Total Access 600 operational configuration from the SYSTEM CONFIG menu. Figure 4 shows the items included in this menu. Figure 4. System Configuration Menu >Network Timing Mode Selects the timing source for the entire system. Network is the only timing option available. Network The system’s clock is recovered from the network (WAN interface). >Telnet Access Sets Telnet access to ON or OFF. >Telnet User List Up to four users can be configured for access to the Total Access 600. Each user can be assigned a security level and time out. Name A text string of the user name for this session. Authen Method The user can be authenticated in two ways: PASSWORD RADIUS The Password field is used to authenticate the user. The Radius client is used for authenticating the user. Password When the authenticating method is PASSWORD, this text string is used for the password. Idle Time (1-255) This sets the amount of time you can be idle before you are automatically logged off. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 157 Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Level This is the security level granted to the user. >Maint Port Menu The Total Access 600’s VT 100 CRAFT port can be accessed via an RJ-48 located on the rear panel. The setup for these ports is under this menu. Password Protect When set to NO, the maintenance port is not password protected. When YES (def), the Total Access 600 will prompt for a password upon startup. Password This is the text string that is used for comparison when password protecting the maintenance port. By default, no password is entered. If you forget your password, type CHALLENGE in all capital letters. Call technical support and have the displayed CHALLENGE code ready. The security level for the maintenance port is always set to 0. This gives full access to all menus. Passwords are case-sensitive. Instructions for Changing Passwords Step Action 1. Select the PASSWORD field—a new PASSWORD field displays. 2. Type the new password in the ENTER field. 3. Type the new password again in the CONFIRM field. The password can contain up to 12 alphanumeric characters. You can also use spaces and special characters in the password. 158 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Baud Rate This is the asynchronous rate that the maintenance port will run. The possible values are 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 (def), 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200. Data Bits This is the asynchronous bit rate that the maintenance port will run. The possible values are 7 or 8 (def) bits. Parity This is the asynchronous parity that the maintenance port will run. The possible values are NONE (def), ODD, or EVEN. Stop Bits This is the stop bit used for the maintenance port. The possible values are 1 (def), 1.5 or 2. >Network Time The Total Access 600 unit time can be entered manually from the SYSTEM INFO menu, or the unit can receive time from an NTP/SNTP server. The NETWORK TIME menu includes all parameters relating to how the unit communicates with the time server. Server Type The server type defines which port the Total Access 600 will listen on to receive timing information from the time server. NT Time The Total Access 600 will receive time from an NT server running SNTP software on its TIME port. SNTP The Total Access 600 will receive time directly from an SNTP server. Active This network timing feature can be turned on and off. It determines whether the unit will request and receive time from a time server. Time Zone There are several time zones available for the time to be displayed in. All time zones are based off of Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Adjust for Daylight Saving Since some areas of the world use Daylight Savings Time, the Total Access 600 is designed to adjust the time on the first Sunday in April and the last Sunday in October accordingly if this option is turned on. Host Address This is the IP address of the time server that the Total Access 600 will request and receive time from. Refresh This is the interval of time between each request the Total Access 600 sends out to the time server. A smaller refresh time guarantees that the unit receives the correct time from the server and corrects possible errors more quickly, but it is more taxing on the machine. A range of refresh times is available for the user to decide which is best for their unit. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 159 Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Status This displays the current status of the time negotiation process. If an error is displayed, check all connections and configurations to try to resolve the problem. System Utility Use the SYSTEM UTILITY menu to view and set the system parameters shown in Figure 5. Figure 5. System Utility Menu >Upgrade Firmware Updates firmware when Total Access 600 enhancements are released. Two transfer methods are available for use in updating the Total Access 600 system controller. Transfer Method The two methods for upgrading are XMODEM and TFTP. (See DLP-007, Upgrading the Firmware Using XMODEM and DLP-008, Upgrading the Firmware Using TFTP for more information.) TFTP requires a TFTP server running somewhere on the network. The Total Access 600 starts a TFTP client function which gets the upgrade code from the TFTP server. Selecting XMODEM will load the upgrade code through the CRAFT port using any PC terminal emulator with xmodem capability. TFTP Server Address This is required when the transfer method is TFTP. It is the IP address or domain name (if DNS is configured) of the TFTP server. TFTP Server Filename This is required when the transfer method is TFTP. It is the case-sensitive file name which contains the upgrade code. Transfer Status This appears when TFTP is used. It displays the status of the transfer as it happens. Any error or success message will be displayed here. 160 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Start Transfer This activator is used when the configurable items in this menu are complete. Before using START TRANSFER, the Total Access 600 should have a valid IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway (if required). Abort Transfer Use this activator to cancel any TFTP transfer in progress. >Config Transfer Used only with TFTP transfers. Sends a file containing the Total Access 600 configuration to a file on a TFTP server using the TFTP protocol. CONFIG TRANSFER also lets you save the Total Access 600 configuration as a backup file, so you can use the same configuration with multiple Total Access 600 units. In addition, CONFIG TRANSFER can retrieve a configuration file from a TFTP server. To support these transfers, ADTRAN delivers a TFTP program with the Total Access 600 called TFTP Server. You can configure any PC running Microsoft Windows with this software, and store a configuration file. See DLP-008, Upgrading the Firmware Using TFTP for details on how to use TFTP Server. Before using CONFIG TRANSFER, the Total Access 600 should have a valid IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway (if required). Only one configuration transfer session (upload or download) can be active at a time. Transfer Method Displays the method used to transfer the configuration file to or from a server. Currently, you must use TFTP. Transfer Type Only BINARY transfers are currently supported. TFTP Server IP Address Specifies the IP address of the TFTP server. Get this number from your system administrator. TFTP Server Filename Defines the name of the configuration file that you transfer to or retrieve from the TFTP server. The default name is Total Access 600.cfg, but you can edit this name. Current Transfer Status Indicates the current status of the update. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 161 Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Previous Transfer Status Indicates the status of the previous update. Load and Use Config Retrieves the configuration file specified in the TFTP SERVER FILENAME field from the server. To start this command, enter Y to begin or enter N to cancel. If you execute this command, the Total Access 600 retrieves the configuration file, reboots, then restarts using the new configuration. Save Config Remotely Saves the configuration file specified in TFTP SERVER FILENAME to the server identified in TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS. To start this command, enter Y to begin or enter N to cancel. Before using this command, you must have identified a valid TFTP server in TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS. >Ping Allows you to send pings (ICMP requests) to hosts. The following items are under this menu: Only one ping session can be active at a time. Start/Stop Activator to start and cancel a ping test. Host Address IP address or domain name (if DNS is configured) of device to receive the ping. Size (40-1500) Total size of the ping to send. Range is 40 (64 is def) to 1500 bytes. # of Packets Total packets to send every 2 seconds. Setting this to 0 allows the client to ping continuously. # Transmits Total packets sent (read only). # Receives Total packets received (read only). %Loss Percentage loss based on ping returned from host (read only). 162 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Configuring WAN Settings >DSLAM Type Set this to the type of DSLAM the Total Access 600 will be connecting to. >Layer One Interface This is the physical layer protocol used to connect the DSLAM to the Total Access 600. >Layer Two Protocol This is the data link layer protocol used to connect the DSLAM to the Total Access 600. If the DSLAM Type is CopperMountain, refer to Appendix E. Routing in HDIA Mode on page 197 for information. >ATM Config Use the WAN menu (Figure 6) to access the ATM CONFIG menu. Figure 6. WAN Menu Use the ATM CONFIG menu (Figure 7) to set the parameters listed below the figure. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 163 Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Figure 7. ATM Config Menu Idle Cells The IDLE CELLS format must be configured for either ATM FORUM or ITU. Configuring this setting incorrectly for a particular circuit will cause poor performance at the ATM layer. This setting must match the configuration setting of the ATM switch or DSLAM at the other end of the circuit. Data Scrambling DATA SCRAMBLING can be ENABLED or DISABLED for cell traffic. Configuring this setting incorrectly for a particular circuit will cause poor performance at the ATM layer. This setting must match the configuration setting of the ATM switch or DSLAM at the other end of the circuit. >ATM Stats Use the WAN menu (Figure 6 on page 163) to access the ATM STATS menu (Figure 8) and view the parameters listed below the figure. 164 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Figure 8. ATM Stats Menu AP: Tx Cells This is the number of cells transmitted. AP: Rx Cells This is the number of cells received. AP: Rx OAM Cells This is the number of OAM cells received AP: Receive Cells Discarded This is the number of cells received and discarded. An incrementing count in this field could indicate a configuration problem with the ATM layer. AP: Receive Cell Errors This is the number of cells received with an HEC error. AP: Sync This indicates cell delineation at the ATM layer. AP: Out Of Cell Delineation This indicates loss of cell delineation at the ATM layer. AAL5: Transmit Frames This is the number of AAL5 frames transmitted. AAL5: Receive Frames This is the number of AAL5 frames received. AAL5: Transmit Discarded Frames This is the number of AAL5 frames discarded. AAL5: Receive Errors This is the number of AAL5 errors received. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 165 Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual AAL5: Receive Discarded Frames This is the number of AAL5 frames discarded. AAL5: No ATM Frames This is for internal use only. AAL5: No Data Packets This is for internal use only. DBG: DEBUG This is for internal use only. Clear Stats This is used to clear the counters on this menu screen. 166 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Configuring the Router – Configuration Use the ROUTER/CONFIGURATION menu (Figure 9) to access the GLOBAL, ETHERNET, and WAN menus. Figure 9. Router/Configuration Menu >Global Use the GLOBAL menu (Figure 10) to set up general router functions. Figure 10. Global Menu IP This is used for general IP configuration. Mode This item controls how the 600 handles IP routes. When this option is set to ON (def), the 600 will advertise and listen to routes from other IP routers. If OFF, the route table is still used, but only static routes are used for routing IP packets and only the Ethernet port is used. IP packets can be sent over the WAN, but only when bridged. Static Routes Use this menu to enter static routes to other networks. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 167 Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG ACTIVE IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK GATEWAY HOPS PRIVATE Total Access 600 Series System Manual Adds this static route entry to the IP routing table when set to YES (def) and removes it (if it was previously added) if set to NO. The IP address of the host or network address of the device being routed to. Determines the bits in the previous IP address that are used. If this is to be a host route, it must be set to all ones (255.255.255.255). The IP address of the router to receive the forwarded IP packet. The number of router hops required to get to the network or host. Maximum distance is 15 hops. When set to NO, the Total Access 600 will advertise this static route using RIP. Setting to YES means that the route is kept private. DHCP Server DHCP MODE DHCP RENEWAL TIME When set to ON, the Total Access 600 acts as a DHCP server and will dynamically assign IP, network mask, default gateway, and DNS addresses to any device which transmits a broadcast DHCP request. The addresses assigned are based on the Total Access 600’s own IP address and will be within the same network. The number of hours that the DHCP server should allow the device before it is required to send a new DHCP request. The default is 15 hours, and 0 represents an infinite lease. Domain Names Enter the 600's domain name and the primary and secondary DNS servers in this menu. DOMAIN NAME PRIMARY DNS SECONDARY DNS PRIMARY NBNS/WINS SECONDARY NBNS/WINS 168 Text string used to represent the domain name used by the Total Access 600. First server to which domain name requests are sent. Server used as a backup, in case the primary address does not respond to the request. Server to which NT domain name requests are sent. Server used when there is no response from the primary server. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG UDP Relay This menu configures the 600 to act as a UDP relay agent for applications requiring a response from UDP hosts that are not on the same network segment as their clients. Mode When this option is set to ON (def), the Total Access 600 will act as a relay agent. UDP Relay List Up to four relay destination servers can be specified in this list. RELAY ADDRESS This is the IP address of the server that will receive the relay packet. UDP PORT TYPE STANDARD (def) The following standard UDP protocols are relayed when set: DHCP, TFTP, DNS, NTP (Network Time Protocol, port 123, NBNS (NetBios Name Server, port 137), NBDG (NetBIOS Datagram, port 138), and BootP. SPECIFIED When set, the UDP port (1 to 65535) can be specified in the UDP Port columns (up to three per server). UDP PORT 1, 2, 3 Used for specifying UDP ports to be relayed. These fields only apply when UDP PORT TYPE is set to SPECIFIED. Bridge The BRIDGE menu is used to set up the bridge parameters for the 600. The bridging function runs at the Media Access Control (MAC) level which allows any protocol packets that run over Ethernet to be forwarded. Bridging can run concurrently with IP. However, when IP routing is active, IP packets (which include ARP packets) are not bridged. Mode This is used to enable the bridge function. Address Table The 600 automatically maintains a table of MAC addresses detected and associates those addresses with the LAN or WAN port from which they were received. AGING FORWARD POLICY 61200624L1-1A The maximum time an idle MAC address remains in the table before being removed. The value is in minutes. When this parameter is set to UNKNOWN (def), any bridge packet with a destination MAC address that is not in the bridge table is forwarded to all other ports. When set to KNOWN, the packet with the unknown destination MAC address is dropped and is not forwarded. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 169 Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Security Filter Defines The Total Access 600 can filter packets based on certain parameters within the packet. The method used by the Total Access 600 allows the highest flexibility for defining filters and assigning them to a PVC. The filters are set up in two steps: (1) defining the packet types, and (2) adding them to a list under the PVC. This menu is used to define the individual filter defines based on packet type. Filter Defines /MAC Filter Defines The MAC filter is applied to bridge packets only. Bridge packets which are forwarded by the bridge functionality of the Total Access 600 are defined here. Up to 32 MAC defines can be specified. NAME SRC ADDR SRC MASK DEST ADDR DEST MASK MAC TYPE TYPE MSK Identifies the filter entry. 48-bit MAC source address used for comparison. (hexadecimal format) Bits in the MAC source address which are compared. (hexadecimal format) 48-bit MAC destination address used for comparison. (hexadecimal format) Bits in the MAC destination address used for comparison. (hexadecimal format) 16-bit MAC type field used for comparison. (hexadecimal format) Bits in the MAC type field used for comparison. (hexadecimal format) Filter Defines /Pattern Filter Defines The pattern filter is applied to bridge packets only. That is any packet which is forwarded by the bridge functionality of the Total Access 600. Up to 32 pattern defines can be specified. NAME Identifies the filter entry. OFFSET Offset from beginning of packet of where to start the pattern comparison. PATTERN 64 bits used for comparison. (hexadecimal format) MASK Bits in the pattern to be compared. (hexadecimal format) Filter Defines /IP Filter Defines The IP filter defines apply to any IP packet, whether it is routed or bridged. Up to 32 IP defines can be specified. 170 NAME Identifies the filter entry. IP SRC IP address compared to the source address. (dotted decimal format) © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG SRC MASK Bits which are used in the source comparison. (dotted decimal format) IP DEST IP address compared to the destination address. (dotted decimal format) DEST MASK Bits which are used in the destination comparison. (dotted decimal format) SRC PORT IP source port number used for comparison Range: 0 to 65535. (decimal format) SRC PORT CMPR Type of comparison that is performed. = means ports equal to not = means port not equal to > means port greater than < means port less than None - means the source port is not compared DST PORT IP destination port number used for comparison Range: 0 to 65535. (decimal format) DST PORT CMPR Type of comparison that is performed = means ports equal to not = means port not equal to > means port greater than < means port less than None - means the destination port is not compared PROTO Protocol used for comparison. Range: 0 to 255. (decimal format) PROTO CMPR Type of comparison that is performed = means protocols equal to not = means protocols not equal to > means protocols greater than < means protocols less than None means the protocol is not compared TCP EST 61200624L1-1A Yes - only when TCP established © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 171 Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual No - only when TCP not established Ignore - ignore TCP flags >Ethernet Use the ETHERNET menu (Figure 11) to configure the Ethernet port on the 600. Figure 11. Ethernet Menu IP This is used to set up the IP addresses for the LAN on the 600 IP Address The IP address assigned to the 600's Ethernet port is set here. This address must be unique within the network. Subnet Mask This is the IP network mask that is to be applied to the 600's Ethernet port. Default Gateway The default gateway is used by the 600 to send IP packets whose destination address is not found in the route table. 172 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG RIP Use this menu to enable RIP on the LAN interface. MODE PROTOCOL METHOD Enables or disables RIP. Specifies the RIP protocol. Choices are V1 (def) (which is RIP version 1) or V2 (RIP version 2). Specifies the way the RIP protocol sends out its advertisements. Choices are given below. NONE All routes in the router table are advertised with no modification of the metrics. SPLIT HORIZON (def) Only routes not learned from this circuit are advertised. POISON REVERSE All routes are advertised, but the routes learned from this port are “poisoned” with an infinite metric. DIRECTION Allows the direction at which RIP advertisements are sent and listened to be specified. TX AND RX (def) RIP advertisements are periodically transmitted and are listened to on this port. TX ONLY RIP advertisements are periodically transmitted but are not listened to on this port. RX ONLY RIP advertisements are not transmitted on this port, but are listened. V2 SECRET Enter the secret used by RIP version 2 here. Proxy ARP This feature allows the network portion of a group of addresses to be shared among several physical network segments. The ARP protocol provides a way for devices to create a mapping between physical addresses and logical IP addresses. Proxy ARP makes use of this mapping feature by instructing a router to answer ARP requests as a "proxy" for the IP addresses behind one of its ports. The device which sent the ARP request will then correctly assume that it can reach the requested IP address by sending packets to the physical address that was returned. This technique effectively hides the fact that a network has been (further) subnetted. If this option is set to YES, when an ARP request is received on the Ethernet port the address is looked up in the IP routing table. If the forwarding port is not on the Ethernet port and the route is not the default route, the 600 will answer the request with its own hardware address. MAC Address This is a read-only MAC address programmed at ADTRAN. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 173 Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual >WAN Use the WAN menu (Figure 12) to configure WAN settings on the 600. Figure 12. WAN Menu L2 Protocol Displays the current L2 protocol - ATM (Read Only). ATM Use the ATM menu to setup Data PVCs for the router. Description This is the text description for the PVC. VPI ATM virtual port identifier. VCI This is the ATM virtual channel identifier. PCR Peak Cell Rate. Limits transmitted cells. QOS Quality of Service. Indicates this PVC’s traffic class. Protocol This is the protocol supported on the PVC. RFC1483 IP Use this selection to support IP on this PVC. (These settings only take effect when RFC1483 is the selected protocol.) Active This selection enables IP on this PVC. Far - End IP Address This is the address of the NEXT hop router on this interface. 174 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG IP netmask This is the network mask used for this interface. Local IP Address This is the IP address for this PVC. NAT Use this menu to set up and use Network Address Translation on this interface. NETWORK ADDRESS PORT TRANSLATION PUBLIC IP ADDRESS MODE TRANSLATION TABLE PUBLIC ADDRESS MODE PROTOCOL PUBLIC PORT MODE PRIVATE ADDRESS MODE 61200624L1-1A By enabling port translation, IP packets are modified as they pass through this interface. During transmission, private addresses are translated into a single public (NAPT) IP address. Incoming packets are translated from the public to private address based on the protocol port numbers. Once enabled, you must set up NAT for use. The port translation requires at least a single real IP address for translating. This value can use the IP assigned to the interface (or assigned via layer 2 protocol like PPP), obtained using DHCP client, or statically specified on this menu. If the address cannot be learned, then it must be specified in order for the translation to work. Add translation entries to "fine tune" special protocols or specify private addresses. The public IP address used for this translation entry can be the NAPT IP address assigned to the link or can be specified. You specify an address to direct packets with certain protocols to different servers. The upper layer protocol that is to be monitored for translation. For TCP and UDP, a port number must also be specified. The public destination port associated with this entry can be specified to add more control over certain types of traffic. The default, ANY PORT, covers all port types. The private IP address can be specified to steer certain protocols and ports to specific servers in the private network. Likewise, internal hosts can be steered to certain servers on the public network. A new request from the public network matching this entry’s public parameters will be dropped if this mode is set to ANY INTERNAL. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 175 Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG PRIVATE PORT MODE TRANSLATE BODY NAT VIEW NAPT ADDRESS ENTRY COUNT ENTRY OVERFLOW COUNT Total Access 600 Series System Manual The private destination port associated with this entry can be specified to add more control over certain types of traffic. Leave as ANY PORT to cover all port types. By default, the application payload in the packet is scanned for occurrences of the private/public IP address in binary or ASCII form. Set this to No for applications where this will cause problems. Shows the protocols that are actively being translated. Represents the public address that is being used as the NAPT address. The number of entries in the NAT table. A count of the dropped entries due to low memory. RIP Use this menu to enable RIP on the WAN interface. (See RIP on page 173 for description of options.) RFC 1484 Bridge This is used to enable bridge mode on this PVC. (These settings only take effect when RFC1483 is the selected protocol.) PPPoATM The Total Access 600 uses the PPPoATM profile to specify the profile used when connected using PPP. Authentication The authentication menu contains the required parameters for the authentication of the PPP peer and for being authenticated by the PPP peer. Authentication is applied between the Total Access 600 and the PPP peer as follows: TX Method This parameter specifies how the Total Access 600 is to be authenticated by the PPP peer. There are four possible selections. NONE (def) The connection will not allow the PPP peer to PAP, CHAP, OR EAP CHAP OR EAP EAP authenticate it. The connection can be authenticated using PAP, CHAP or EAP. The connection can be authenticated using CHAP or EAP only. The connection will only allow authentication by the peer using EAP. TX Username This is the username that is used when being authenticated by the PPP peer. TX Password This is the password or secret that is used when being authenticated by the PPP peer. 176 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG RX Username This is the username used to authenticate the PPP peer. RX Password This is the password or secret that is used to authenticate the PPP peer. IP The IP menu contains the parameters for exchanging IP data with the PPP peer. Mode Setting to ON (def) will permit this connection profile to negotiate PPP IPCP with the PPP peer for exchanging of IP packets. Local IP This is the IP address that is assigned to the PPP link when using numbered links. Leaving this as 0.0.0.0 means the Total Access 600 will determine its IP address using PPP IPCP. If the far end router does not assign an IP address, the PPP link is left unnumbered. Netmask This network mask is applied to the IP/Local IP address for determining the PPP peer's network. If left as 0.0.0.0, a standard network mask is used. Remote IP The PPP peer's IP address or network can be set here, if known. Leaving this at 0.0.0.0 means that the Total Access 600 will determine the PPP peer's IP and network using the PPP IPCP. NAT The Total Access 600 can perform Network Address Translation. This feature is most widely used when connecting to the Internet. The Ethernet network can consist of private network numbers. When this profile is connected, all IP addresses on the Ethernet side are translated into the one real IP address negotiated with the PPP peer (ISP). Multiple stations on the Ethernet side can access the Internet simultaneously. Setting this option to ON will cause the Total Access 600 to perform NAT. In the OFF (def) position, the unit will route across the connection normally. Route The IP parameters are configured in this menu. Usually the Total Access 600 will automatically discover the PPP peer's networks using PPP IPCP and/or RIP. • Route/Static Route Selecting yes will add a static route to the remote peer to the route table. • Route/Private Selecting yes will prevent this route from being advertised. • Route/Hops (1-16) This value is the metric or number of hops that RIP will use in advertising the static route. The range is 1 to 16, where 1 is the default. The value 16 is considered an infinite distance (poisoned route). • Route/Force IP When set to YES, the Total Access 600 will force the PPP peer to use the IP address in the LOCAL IP for this profile as its WAN IP address. Normally this is set in the NO (def) position. RIP The RIP parameters can be adjusted from their defaults under this menu. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 177 Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual • Mode The Total Access 600 performs RIP over the WAN connection when this is set to ON (def). • Protocol The Total Access 600 performs version 1, V1 (def), or version 2, V2, of RIP on this WAN connection. • Method SPLIT HORIZON POISON REVERSE (def) NONE Only routes not learned on the WAN connection are advertised. All routes are advertised, including routes learned from the WAN connection. These routes are poisoned. All routes are advertised, including routes learned from the WAN connection. No attempt is made to poison these routes. • Direction TX AND RX (def) TX ONLY RX ONLY RIP advertisements are transmitted and listened to on the WAN connection. RIP advertisements are transmitted and not listened to. RIP advertisements are listened to but not transmitted. • Triggered When set to YES, only IP RIP updates are sent when the routing table has changed and learned routes are not "aged." When set to NO (def), updates are sent periodically. • Retain When this Connection List entry is disconnected and this parameter is set to YES, all routes learned from this WAN connection are retained and their routing interface is set to idle. PPP The Total Access 600 supports the IETF standards for the Point-to-Point Protocol. The PPP state machine running in the Total Access 600 can be fine-tuned to support many applications that can be employed. The configurable items under this menu can be changed from their default values for special cases. VJ Compression When this item is set to ON, the Total Access 600 will perform TCP/IP header compression known as Van Jacobson compression to the PPP peer. Max Config This value is the number of unanswered configuration-requests that should be transmitted before giving up on a call. The possible values are 5, 10 (def), 15 and 20. Max Timer This value is the number of seconds to wait between unanswered configuration requests. The possible values are 1 sec, 2 secs (def), 3 secs, 5 secs and 10 secs. 178 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Max Failure Due to the nature of PPP, configuration options may not be agreed upon between two PPP peers. This value is the number of configuration-naks that should occur before an option is configuration-rejected. This allows a connection to succeed that might otherwise fail. The possible values are 5 (def), 10, 15 and 20. Encapsulation This is the PPP encapsulation. (LLC or VC-Mux) Filters The Total Access 600 can block packets in and out of a WAN port by use of the filters. They are set up in two steps: 1) define the types of packets that would be of interest in the CONFIGURATION/GLOBAL/SECURITY/FILTER DEFINES menu, and 2) set up the filter type and combination of defines that will cause a packet block. WAN-TO-LAN (In) The packets which come into the Total Access 600 can be filtered in three ways: DISABLED (def) BLOCK ALL FORWARD ALL Turns off packet input filtering. No incoming packets are blocked. All incoming packets from the WAN are blocked except as defined in the FILTERS/IN EXCEPTIONS list. All incoming packets from the WAN are not blocked except as defined in the FILTERS/IN EXCEPTIONS list. In Exceptions This is a list of up to 32 filter entries which can be combined using the operations field. The operations are performed in the order they appear on the list. ACTIVE TYPE MAC PATTERN IP IPX FILTER LIST NAME NEXT OPER END 61200624L1-1A Turns this entry active when set to ON. Selects the filter define list to reference: from the CONFIGURATION/GLOBAL/SECURITY/FILTER DEFINES/MAC FILTER DEFINES list. from the CONFIGURATION/GLOBAL/SECURITY/FILTER DEFINES/PATTERN FILTER DEFINES list. from the CONFIGURATION/GLOBAL/SECURITY/FILTER DEFINES/IP FILTER DEFINES list. from the CONFIGURATION/GLOBAL/SECURITY/FILTER DEFINES/IPX FILTER DEFINES list. Selects between filters defined in the list. The next operation to use to combine with the next filter in the list: the last filter to combination. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 179 Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG AND OR Total Access 600 Series System Manual logically AND this filter with the next filter in the list. logically OR this filter with the next filter in the list. LAN-TO-WAN (Out) The packets which come out toward the WAN from the TA600 can be filtered in three ways: DISABLED (def) BLOCK ALL FORWARD ALL Turns off packet input filtering. No outgoing packets are blocked. All outgoing packets to the WAN are blocked except as defined in the FILTERS/OUT EXCEPTIONS list. All outgoing packets to the WAN are not blocked except as defined in the FILTERS/OUT EXCEPTIONS list. Out Exceptions This is a list of up to 32 filter entries. The setup is exactly the same as the FILTERS/IN EXCEPTIONS list. Configuring the Router – Status Use the ROUTER/STATUS menu to view and set the parameters shown in Figure 13. The ROUTER/STATUS screens give the user useful information for debugging the current routes in the 600. Figure 13. Router/Status Menu >Session This menu maintains statistics about the active ATM PVCs. >ARP cache This is a listing of the currently connected Ethernet port on the LAN. >Bridge Table This shows the detected MAC addresses and the interface to which they are associated. 180 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG >IP Routes This shows the current routes in the 600 and their use. >LAN Stats This shows traffic over the LAN interface. >IP Stats This shows IP traffic through the 600. Configuring the Router – Logs The Logs menu (Figure 14) contains logs displaying important information about the running condition of the Total Access 600. The logs can be set to capture diagnostics of error conditions only by way of a log level. The levels are divided up as follows: level 0 - Fatal event (causes reset) level 1 - Critical event level 2 - Error event level 3 - Warning event level 4 - Notify event level 5 - Informational event level 6 - Debugging event Figure 14. Router/Logs Menu Sys log Host Set this to the IP address or domain name (if DNS configured) of the sys log host device. All log events are sent to this device. PPP Log Information pertaining to the PPP negotiation and authentication is logged in the PPP log. Connection Log Information pertaining to the call placement and answering is logged in the Connection log. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 181 Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Network Log Information pertaining to routing protocols is placed in this log. Each log (PPP log, Connection log, and Network log) contains the following elements. Active When set to YES (def), PPP events below or equal the log level are logged into the log. Wrap When set to YES (def), new PPP events will overwrite old PPP events when the log is full. All logging will stop when the log is full and set to NO. Level In order to log events, they must be at or below this level. Range is 0 to 6. The default is 3. View This menu displays the log list. The fields are as follows: DATE/TIME Date and time event occurred. LEVEL Level associated with this event (0-6). MESSAGE Text message for this event. If message is too long to fit on the line, another event appears below it continuing the message. Clear This clears the log when activated. 182 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Configuring Voice Support – Config Use the VOICE/CONFIG menu to view and set the parameters shown in Figure 15. Figure 15. Voice/Config Menu >Call Control The CALL CONTROL setting is used to configure the correct Voice Gateway protocol for voice signaling control between the Total Access 600 and the configured Gateway. The CALL CONTROL setting must be configured correctly before the voice circuits will work correctly. The Total Access 600 supports Jetstream, Tollbridge, and CopperCom Voice Gateways. >VPI The VPI setting is used to configure the Total Access 600 virtual path setting used to communicate with the configured Voice Gateway. >VCI The VCI setting is used to configure the Total Access 600 virtual circuit setting used to communicate with the configured Voice Gateway. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 183 Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Configuring Voice Support – Status Use the VOICE/STATUS menu to view and set the parameters shown in Figure 16. Figure 16. Voice/Status Menu >Gateway Stats The GATEWAY STATS menu shows the current state of the communication link between the Total Access 600 and the Voice Gateway. The Gateway Link is indicated as UP or DOWN. A count of management messages is indicated along with the number of active calls in progress. >PVC Stats The PVC STATS menu shows the current state of the virtual circuit used between the Voice Gateway and the Total Access 600 IAD for voice signaling and voice payload delivery. >POTS Stats The POTS STATS menu shows real-time indication status of each voice port on the Total Access 600. From this menu, on a per port basis, the user can determine which ports are active/inactive. Several statistics at this menu are used only for internal ADTRAN development. Task, Inserts, and Drops indicators are for internal use only. >Clear Stats The CLEAR STATS menu can be used to clear the counters used for Voice Status menus. 184 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Managing the Modules – Modules Use the MODULES menu to view and set the parameters shown in Figure 17. The Total Access 600 contains four fixed modules: The WAN/Network interface, FXS, Echo Canceller/ADPCM module, and the V.35 interface. The MODULES table allows management of the on-board modules in the Total Access 600. The table contains MENU, ALARM, TEST, and STATUS indicators/menus customized for each module. Figure 17. Modules Menu >NET (T1) Menu Format Sets the frame format for the T1 interface. The setting must match the frame format of the circuit to which the interface is connected. Choices are ESF (extended superframe), SF (superframe), or SLC96. SF is equivalent to the D4 frame format. Line Code Sets the line code for the T1 interface. The setting must match the line code of the circuit to which the interface is connected. Choices are B8ZS (bipolar with 8-zero substitution) or AMI (alternate mark inversion). Equalization Sets the line build-out for the T1 interface. The setting of this field depends on whether the circuit is provisioned for DS1 by the telephone company. Choices are 0dB,-7.5dB,-15dB,-22dB,266FT,399FT,533FT,and 655 FT. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 185 Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual CSU Lpbk Enables or disables far-end commanded loopbacks via the FDL channel. Test These options are used to initiate local and remote loopback tests and display the test status. Loc LB (Local Loopback) Causes loopback on near-end port. None No test/stop test. Line Metallic loopback Payload Payload loopback framing and clocking are regenerated. Remote LB (Remote Loopback) Sends a loopback code to a remote CSU. None No test/stop test. Line Metallic loopback Payload Payload loopback framing and clocking are regenerated. Test Status Indicates whether a test is underway. Alarm Loss of Signal (LOS) No signal detected on port interface. Red Alarm (RED) Not able to frame data received on the port. Alternately referred to as Out of Frame (OOF). Yellow Alarm (YELLOW) Remote alarm indicator (RAI) being received on port. Blue Alarm (BLUE) Receiving unframed all ones from the port alarm indicator signal (AIS). Status Displays T1 performance data. 186 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Time Frame In the Time Frame menu, three options are available: CURRENT , 15 MIN and 24 HR. The performance data for the given window is stored. CLR Clears information for the selected port. Press ENTER when the cursor is over this field to clear the data. ES Errored Seconds. An ES is a second with one or more error events or one or more Out Of Frame events or one or more Controlled Slips. SES Severely Errored Seconds. An SES is a second with 320 or more error events or one or more OutOfFrame events. SEF Severely Errored Frames. FS Frame Sync Errors. LCV Line Code Violations. SLP Slip Error Events. UAS Unavailable Seconds >FXS Refer to the Section 4.7, FXS User Interface Guide. >EC/ADPCM Refer to the Section 4.7, FXS User Interface Guide. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 187 Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Managing the Modules – V.35 Setup Use the V.35 SETUP menu to view and set the parameters shown in Figure 18. Figure 18. V.35 Setup Menu CHANNEL RATE and EIA settings are supported via this menu option. For all typical applications, these settings are left in their default states. >ATM/FR IWF This menu contains the setup and status for the ATM/Frame Relay interworking functions. Mode The MODE setting configures the V.35 port for FRF5 or FRF8 operation, depending upon the application being supported. FRF5 This is also known as Network Interworking. Use this mode for Frame Relay over ATM. FRF8 This is also known as Service Interworking. In this mode, the Total Access 600 performs a translation between Frame Relay and ATM protocols. Configuration The CONFIGURATION menu is used to support the configuration of Frame-to-ATM interworking, signaling formats, timeout values, and PVC settings. 188 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG The following settings are used for FRF5. LAN FR MAINT PROTOCOL LAN FR POLL TIMEOUT T392 (5-30) FRN PORT CONFIG 61200624L1-1A Frame Relay maintenance or signaling protocol between local V.35 port and the attached DTE port, support ANSI Annex A, CCITT Q933 Annex D, CISCO LMI or Static (no signaling). T392 for signaling protocol, typical value 15. No meaning if Maint Protocol is Static. Logical Frame Relay ports over ATM. Up to 4 ports are supported with each port supporting up to 4 DLCI mappings. Go to NUM field. Typing "i" or "I" will insert another entry, and typing "d" or "D" will delete one entry. NAME To identify your port. ATM VPI Specifies the virtual path over which this logical port is running. ATM VCI Specifies the virtual circuit over which this logical port is running. DE MAP Frame Relay to ATM DE mapping; default value (Frn Only, ATM 0) suggested. CLPI MAP ATM to Frame Relay CLPI map; default value (Frn Only) suggested. D/C Set D/C field in the header to 0 or 1. HEADER Header format; only 2 bytes supported now. MAINT PROTOCOL Maintenance or signaling protocol over this logical Frame Relay port. Support Annex A, Annex D, CISCO LMI or Static. MUX MODE Many DLCIs or one DLCI mapping over this port. DLCI MAP Actual DLCI mappings. LAN DLCI The DLCI configured over local V.35 Frame Relay port. NET DLCI The DLCI configured over the WAN side logical Frame Relay port. ACTIVE Always active, not configurable. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 189 Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual The following settings are used for FRF8. LAN FR MAINT PROTOCOL LAN FR POLL TIMEOUT T392 (5-30) FR/ATM PVC MAPPING 190 Frame Relay maintenance or signaling protocol between local V.35 port and the attached DTE port, support ANSI Annex A, CCITT Q933 Annex D, CISCO LMI or Static (no signaling). T392 for signaling protocol, typical value 15. No meaning if Maint Protocol is Static. Up to 4 mappings are supported. FR DLCI Frame Relay DLCI on V.35 port. ATM VPI Specifies the virtual path to which DLCI is mapped. ATM VCI Specifies the virtual circuit to which DLCI is mapped. TRANSLATE Translate or transparent mode between Frame Relay frames and ATM cells. DE MAP Map Frame Relay DE bit to ATM CLPI bit, Always 0, Always 1 or Convert each other. FECN MAP Map Frame Relay FECN bit to ATM EFCI bit, Always 0, Always 1 or Convert each other. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Appendix A. Voice Gateway Quick Start Procedure (Voice Turn up) A typical VoATM application (see Figure 19) uses a Total Access 600 connected to an ATM network. For voice applications, a Voice Gateway is needed to interface with the PSTN. Jetstream, Tollbridge, and CopperCom are popular Gateway types. V.35 TX DATA VOICE BATT PWR/NET Figure 19. Application Diagram To configure a Total Access 600 for use with the Voice Gateway, you need to know the VPI and VCI to be used on the ATM network to access the Gateway from this Total Access 600. You also need to know the format for Idle Cells and whether Data Scrambling is used on this ATM network. The following procedure will help you navigate the Total Access 600 menus for configuring the necessary elements for VoATM with the Voice Gateway. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 191 Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Voice Turn Up Step Action 1. From the Total Access 600 main menu, select the WAN menu. (Here you set up the ATM network.) 2. Select the ATM CONFIG menu. 3. Enter the IDLE CELLS format for your network. 4. Set DATA SCRAMBLING appropriately for your network. 5. Back all the way out to the top level Total Access 600 menu, and then select the VOICE menu. (From this menu, the appropriate Voice information for working with the Voice Gateway is entered.) 6. Select CONFIG, and from the CONFIG menu, enter the Gateway type under CALL CONTROL and enter the VPI and VCI values for communicating with that Gateway. CALL CONTROL should be set to the Gateway type and the VPI and VCI values should be set appropriately for your network. 7. To verify correct setup, use the STATUS menu (under the VOICE menu) to look at the current status of the voice connection. Under STATUS, you can view the GATEWAY STATS and information about the voice PVC along with information about the POTs ports available on the Gateway. The GATEWAY STATS menu should show the Gateway Link is up (if everything is configured correctly). A visual inspection of the VOICE LED on the front panel will also yield the status. Green = up. Red = Down. 192 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Appendix B. RFC1483 Quick Start (IP Routing) The Total Access 600 allows for complete integration of voice and data delivery from one compact platform (see Figure 20). Once you have completed the voice turn up procedure from the previous example, adding data to the circuit requires some additional setup. TX RX LINK V.35 RX V.35 TX DATA VOICE BATT PWR/NET Figure 20. Application Diagram To configure a Total Access 600 for IP routing, you need to know the VPI and VCI values for the data circuit on your network. You also need the IP address of the next hop router in the circuit. The table on the next page shows how to configure the Total Access 600 for IP Routing. . IP Routing Step 61200624L1-1A Action 1. From the Total Access 600 main menu, select the WAN menu. (Here you set up the ATM network.) 2. Select the ATM CONFIG menu. 3. Enter the IDLE CELLS format for your network. 4. Set DATA SCRAMBLING appropriately for your network. 5. Back all the way out to the top level Total Access 600 menu, and then select the ROUTER menu. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 193 Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual IP Routing 6. Select CONFIGURATION. From the CONFIGURATION menu, you will set up addresses for your LAN and WAN. For basic IP routing, use all the default values from the GLOBAL menu. 7. From the ETHERNET menu, enter the IP menu to enter your LAN configuration. 8. Enter your LAN IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK, and DEFAULT GATEWAY information. For this example, the IP ADDRESS is 192.168.1.2, the SUBNET MASK is 255.255.255.0, and the DEFAULT GATEWAY is 10.25.4.10. 9. Arrow back to the main ROUTER CONFIGURATION menu, and select the WAN menu and then the ATM menu. (Here you will enter your data PVC information.) 10. Create a new PVC by entering the menu. Enter your VPI and VCI values. 11. From the RFC1483 IP menu, enter your LAN information. For this example, the FAR END IP ADDRESS is 10.25.4.9, the IP NETMASK is 255.255.255.252, and the LOCAL IP ADDRESS is 10.25.4.10. 12. 194 Arrow back to the top level Total Access 600 menu to activate your changes. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Appendix C. RFC1483 Quick Start (IP Routing with NAT) To illustrate the use of NAT, consider the example from Appendix B. RFC1483 Quick Start (IP Routing) on page 193. To set up a single public address that will be used to access the public network, you will use the NAT menu on the WAN/ATM/RFC1483 IP menu. IP Routing with NAT Step 61200624L1-1A Action 1. From the NAT menu, set NETWORK ADDRESS PORT TRANSLATION to ENABLED. (This will enable translation and allow you to enter the NAT options.) 2. Set PUBLIC IP ADDRESS MODE to SPECIFIED so you can enter your public address. During transmission, private addresses are translated into this public (NAPT) address. 3. You will also need to set up the Translation Table to do translation on the body of the packets for certain protocols, such as FTP, to work correctly. 4. From the TRANSLATION TABLE menu, create a new entry by arrowing into the table. 5. For PUBLIC ADDRESS MODE, select NAPT ADDRESS to use the previously specified public address. 6. For PROTOCOL, select TCP. 7. Make sure that TRANSLATE BODY is set to YES. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 195 Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Appendix D. RFC1483 Quick Start (Bridging) The Total Access 600 allows for complete integration of voice and data delivery from one compact platform. Once you have completed the voice turn up procedure from the previous example, adding data to the circuit requires some additional setup. To configure a Total Access 600 for Bridging, you need to know the VPI and VCI values for the data circuit on your network. Bridging Step Action 1. From the Total Access 600 main menu, select the WAN menu. (Here you set up the ATM network.) 2. Select the ATM CONFIG menu. 3. Enter the IDLE CELLS format for your network. 4. Set DATA SCRAMBLING appropriately for your network. 5. Back all the way out to the top level Total Access 600 menu, and then select the ROUTER menu. 6. Enter the CONFIGURATION menu. From this menu, you will set up addresses for your LAN and WAN. For basic IP routing, use all the default values from the GLOBAL menu. 7. From the ETHERNET menu, enter the IP menu to enter your LAN configuration. 8. Enter your LAN IP ADDRESS and SUBNET MASK. For this example, the IP ADDRESS is 192.168.1.2 and the SUBNET MASK is 255.255.255.0. This is not required, but will allow Telnet configuration and TFTP upgrades from the LAN. 9. Arrow back to the main ROUTER CONFIGURATION menu, and select the WAN menu and then the ATM menu. (Here you will enter your data PVC information.) 10. Create a new PVC by entering the menu. Enter your VPI and VCI values. 11. Disable IP on the RFC1483 IP menu and enable Bridging on the RFC1483 BRIDGE menu. (This enables the Total Access 600 as a bridge.) 12. Arrow back to the top level Total Access 600 menu to activate your changes. All packets that come in on the Ethernet will be forwarded on the WAN. 196 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Appendix E. Routing in HDIA Mode The Total Access 600 allows for complete integration of voice and data delivery from one compact platform. The CopperMountain DSLAM uses Frame Relay instead of ATM as their Layer 2 protocol. Once you have completed the Layer 1 configuration from the previous examples, you must configure the Layer 2 protocol. Refer to Figure 21 on page 198 as you complete the steps below. Frame Relay Setup Step Action 1. From the IAD/WAN/FRAME RELAY CONFIG menu, select MAINTENANCE PROTOCOL. Set MAINTENANCE PROTOCOL to STATIC. 2. From the IAD/WAN/FRAME RELAY CONFIG menu, select DLCI MAPPING. 3. On the DLCI MAPPING menu, DLCI 528 should be selected. Right arrow to the IP MAP menu. 4. On the IP MAP menu, set up the following: Set ACTIVE to YES W/BRIDGE ENCAPSULATION. Set ADDRESS MODE to either USER SPECIFIED or DHCP CLIENT. If DHCP CLIENT is selected, the link addresses will be learned through DHCP (skip to Step 5). Set FAR-END IP ADDRESS to the next hop router on the ATM interface connected to the Copper Mountain for this DSL line (10.100.2.145 in Figure 21). Set IP NETMASK appropriately for this interface. Set LOCAL IP ADDRESS to the Copper Mountain IP address for this line (10.100.2.148 in Figure 21). 5. On the NAT menu, set up the following: Set NETWORK ADDRESS PORTTRANSLATION to ENABLED. Set PUBLIC IP ADDRESS MODE to SPECIFIED. Set PUBLIC IP ADDRESS the same as LOCAL IP ADDRESS above. From the TRANSLATION TABLE, set up the following (create entries so that the appropriate protocols are translated): Right arrow to create an entry. Keep the defaults to enable TCP translation. Press I over the 1 in the first entry to create entry 2. Change the Protocol to ICMP for this entry. Continue creating entries as appropriate for each application. 61200624L1-1A 6. Arrow back (left arrow) to the IAD/WAN/FRAME RELAY CONFIG/DLCI MAPPING menu. 7. From the BRIDGE MAP menu, set ACTIVE to NO. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 197 Section 4.3 T1 ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Frame Relay Setup 8. Arrow back to the IAD/ROUTER menu. Select CONFIGURATION. 9. On the GLOBAL menu, set up the following: Select IP. Set MODE to ON. Select DHCP SERVER. Set DHCP MODE to ON. From DOMAIN NAMES, set up the following: Set PRIMARY DNS appropriately (172.22.48.47 in Figure 21). Set SECONDARY DNS appropriately (172.22.48.1 in Figure 21). Select BRIDGE. Set MODE to OFF. 10. Arrow back to the ETHERNET menu, and set up the following: Select IP. Set IP ADDRESS appropriately for your LAN (10.0.0.1 in Figure 21). Set SUBNET MASK appropriately. Set DEFAULT GATEWAY to the ATM router connected to the Copper Mountain (10.100.2.145 in Figure 21). Private LAN 10.100.2.148 NAT 10.100.2.148 DHCP 10.0.0.1 10.0.0.2 Host#1 CopperMtn DSLAM TA608 IAD 10.0.0.3 Host#2 ATM DNS Server Router 10.100.2.145 172.22.48.47 172.22.48.1 10.0.0.4 Host#3 Figure 21. Routing with Copper Mountain 198 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A SECTION 4.4 ADSL ATM USER INTERFACE GUIDE The ADSL ATM User Interface Guide is designed for use by network administrators and others who will configure and provision the system. This section provides details unique to the ADSL ATM IADs. It contains an overview, application details, configuration information, and menu descriptions. It is recommended that you review Section 4.1, Commons User Interface Guide in addition to this section. CONTENTS Total Access 600 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Analog Lifeline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Firmware Updates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Voice Over DSL Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Voice Over ATM Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Voice Over DSL Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Configuring the Total Access 600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 System Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 System Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 System Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 System Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Unit Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 CLEI Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Firmware Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Bootcode Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 System Uptime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Date/Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 System Config. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Network Timing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Telnet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Telnet User List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Authen Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Idle Time (1-255) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Maint Port Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Password Protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Network Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Server Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 NT Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 199 Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual SNTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Active. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Adjust for Daylight Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Host Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 System Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Upgrade Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Transfer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 TFTP Server Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 TFTP Server Filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Transfer Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Start Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Abort Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Config Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Transfer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Transfer Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 TFTP Server IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 TFTP Server Filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Current Transfer Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Previous Transfer Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Load and Use Config. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Save Config Remotely. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Start/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Host Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Size (40-1500) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 # of Packets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 # Transmits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 # Receives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 %Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Configuring WAN Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 DSLAM Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Layer One Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Layer Two Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 ATM Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Idle Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Data Scrambling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 ATM Stats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 AP: Tx Cells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 AP: Rx Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 AP: Rx OAM Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 AP: Receive Cells Discarded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 AP: Receive Cell Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 AP: Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 AP: Out Of Cell Delineation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 AAL5: Transmit Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 AAL5: Receive Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 AAL5: Transmit Discarded Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 AAL5: Receive Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 200 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG AAL5: Receive Discarded Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 AAL5: No ATM Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 AAL5: No Data Packets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Clear Stats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Configuring the Router – Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Global . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Static Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 DHCP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Domain Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 UDP Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 UDP Relay List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Address Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Filter Defines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Filter Defines /MAC Filter Defines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Filter Defines /Pattern Filter Defines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Filter Defines /IP Filter Defines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Default Gateway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 RIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Proxy ARP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 MAC Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 WAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 L2 Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 ATM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 VPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 VCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 PCR (Peak Cell Rate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 QOS (Quality of Service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 RFC1483 IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Far - End IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 IP netmask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Local IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 NAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 RIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 RFC 1483 Bridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 PPPoATM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 TX Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 TX Username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 201 Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual TX Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 RX Username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 RX Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Local IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Netmask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Remote IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 NAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 RIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 PPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 VJ Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Max Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Max Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Max Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Encapsulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 WAN-TO-LAN (In) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 In Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 LAN-TO-WAN (Out) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Out Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Configuring the Router – Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 ARP cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Bridge Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 IP Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 LAN Stats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 IP Stats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Configuring the Router – Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Sys log Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 PPP Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Connection Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Network Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Wrap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Clear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Configuring Voice Support – Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Call Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 VPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 VCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Configuring Voice Support – Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Gateway Stats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 PVC Stats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 POTS Stats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Clear Stats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Managing the Modules – Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 NET (ADSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 202 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Tx Atten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Retrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Rx Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Tx Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Rx Latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Tx Latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Standard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 SNR (dB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 FXS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 EC/ADPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Managing the Modules – V.35 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 ATM/FR IWF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 FRF5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 FRF8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Appendix A. Voice Gateway Quick Start Procedure (Voice Turn up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Voice Turn Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Appendix B. RFC1483 Quick Start (IP Routing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 IP Routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Appendix C. RFC1483 Quick Start (IP Routing with NAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 IP Routing with NAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Appendix D. RFC1483 Quick Start (Bridging) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Bridging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 FIGURES Figure 1. Figure 2. Figure 3. Figure 4. Figure 5. Figure 6. Figure 7. Figure 8. Figure 9. Figure 10. Figure 11. Figure 12. Figure 13. Figure 14. Figure 15. Figure 16. Figure 17. Figure 18. Figure 19. Total Access 600 Rear Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice over DSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Configuration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Utility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WAN Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Config Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Router/Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Global Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WAN Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Router/Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Router/Logs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice/Config Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice/Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modules Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V.35 Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 205 207 208 210 213 216 217 218 220 220 225 227 233 234 237 238 239 241 244 203 Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Figure 20. Application Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 204 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual 5. Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG TOTAL ACCESS 600 OVERVIEW The Total Access® 600 is a complete solution Integrated Access Device (IAD) for Voice over ATM (VoATM) applications. The unit includes a modular network interface, Nx64 V.35 interface, 10/100BaseT interface, FXS ports, life-line voice backup, and an optional battery back-up for added security. The Total Access 600 can provision, test, and provide status for any of the voice and data interfaces. All connections are made via the rear panel. In addition to a built-in IP router, the Total Access 600 contains an echo canceller and ADPCM compression modules necessary for VoATM applications. Analog Lifeline The LIFE LINE connector on the rear panel (see Figure 1) provides assured voice for port 1. When a connection to the Voice Gateway is not possible due to loss of power or some other reason, an on-board relay opens and the first port of the voice connector is provided with analog voice from the analog lifeline connection. For the analog lifeline feature to work, the user must subscribe to an analog voice line and it must be connected via the lifeline connector. Figure 22. Total Access 600 Rear Panel Firmware Updates Firmware can be updated by using XMODEM transfer protocol via the unit’s CRAFT port (see Figure 1) or by using TFTP from a network server. (See DLP-007 Upgrading the Firmware Using XMODEM and DLP-008 Upgrading the Firmware Using TFTP.) The terminal menu is the access point to all other operations. Each terminal menu item has several functions and submenus that identify and provide access to specific operations and parameters. These menu selections are described later in this User Interface Guide. See Section 4.1, Commons User Interface Guide for instructions about using the terminal menus. See the Engineering Guidelines section for the CRAFT port connection pin-out.. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 205 Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG 6. Total Access 600 Series System Manual VOICE OVER DSL OVERVIEW Voice over DSL (VoDSL) refers to providing toll quality voice access to the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) over twisted copper pair using DSL. Data can be combined with multiple voice lines over a single medium via DSL, thus yielding many advantages over traditional TDM technologies. Traditional TDM technologies are limited by statically allocating bandwidth. DSL overcomes this by providing a large bandwidth and utilizing other technologies, such as ATM, to dynamically assign bandwidth as it is needed. Because of this, the user is able to add voice and data connections over a DSL line with flexibility and ease. 7. VOICE OVER ATM OVERVIEW Voice over ATM is the technology used to transmit voice conversations over a data network using Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM). There are several potential benefits to moving voice over a data network using ATM. First, the small, fixed-length cells require lower processing overhead. Second, these small, fixed-length cells allow higher transmission speeds than traditional packet switching methods. ATM allocates bandwidth on demand, making it suitable for high-speed connection of voice, data, and video services. Conventional networks carry data in a synchronous manner. Because empty slots are circulating even when the link is not needed, network capacity is wasted. ATM automatically adjusts the network capacity to meet the system needs. 8. VOICE OVER DSL APPLICATION The Total Access 600 connects to a DSLAM via DSL and ATM. The Total Access 600 has a built in echo canceller that provides G.165 echo cancellation. The module can automatically detect ADPCM and enable it as needed. Figure 23 shows a typical VoDSL application. The Total Access 600 connects to the ATM network, via a DSLAM, to provide both voice and high speed data from a single platform. 206 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG SCU 1181015L1 DS3MX 1181020L1 DS3MX 1181020L1 POWER POWER STATUS STATUS TEST TEST LOCKOUT LOCKOUT ON LINE ON LINE MODE HD-10 BRI Mux HD-10 BRI Mux HD-10 BRI Mux HD-10 BRI Mux QFC-C QFC-C QFC-C QFC-C T1-OR T1-OR T1-OR T1-OR HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C POWER POWER POWER HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C POWER PWR PWR PWR PWR 1181200L1 1181200L1 1181200L1 1181200L1 DSX DSX DSX DSX LBK LBK LBK LBK 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 DSX #1 DSX #1 DSX #1 DSX #1 5 5 5 5 DSX #2 DSX #2 DSX #2 DSX #2 6 6 6 6 DSX #3 DSX #3 DSX #3 DSX #3 7 7 7 7 DSX #4 DSX #4 DSX #4 DSX #4 SELECT HST ACO FSE ALM ACO C R A APS APS TEST/ TEST/ ENABLE ENABLE F T 8 9 8 9 8 9 1181300L1 10 10 DSL DSL 1181310L1 1181300L1 1181310L1 1181310L1 1181310L1 1181101L1 PWR DSX LBK TST ALM TX RX + TST ALM A ACT P GRN = NORM YEL = MAN S LINK S ACT ALM A ACT P GRN = NORM YEL = MAN S V.35 RX GRN = NORM YEL = MAN – R X 6V – R X 6V – X 6V – T R X X M O N RX M O N RX TX A ACT A ACT P P P S V.35 TX DATA S GRN = NORM YEL = MAN S VOICE GRN = NORM YEL = MAN BATT TX M O N RX A ACT P S GRN = NORM YEL = MAN TX M O N RX A ACT P S DSX TST TST LP1 LP1 LP2 LP2 ALM TX ALM TX E Q TX E Q RX 1181101L1 PWR DSX LP1 LP2 E Q RX 1181101L1 PWR TST ALM TX E Q RX 1181101L1 DSX LP1 LP2 ALM TX E Q PWR TST LP2 ALM TX RX 1181101L1 DSX LP1 LP2 E Q PWR TST LP1 ALM TX RX 1181101L1 DSX TST LP2 E Q PWR DSX LP1 ALM TX RX E Q RX RX TX M O N RX A GRN = NORM YEL = MAN 1181101L1 PWR TST LP2 E Q RX 1181101L1 DSX LP1 ALM TX E Q PWR TST LP1 LP2 ALM TX RX 1181101L1 DSX TST LP1 LP2 E Q PWR DSX TST ALM TX RX 1181101L1 PWR DSX LP1 LP2 E Q RX 1181101L1 PWR TST ALM TX E Q RX 1181101L1 DSX LP2 ALM TX E Q PWR LP1 LP2 ALM TX RX 1181101L1 TST LP1 LP2 ALM + R DSX TST LP1 ALM T X TX PWR DSX TST LP + T X TX 1181101L1 PWR DSX LBK ALM + T X TX M O N TST ALM A P GRN = NORM YEL = MAN DSX LP ALM PWR 6V TST ACT PWR LBK LP ALM PWR DSX LBK LP 9 10 DSL 1181300L1 DSX 8 10 DSL 1181300L1 PWR TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX M O N RX RX ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN PWR/NET Figure 23. Voice over DSL 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 207 Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG 9. Total Access 600 Series System Manual CONFIGURING THE TOTAL ACCESS 600 System Info The SYSTEM INFO menu provides basic information about the unit and contains data fields for editing information. Figure 24 displays the submenus available when you select this menu item. Figure 24. System Information Menu >System Name Provides a user-configurable text string for the name of the Total Access 600. This name can help you distinguish between different installations. You can enter up to 31 characters in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underbar). This name will appear on the top line of all screens. >System Location Provides a user-configurable text string for the location of the Total Access 600. This field is to help you keep track of the actual physical location of the unit. You can enter up to 31 characters in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underbar). >System Contact Provides a user-configurable text string for a contact name. You can use this field to enter the name, phone number, or E-mail address of a person responsible for the Total Access 600 system. You can enter up to 31 characters in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underbar). >Unit Name Product-specific name for the product assembly. >CLEI Code CLEI code for the product assembly. > Part Number ADTRAN part number for the product assembly. 208 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG >Serial Number Serial number of the product assembly. >Firmware Revision Displays the current firmware revision level of the controller. >Bootcode Revision Displays the bootcode revision. >System Uptime Displays the length of time since the Total Access 600 system reboot. >Date/Time Displays the current date and time, including seconds. This field can be edited. Enter the time in 24-hour format (such as 23:00:00 for 11:00 pm). Enter the date in mm-dd-yyyy format (for example, 10-30-2001). Each time you reset the system, this value resets to 0 days, 0 hours, 0 min and 0 secs. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 209 Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual System Config Set up the Total Access 600 operational configuration from the SYSTEM CONFIG menu. Figure 25 shows the items included in this menu. Figure 25. System Configuration Menu >Network Timing Mode Selects the timing source for the entire system. Network is the only timing option available. Network The system’s clock is recovered from the network (WAN interface). >Telnet Access Sets Telnet access to ON or OFF. >Telnet User List Up to four users can be configured for access to the Total Access 600. Each user can be assigned a security level and time out. Name A text string of the user name for this session. Authen Method The user can be authenticated in two ways: PASSWORD RADIUS The Password field is used to authenticate the user. The Radius client is used for authenticating the user. Password When the authenticating method is PASSWORD, this text string is used for the password. Idle Time (1-255) This sets the amount of time you can be idle before you are automatically logged off. 210 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Level This is the security level granted to the user. >Maint Port Menu The Total Access 600’s VT 100 CRAFT port can be accessed via an RJ-48 located on the rear panel. The setup for these ports is under this menu. Password Protect When set to NO, the maintenance port is not password protected. When YES (def), the Total Access 600 will prompt for a password upon startup. Password This is the text string that is used for comparison when password protecting the maintenance port. By default, no password is entered. If you forget your password, type CHALLENGE in all capital letters. Call technical support and have the displayed CHALLENGE code ready. The security level for the maintenance port is always set to 0. This gives full access to all menus. Passwords are case-sensitive. Instructions for Changing Passwords Step Action 1. Select the PASSWORD field—a new PASSWORD field displays. 2. Type the new password in the ENTER field. 3. Type the new password again in the CONFIRM field. The password can contain up to 12 alphanumeric characters. You can also use spaces and special characters in the password. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 211 Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Baud Rate This is the asynchronous rate that the maintenance port will run. The possible values are 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 (def), 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200. Data Bits This is the asynchronous bit rate that the maintenance port will run. The possible values are 7 or 8 (def) bits. Parity This is the asynchronous parity that the maintenance port will run. The possible values are NONE (def), ODD, or EVEN. Stop Bits This is the stop bit used for the maintenance port. The possible values are 1 (def), 1.5 or 2. >Network Time The Total Access 600 unit time can be entered manually from the SYSTEM INFO menu, or the unit can receive time from an NTP/SNTP server. The NETWORK TIME menu includes all parameters relating to how the unit communicates with the time server. Server Type The server type defines which port the Total Access 600 will listen on to receive timing information from the time server. NT Time The Total Access 600 will receive time from an NT server running SNTP software on its TIME port. SNTP The Total Access 600 will receive time directly from an SNTP server. Active This network timing feature can be turned on and off. It determines whether the unit will request and receive time from a time server. Time Zone There are several time zones available for the time to be displayed in. All time zones are based off of Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Adjust for Daylight Saving Since some areas of the world use Daylight Savings Time, the Total Access 600 is designed to adjust the time on the first Sunday in April and the last Sunday in October accordingly if this option is turned on. Host Address This is the IP address of the time server that the Total Access 600 will request and receive time from. Refresh This is the interval of time between each request the Total Access 600 sends out to the time server. A smaller refresh time guarantees that the unit receives the correct time from the server and corrects possible errors more quickly, but it is more taxing on the machine. A range of refresh times is available (user configurable). 212 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Status This displays the current status of the time negotiation process. If an error is displayed, check all connections and configurations to try to resolve the problem. System Utility Use the SYSTEM UTILITY menu to view and set the system parameters shown in Figure 26. Figure 26. System Utility Menu >Upgrade Firmware Updates firmware when Total Access 600 enhancements are released. Two transfer methods are available for use in updating the Total Access 600 system controller. Transfer Method The two methods for upgrading are XMODEM and TFTP. (See DLP-007, Upgrading the Firmware Using XMODEM and DLP-008, Upgrading the Firmware Using TFTP.) TFTP requires a TFTP server running somewhere on the network. The Total Access 600 starts a TFTP client function which gets the upgrade code from the TFTP server. Selecting XMODEM will load the upgrade code through the CRAFT port using any PC terminal emulator with xmodem capability. TFTP Server Address This is required when the transfer method is TFTP. It is the IP address or domain name (if DNS is configured) of the TFTP server. TFTP Server Filename This is required when the transfer method is TFTP. It is the case-sensitive file name which contains the upgrade code. Transfer Status This appears when TFTP is used. It displays the status of the transfer as it happens. Any error or success message will be displayed here. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 213 Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Start Transfer This activator is used when the configurable items in this menu are complete. Before using START TRANSFER, the Total Access 600 should have a valid IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway (if required). Abort Transfer Use this activator to cancel any TFTP transfer in progress. >Config Transfer Sends a file containing the Total Access 600 configuration to a PC connected to the CRAFT port using XMODEM protocol or to a file on a TFTP server using the TFTP protocol. See DLP-007, Upgrading the Firmware Using XMODEM and DLP-008, Upgrading the Firmware Using TFTP for details. CONFIG TRANSFER also lets you save the Total Access 600 configuration as a backup file, so you can use the same configuration with multiple Total Access 600 units. In addition, CONFIG TRANSFER can retrieve a configuration file from a TFTP server. To support these transfers, ADTRAN delivers a TFTP program with the Total Access 600 called TFTP Server. You can configure any PC running Microsoft Windows with this software, and store a configuration file. Before using CONFIG TRANSFER, the Total Access 600 should have a valid IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway (if required). Only one configuration transfer session (upload or download) can be active at a time. Transfer Method Displays the method used to transfer the configuration file to or from a server. XMODEM and TFTP are supported. Transfer Type Only BINARY transfers are currently supported. TFTP Server IP Address Specifies the IP address of the TFTP server. Get this number from your system administrator. TFTP Server Filename Defines the name of the configuration file that you transfer to or retrieve from the TFTP server. The default name is ta600.cfg, but you can edit this name. 214 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Current Transfer Status Indicates the current status of the update. Previous Transfer Status Indicates the status of the previous update. Load and Use Config Retrieves the configuration file specified in the TFTP SERVER FILENAME field from the server. To start this command, enter Y to begin or enter N to cancel. If you execute this command, the Total Access 600 retrieves the configuration file, reboots, then restarts using the new configuration. Save Config Remotely Saves the configuration file specified in TFTP SERVER FILENAME to the server identified in TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS. To start this command, enter Y to begin or enter N to cancel. Before using this command, you must have identified a valid TFTP server in TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS. >Ping Allows you to send pings (ICMP requests) to hosts. The following items are under this menu: Only one ping session can be active at a time. Start/Stop Activator to start and cancel a ping test. Host Address IP address or domain name (if DNS is configured) of device to receive the ping. Size (40-1500) Total size of the ping to send. Range is 40 to 1500 bytes. 64 is default. # of Packets Total packets to send every 2 seconds. Setting this to 0 allows the client to ping continuously. # Transmits Total packets sent (read only). # Receives Total packets received (read only). 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 215 Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual %Loss Percentage loss based on ping returned from host (read only). Configuring WAN Settings >DSLAM Type Set this to the type of DSLAM the Total Access 600 will be connecting to. >Layer One Interface This is the physical layer protocol used to connect the DSLAM to the Total Access 600. >Layer Two Protocol This is the data link layer protocol used to connect the DSLAM to the Total Access 600. >ATM Config Use the WAN menu (Figure 27) to access the ATM CONFIG menu. Figure 27. WAN Menu 216 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Use the ATM CONFIG menu (Figure 28) to set the parameters listed below the figure. Figure 28. ATM Config Menu Idle Cells The IDLE CELLS format must be configured for either ATM FORUM or ITU. Configuring this setting incorrectly for a particular circuit will cause poor performance at the ATM layer. This setting must match the configuration setting of the ATM switch or DSLAM at the other end of the circuit. Data Scrambling DATA SCRAMBLING can be ENABLED or DISABLED for cell traffic. Configuring this setting incorrectly for a particular circuit will cause poor performance. This setting must match the configuration setting of the ATM switch or DSLAM at the other end of the circuit. >ATM Stats Use the WAN menu (Figure 27 on page 216) to access the ATM STATS menu (Figure 29 on page 218) and view the parameters listed below the figure. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 217 Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Figure 29. ATM Stats Menu AP: Tx Cells This is the number of cells transmitted. AP: Rx Cells This is the number of cells received. AP: Rx OAM Cells This is the number of OAM cells received AP: Receive Cells Discarded This is the number of cells received and discarded. An incrementing count in this field could indicate a configuration problem with the ATM layer. AP: Receive Cell Errors This is the number of cells received with an HEC error. AP: Sync This indicates cell delineation at the ATM layer. AP: Out Of Cell Delineation This indicates loss of cell delineation at the ATM layer. AAL5: Transmit Frames This is the number of AAL5 frames transmitted. AAL5: Receive Frames This is the number of AAL5 frames received. AAL5: Transmit Discarded Frames This is the number of AAL5 frames discarded. AAL5: Receive Errors This is the number of AAL5 errors received. 218 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG AAL5: Receive Discarded Frames This is the number of AAL5 frames discarded. AAL5: No ATM Frames This is for internal use only. AAL5: No Data Packets This is for internal use only. Clear Stats This is used to clear the counters on this menu screen. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 219 Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Configuring the Router – Configuration Use the ROUTER/CONFIGURATION menu (Figure 30) to access the GLOBAL, ETHERNET, and WAN menus. Figure 30. Router/Configuration Menu >Global Use the GLOBAL menu (Figure 31) to set up general router functions. Figure 31. Global Menu IP This is used for general IP configuration. Mode This item controls how the Total Access 600 handles IP routes. When this option is set to ON (def), the Total Access 600 will advertise and listen to routes from other IP routers. If OFF, the route table is still used, but only static routes are used for routing IP packets and only the Ethernet port is used. IP packets can be sent over the WAN, but only when bridged. Static Routes Use this menu to enter static routes to other networks. 220 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual ACTIVE IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK GATEWAY HOPS PRIVATE Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Adds this static route entry to the IP routing table when set to YES and removes it (if it was previously added) if set to NO (def). The IP address of the host or network address of the device being routed to. Determines the bits in the previous IP address that are used. If this is to be a host route, it must be set to all ones (255.255.255.255). The IP address of the router to receive the forwarded IP packet. The number of router hops required to get to the network or host. Maximum distance is 15 hops. When set to NO, the Total Access 600 will advertise this static route using RIP. Setting to YES means that the route is kept private. DHCP Server DHCP MODE DHCP RENEWAL TIME When set to ON, the Total Access 600 acts as a DHCP server and will dynamically assign IP, network mask, default gateway, and DNS addresses to any device which transmits a broadcast DHCP request. The addresses assigned are based on the Total Access 600’s own IP address and will be within the same network. The number of hours that the DHCP server should allow the device before it is required to send a new DHCP request. The default is 15 hours, and 0 represents an infinite lease. Domain Names Enter the Total Access 600's domain name and the primary and secondary DNS servers in this menu. DOMAIN NAME PRIMARY DNS SECONDARY DNS PRIMARY NBNS/WINS SECONDARY NBNS/WINS 61200624L1-1A Text string used to represent the domain name used by the Total Access 600. First server to which domain name requests are sent. Server used as a backup, in case the primary address does not respond to the request. Server to which NT domain name requests are sent. Server used when there is no response from the primary server. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 221 Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual UDP Relay This menu configures the Total Access 600 to act as a UDP relay agent for applications requiring a response from UDP hosts that are not on the same network segment as their clients. Mode When this option is set to ON, the Total Access 600 will act as a relay agent. UDP Relay List Up to four relay destination servers can be specified in this list. RELAY ADDRESS This is the IP address of the server that will receive the relay packet. UDP PORT TYPE STANDARD (def) The following standard UDP protocols are relayed when set: DHCP, TFTP, DNS, NTP (Network Time Protocol, port 123, NBNS (NetBios Name Server, port 137), NBDG (NetBIOS Datagram, port 138), and BootP. SPECIFIED When set, the UDP port (1 to 65535) can be specified in the UDP Port columns (up to three per server). UDP PORT 1, 2, 3 Used for specifying UDP ports to be relayed. These fields only apply when UDP PORT TYPE is set to SPECIFIED. Bridge The BRIDGE menu is used to set up the bridge parameters for the Total Access 600. The bridging function runs at the Media Access Control (MAC) level which allows any protocol packets that run over Ethernet to be forwarded. Bridging can run concurrently with IP. However, when IP routing is active, IP packets (which include ARP packets) are not bridged. Mode This is used to enable the bridge function. Address Table The Total Access 600 automatically maintains a table of MAC addresses detected and associates those addresses with the LAN or WAN port from which they were received. AGING FORWARD POLICY 222 The maximum time an idle MAC address remains in the table before being removed. The value is in minutes. When this parameter is set to UNKNOWN (def), any bridge packet with a destination MAC address that is not in the bridge table is forwarded to all other ports. When set to KNOWN, the packet with the unknown destination MAC address is dropped and is not forwarded. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Security Filter Defines The Total Access 600 can filter packets based on certain parameters within the packet. The method used by the Total Access 600 allows the highest flexibility for defining filters and assigning them to a PVC. The filters are set up in two steps: (1) defining the packet types, and (2) adding them to a list under the PVC. This menu is used to define the individual filter defines based on packet type. Filter Defines /MAC Filter Defines The MAC filter is applied to bridge packets only. Bridge packets which are forwarded by the bridge functionality of the Total Access 600 are defined here. Up to 32 MAC defines can be specified. NAME SRC ADDR SRC MASK DEST ADDR DEST MASK MAC TYPE TYPE MSK Identifies the filter entry. 48-bit MAC source address used for comparison. (hexadecimal format) Bits in the MAC source address which are compared. (hexadecimal format) 48-bit MAC destination address used for comparison. (hexadecimal format) Bits in the MAC destination address used for comparison. (hexadecimal format) 16-bit MAC type field used for comparison. (hexadecimal format) Bits in the MAC type field used for comparison. (hexadecimal format) Filter Defines /Pattern Filter Defines The pattern filter is applied to bridge packets only. That is any packet which is forwarded by the bridge functionality of the Total Access 600. Up to 32 pattern defines can be specified. NAME Identifies the filter entry. OFFSET Offset from beginning of packet of where to start the pattern comparison. PATTERN 64 bits used for comparison. (hexadecimal format) MASK Bits in the pattern to be compared. (hexadecimal format) Filter Defines /IP Filter Defines The IP filter defines apply to any IP packet, whether it is routed or bridged. Up to 32 IP defines can be specified. 61200624L1-1A NAME Identifies the filter entry. IP SRC IP address compared to the source address. (dotted decimal format) © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 223 Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual SRC MASK Bits which are used in the source comparison. (dotted decimal format) IP DEST IP address compared to the destination address. (dotted decimal format) DEST MASK Bits which are used in the destination comparison. (dotted decimal format) SRC PORT IP source port number used for comparison Range: 0 to 65535. (decimal format) SRC PORT CMPR Type of comparison that is performed. = means ports equal to not = means port not equal to > means port greater than < means port less than None - means the source port is not compared DST PORT IP destination port number used for comparison Range: 0 to 65535. (decimal format) DST PORT CMPR Type of comparison that is performed = means ports equal to not = means port not equal to > means port greater than < means port less than None - means the destination port is not compared PROTO Protocol used for comparison. Range: 0 to 255. (decimal format) PROTO CMPR Type of comparison that is performed = means protocols equal to not = means protocols not equal to > means protocols greater than < means protocols less than None means the protocol is not compared TCP EST 224 Yes - only when TCP established © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG No - only when TCP not established Ignore - ignore TCP flags >Ethernet Use the ETHERNET menu (Figure 32) to configure the Ethernet port on the Total Access 600. Figure 32. Ethernet Menu IP This is used to set up the IP addresses for the LAN on the Total Access 600. IP Address The IP address assigned to the Total Access 600's Ethernet port is set here. This address must be unique within the network. Subnet Mask This is the IP network mask that is to be applied to the Total Access 600's Ethernet port. Default Gateway The default gateway is used by the Total Access 600 to send IP packets whose destination address is not found in the route table. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 225 Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual RIP Use this menu to enable RIP on the LAN interface. MODE PROTOCOL METHOD Enables or disables RIP. Specifies the RIP protocol. Choices are V1 (def) (which is RIP version 1) or V2 (RIP version 2). Specifies the way the RIP protocol sends out its advertisements. Choices are given below. NONE All routes in the router table are advertised with no modification of the metrics. SPLIT HORIZON Only routes not learned from this circuit are advertised. POISON REVERSE (def) All routes are advertised, but the routes learned from this port are “poisoned” with an infinite metric. DIRECTION Allows the direction at which RIP advertisements are sent and listened to be specified. TX AND RX (def) RIP advertisements are periodically transmitted and are listened to on this port. TX ONLY RIP advertisements are periodically transmitted but are not listened to on this port. RX ONLY RIP advertisements are not transmitted on this port, but are listened. V2 SECRET Enter the secret used by RIP version 2 here. Proxy ARP This feature allows the network portion of a group of addresses to be shared among several physical network segments. The ARP protocol provides a way for devices to create a mapping between physical addresses and logical IP addresses. Proxy ARP makes use of this mapping feature by instructing a router to answer ARP requests as a "proxy" for the IP addresses behind one of its ports. The device which sent the ARP request will then correctly assume that it can reach the requested IP address by sending packets to the physical address that was returned. This technique effectively hides the fact that a network has been (further) subnetted. If this option is set to YES, when an ARP request is received on the Ethernet port the address is looked up in the IP routing table. If the forwarding port is not on the Ethernet port and the route is not the default route, the Total Access 600 will answer the request with its own hardware address. MAC Address This is a read-only MAC address programmed at ADTRAN. 226 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG >WAN Use the WAN menu (Figure 33) to configure WAN settings on the Total Access 600. Figure 33. WAN Menu L2 Protocol Displays the current L2 protocol - ATM (Read Only). ATM Use the ATM menu to setup Data PVCs for the router. Description This is the text description for the PVC. VPI ATM virtual port identifier. VCI This is the ATM virtual channel identifier. PCR (Peak Cell Rate) Limits transmitted cells. QOS (Quality of Service) Indicates this PVC’s traffic class. Protocol This is the protocol supported on the PVC. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 227 Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual RFC1483 IP Use this selection to support IP on this PVC. (These settings only take effect when RFC 1483 is the selected protocol.) Active This selection enables IP on this PVC. Far - End IP Address This is the address of the NEXT hop router on this interface. IP netmask This is the network mask used for this interface. Local IP Address This is the IP address for this PVC. NAT Use this menu to set up and use Network Address Translation on this interface. NETWORK ADDRESS PORT TRANSLATION PUBLIC IP ADDRESS MODE TRANSLATION TABLE PUBLIC ADDRESS MODE PROTOCOL PUBLIC PORT MODE 228 By enabling port translation, IP packets are modified as they pass through this interface. During transmission, private addresses are translated into a single public (NAPT) IP address. Incoming packets are translated from the public to private address based on the protocol port numbers. Once enabled, you must set up NAT for use. The port translation requires at least a single real IP address for translating. This value can use the IP assigned to the interface (or assigned via layer 2 protocol like PPP), obtained using DHCP client, or statically specified on this menu. If the address cannot be learned, then it must be specified in order for the translation to work. Add translation entries to "fine tune" special protocols or specify private addresses. The public IP address used for this translation entry can be the NAPT IP address assigned to the link or can be specified. You specify an address to direct packets with certain protocols to different servers. The upper layer protocol that is to be monitored for translation. For TCP and UDP, a port number must also be specified. The public destination port associated with this entry can be specified to add more control over certain types of traffic. The default, ANY PORT, covers all port types. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual PRIVATE ADDRESS MODE PRIVATE PORT MODE TRANSLATE BODY NAT VIEW NAPT ADDRESS ENTRY COUNT ENTRY OVERFLOW COUNT Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG The private IP address can be specified to steer certain protocols and ports to specific servers in the private network. Likewise, internal hosts can be steered to certain servers on the public network. A new request from the public network matching this entry’s public parameters will be dropped if this mode is set to ANY INTERNAL. The private destination port associated with this entry can be specified to add more control over certain types of traffic. Leave as ANY PORT to cover all port types. By default, the application payload in the packet is scanned for occurrences of the private/public IP address in binary or ASCII form. Set this to No for applications where this will cause problems. Shows the protocols that are actively being translated. Represents the public address that is being used as the NAPT address. The number of entries in the NAT table. A count of the dropped entries due to low memory. RIP Use this menu to enable RIP on the WAN interface. (See RIP on page 226 for description of options.) RFC 1483 Bridge This is used to enable bridge mode on this PVC. PPPoATM The Total Access 600 uses the PPPoATM profile to specify the profile used when connected using PPP. Authentication The authentication menu contains the required parameters for the authentication of the PPP peer and for being authenticated by the PPP peer. Authentication is applied between the Total Access 600 and the PPP peer as follows: TX Method This parameter specifies how the Total Access 600 is to be authenticated by the PPP peer. There are four possible selections. NONE (def) The connection will not allow the PPP peer to PAP, CHAP, OR EAP CHAP OR EAP EAP 61200624L1-1A authenticate it. The connection can be authenticated using PAP, CHAP or EAP. The connection can be authenticated using CHAP or EAP only. The connection will only allow authentication by the peer using EAP. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 229 Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual TX Username This is the username that is used when being authenticated by the PPP peer. TX Password This is the password or secret that is used when being authenticated by the PPP peer. RX Username This is the username used to authenticate the PPP peer. RX Password This is the password or secret that is used to authenticate the PPP peer. IP The IP menu contains the parameters for exchanging IP data with the PPP peer. Mode Setting to ON (def) will permit this connection profile to negotiate PPP IPCP with the PPP peer for exchanging of IP packets. Local IP This is the IP address that is assigned to the PPP link when using numbered links. Leaving this as 0.0.0.0 means the Total Access 600 will determine its IP address using PPP IPCP. If the far end router does not assign an IP address, the PPP link is left unnumbered. Netmask This network mask is applied to the IP/Local IP address for determining the PPP peer's network. If left as 0.0.0.0, a standard network mask is used. Remote IP The PPP peer's IP address or network can be set here, if known. Leaving this at 0.0.0.0 means that the Total Access 600 will determine the PPP peer's IP and network using the PPP IPCP. NAT The Total Access 600 can perform Network Address Translation. This feature is most widely used when connecting to the Internet. The Ethernet network can consist of private network numbers. When this profile is connected, all IP addresses on the Ethernet side are translated into the one real IP address negotiated with the PPP peer (ISP). Multiple stations on the Ethernet side can access the Internet simultaneously. Setting this option to ON will cause the Total Access 600 to perform NAT. In the OFF (def) position, the unit will route across the connection normally. Route The IP parameters are configured in this menu. Usually the Total Access 600 will automatically discover the PPP peer's networks using PPP IPCP and/or RIP. • Route/Static Route Selecting yes will add a static route to the remote peer to the route table. • Route/Private Selecting yes will prevent this route from being advertised. 230 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG • Route/Hops (1-16) This value is the metric or number of hops that RIP will use in advertising the static route. The range is 1 to 16, where 1 is the default. The value 16 is considered an infinite distance (poisoned route). • Route/Force IP When set to YES, the Total Access 600 will force the PPP peer to use the IP address in the LOCAL IP for this profile as its WAN IP address. Normally this is set in the NO (def) position. RIP The RIP parameters can be adjusted from their defaults under this menu. • Mode The Total Access 600 performs RIP over the WAN connection when this is set to ON (def). • Protocol The Total Access 600 performs version 1, V1 (def), or version 2, V2, of RIP on this WAN connection. • Method SPLIT HORIZON POISON REVERSE (def) NONE Only routes not learned on the WAN connection are advertised. All routes are advertised, including routes learned from the WAN connection. These routes are poisoned. All routes are advertised, including routes learned from the WAN connection. No attempt is made to poison these routes. • Direction TX AND RX (def) TX ONLY RX ONLY RIP advertisements are transmitted and listened to on the WAN connection. RIP advertisements are transmitted and not listened to. RIP advertisements are listened to but not transmitted. • Triggered When set to YES, only IP RIP updates are sent when the routing table has changed and learned routes are not "aged." When set to NO (def), updates are sent periodically. • Retain When this Connection List entry is disconnected and this parameter is set to YES, all routes learned from this WAN connection are retained and their routing interface is set to idle. PPP The Total Access 600 supports the IETF standards for the Point-to-Point Protocol. The PPP state machine running in the Total Access 600 can be fine-tuned to support many applications that can be employed. The configurable items under this menu can be changed from their default values for special cases. VJ Compression When this item is set to ON, the Total Access 600 will perform TCP/IP header compression known as Van Jacobson compression to the PPP peer. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 231 Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Max Config This value is the number of unanswered configuration requests that should be transmitted before giving up on a call. The possible values are 5, 10 (def), 15 and 20. Max Timer This value is the number of seconds to wait between unanswered configuration requests. The possible values are 1 sec, 2 secs (def), 3 secs, 5 secs and 10 secs. Max Failure Due to the nature of PPP, configuration options may not be agreed upon between two PPP peers. This value is the number of configuration-naks that should occur before an option is configuration-rejected. This allows a connection to succeed that might otherwise fail. The possible values are 5 (def), 10, 15 and 20. Encapsulation This is the PPP encapsulation. (LLC or VC-Mux) Filters The Total Access 600 can block packets in and out of a WAN port by use of the filters. They are set up in two steps: 1) define the types of packets that would be of interest in the CONFIGURATION/GLOBAL/SECURITY/FILTER DEFINES menu, and 2) set up the filter type and combination of defines that will cause a packet block. WAN-TO-LAN (In) The packets which come into the Total Access 600 can be filtered in three ways: DISABLED (def) BLOCK ALL FORWARD ALL Turns off packet input filtering. No incoming packets are blocked. All incoming packets from the WAN are blocked except as defined in the FILTERS/IN EXCEPTIONS list. All incoming packets from the WAN are not blocked except as defined in the FILTERS/IN EXCEPTIONS list. In Exceptions This is a list of up to 32 filter entries which can be combined using the operations field. The operations are performed in the order they appear on the list. ACTIVE TYPE MAC PATTERN IP 232 Turns this entry active when set to ON. Selects the filter define list to reference: from the CONFIGURATION/GLOBAL/SECURITY/FILTER DEFINES/MAC FILTER DEFINES list. from the CONFIGURATION/GLOBAL/SECURITY/FILTER DEFINES/PATTERN FILTER DEFINES list. from the CONFIGURATION/GLOBAL/SECURITY/FILTER DEFINES/IP FILTER DEFINES list. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual IPX FILTER LIST NAME NEXT OPER END AND OR Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG from the CONFIGURATION/GLOBAL/SECURITY/FILTER DEFINES/IPX FILTER DEFINES list. Selects between filters defined in the list. The next operation to use to combine with the next filter in the list: the last filter to combination. logically AND this filter with the next filter in the list. logically OR this filter with the next filter in the list. LAN-TO-WAN (Out) The packets which come out toward the WAN from the TA600 can be filtered in three ways: DISABLED (def) BLOCK ALL FORWARD ALL Turns off packet input filtering. No outgoing packets are blocked. All outgoing packets to the WAN are blocked except as defined in the FILTERS/OUT EXCEPTIONS list. All outgoing packets to the WAN are not blocked except as defined in the FILTERS/OUT EXCEPTIONS list. Out Exceptions This is a list of up to 32 filter entries. The setup is exactly the same as the FILTERS/IN EXCEPTIONS list. Configuring the Router – Status Use the ROUTER/STATUS menu to view and set the parameters shown in Figure 34. The ROUTER/STATUS screens give the user useful information for debugging the current routes in the Total Access 600. Figure 34. Router/Status Menu 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 233 Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual >Session This menu maintains statistics about the active ATM PVCs. >ARP cache This is a listing of the currently connected Ethernet port on the LAN. >Bridge Table This shows the detected MAC addresses and the interface to which they are associated. >IP Routes This shows the current routes in the Total Access 600 and their use. >LAN Stats This shows traffic over the LAN interface. >IP Stats This shows IP traffic through the Total Access 600. Configuring the Router – Logs The Logs menu (Figure 35) contains logs displaying important information about the running condition of the Total Access 600. The logs can be set to capture diagnostics of error conditions only by way of a log level. The levels are divided up as follows: level 0 - Fatal event (causes reset) level 1 - Critical event level 2 - Error event level 3 - Warning event level 4 - Notify event level 5 - Informational event level 6 - Debugging event Figure 35. Router/Logs Menu 234 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Sys log Host Set this to the IP address or domain name (if DNS configured) of the sys log host device. All log events are sent to this device. PPP Log Information pertaining to the PPP negotiation and authentication is logged in the PPP log. Connection Log Information pertaining to the call placement and answering is logged in the Connection log. Network Log Information pertaining to routing protocols is placed in this log. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 235 Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Each log (PPP log, Connection log, and Network log) contains the following elements. Active When set to YES (def), PPP events below or equal the log level are logged into the log. Wrap When set to YES (def), new PPP events will overwrite old PPP events when the log is full. All logging will stop when the log is full and set to NO. Level In order to log events, they must be at or below this level. Range is 0 to 6. The default is 3. View This menu displays the log list. The fields are as follows: DATE/TIME Date and time event occurred. LEVEL Level associated with this event (0-6). MESSAGE Text message for this event. If message is too long to fit on the line, another event appears below it continuing the message. Clear This clears the log when activated. 236 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Configuring Voice Support – Config Use the VOICE/CONFIG menu to view and set the parameters shown in Figure 36. Figure 36. Voice/Config Menu >Call Control The CALL CONTROL setting is used to configure the correct Voice Gateway protocol for voice signaling control between the Total Access 600 and the configured Gateway. The CALL CONTROL setting must be configured correctly before the voice circuits will work correctly. The Total Access 600 supports Jetstream, Tollbridge, and CopperCom Voice Gateways. >VPI The VPI setting is used to configure the Total Access 600 virtual path setting used to communicate with the configured Voice Gateway. >VCI The VCI setting is used to configure the Total Access 600 virtual circuit setting used to communicate with the configured Voice Gateway. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 237 Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Configuring Voice Support – Status Use the VOICE/STATUS menu to view and set the parameters shown in Figure 37. Figure 37. Voice/Status Menu >Gateway Stats The GATEWAY STATS menu shows the current state of the communication link between the Total Access 600 and the Voice Gateway. The Gateway Link is indicated as UP or DOWN. A count of management messages is indicated along with the number of active calls in progress. >PVC Stats The PVC STATS menu shows the current state of the virtual circuit used between the Voice Gateway and the Total Access 600 IAD for voice signaling and voice payload delivery. >POTS Stats The POTS STATS menu shows real-time indication status of each voice port on the Total Access 600. From this menu, on a per port basis, the user can determine which ports are active/inactive. Several statistics at this menu are used only for internal ADTRAN development. Task, Inserts, and Drops indicators are for internal use only. >Clear Stats The CLEAR STATS menu can be used to clear the counters used for Voice Status menus. 238 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Managing the Modules – Modules Use the MODULES menu to view and set the parameters shown in Figure 38. The Total Access 600 contains four fixed modules: The WAN/Network interface, FXS, Echo Canceller/ADPCM module, and the V.35 interface. The MODULES table allows management of the on-board modules in the Total Access 600. The table contains MENU, ALARM, TEST, and STATUS indicators/menus customized for each module. Figure 38. Modules Menu >NET (ADSL) Menu Tx Atten Used to select transmit attenuation level. Retrain Causes the unit to retrain. Status Rx Rate Downstream data rate. Tx Rate Upstream data rate. Rx Latency Fast or interleaved. Tx Latency Fast or interleaved. Standard ITU G.922.1 (G.DMT), ANSI T1.413, or ITU G.922.2 (G.lite). 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 239 Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual SNR (dB) Signal-to-noise ratio. >FXS Refer to Section 4.7, FXS User Interface Guide. >EC/ADPCM Refer to Section 4.7, FXS User Interface Guide. 240 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Managing the Modules – V.35 Setup Use the V.35 SETUP menu to view and set the parameters shown in Figure 39. Figure 39. V.35 Setup Menu CHANNEL RATE and EIA settings are supported via this menu option. For all typical applications, these settings are left in their default states. >ATM/FR IWF This menu contains the setup and status for the ATM/Frame Relay interworking functions. Mode The MODE setting configures the V.35 port for FRF5 or FRF8 operation, depending upon the application being supported. FRF5 This is also known as Network Interworking. Use this mode for Frame Relay over ATM. FRF8 This is also known as Service Interworking. In this mode, the Total Access 600 performs a translation between Frame Relay and ATM protocols. Configuration The CONFIGURATION menu is used to support the configuration of Frame-to-ATM interworking, signaling formats, timeout values, and PVC settings. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 241 Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual The following settings are used for FRF5. LAN FR MAINT PROTOCOL LAN FR POLL TIMEOUT T392 (5-30) FRN PORT CONFIG 242 Frame Relay maintenance or signaling protocol between local V.35 port and the attached DTE port, support ANSI Annex A, CCITT Q933 Annex D, CISCO LMI or Static (no signaling). T392 for signaling protocol, typical value 15. No meaning if Maint Protocol is Static. Logical Frame Relay ports over ATM. Up to 4 ports are supported with each port supporting up to 4 DLCI mappings. Go to NUM field. Typing "i" or "I" will insert another entry, and typing "d" or "D" will delete one entry. NAME To identify your port. ATM VPI Specifies the virtual path over which this logical port is running. ATM VCI Specifies the virtual circuit over which this logical port is running. DE MAP Frame Relay to ATM DE mapping; default value (Frn Only, ATM 0) suggested. CLPI MAP ATM to Frame Relay CLPI map; default value (Frn Only) suggested. D/C Set D/C field in the header to 0 or 1. HEADER Header format; only 2 bytes supported now. MAINT PROTOCOL Maintenance or signaling protocol over this logical Frame Relay port. Support Annex A, Annex D, CISCO LMI or Static. MUX MODE Many DLCIs or one DLCI mapping over this port. DLCI MAP Actual DLCI mappings. LAN DLCI The DLCI configured over local V.35 Frame Relay port. NET DLCI The DLCI configured over the WAN side logical Frame Relay port. ACTIVE Always active, not configurable. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG The following settings are used for FRF8. LAN FR MAINT PROTOCOL LAN FR POLL TIMEOUT T392 (5-30) FR/ATM PVC MAPPING 61200624L1-1A Frame Relay maintenance or signaling protocol between local V.35 port and the attached DTE port, support ANSI Annex A, CCITT Q933 Annex D, CISCO LMI or Static (no signaling). T392 for signaling protocol, typical value 15. No meaning if Maint Protocol is Static. Up to 4 mappings are supported. FR DLCI Frame Relay DLCI on V.35 port. ATM VPI Specifies the virtual path to which DLCI is mapped. ATM VCI Specifies the virtual circuit to which DLCI is mapped. TRANSLATE Translate or transparent mode between Frame Relay frames and ATM cells. DE MAP Map Frame Relay DE bit to ATM CLPI bit, Always 0, Always 1 or Convert each other. FECN MAP Map Frame Relay FECN bit to ATM EFCI bit, Always 0, Always 1 or Convert each other. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 243 Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Appendix A. Voice Gateway Quick Start Procedure (Voice Turn up) A typical VoATM application (see Figure 40) uses a Total Access 600 connected to an ATM network. For voice applications, a Voice Gateway is needed to interface with the PSTN. Jetstream, Tollbridge, and CopperCom are popular Gateway types. SCU 1181015L1 DS3MX 1181020L1 DS3MX 1181020L1 POWER POWER STATUS STATUS TEST TEST LOCKOUT LOCKOUT ON LINE ON LINE MODE HD-10 BRI Mux HD-10 BRI Mux HD-10 BRI Mux HD-10 BRI Mux QFC-C QFC-C QFC-C QFC-C T1-OR T1-OR T1-OR T1-OR HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C POWER POWER POWER HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C POWER PWR PWR PWR PWR 1181200L1 1181200L1 DSX DSX LBK LBK 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 SELECT HST ACO FSE ALM ACO C R A APS APS TEST/ TEST/ ENABLE ENABLE F T 9 9 1181200L1 DSX LBK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1181200L1 1181300L1 1181300L1 1181300L1 1181310L1 1181300L1 DSX LBK PWR DSX #1 5 6 PWR + #1 DSX #1 DSX #1 #2 DSX #2 DSX #2 DSX #2 #3 DSX #3 DSX #3 DSX #3 DSX #4 DSX #4 DSX #4 DSX #4 8 TST 6V TST ALM 9 ACT ACT P GRN = NORM YEL = MAN TX RX TST ALM A S ACT P GRN = NORM YEL = MAN LINK S ACT P GRN = NORM YEL = MAN S V.35 RX GRN = NORM YEL = MAN – 1181310L1 DSX 1181310L1 DSX LBK 1181101L1 R X 6V – R X 6V – R X 6V – T R X X M O N M O N RX RX A ACT A ACT A ACT P P S S V.35 TX S TX TX M O N DATA S TX M O N RX S VOICE GRN = NORM YEL = MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN BATT GRN=NORM YEL=MAN TX M O N RX ACT P GRN = NORM YEL = MAN TX M O N RX ACT GRN = NORM YEL = MAN TST LP1 LP1 LP2 LP2 ALM TX TX E Q E Q RX RX TX M O N RX P GRN = NORM YEL = MAN DSX TST E Q RX 1181101L1 PWR DSX ALM TX E Q RX 1181101L1 PWR LP1 LP2 ALM TX E Q RX 1181101L1 TST LP1 LP2 ALM TX E Q DSX TST LP2 ALM TX RX PWR DSX LP1 LP2 1181101L1 PWR TST LP1 E Q RX 1181101L1 DSX TST ALM TX E Q PWR DSX LP2 ALM TX RX 1181101L1 PWR LP1 LP2 E Q RX 1181101L1 TST LP1 ALM TX E Q DSX TST LP2 ALM TX RX PWR DSX LP1 LP2 1181101L1 PWR TST LP1 E Q RX 1181101L1 DSX TST ALM TX E Q RX PWR DSX LP1 LP2 ALM TX 1181101L1 PWR TST LP2 E Q RX 1181101L1 DSX LP1 ALM TX E Q PWR TST LP2 ALM TX RX 1181101L1 DSX LP1 LP2 ALM + T X TX PWR TST LP1 ALM + T X TX 1181101L1 DSX TST LP ALM PWR DSX LBK LP + T X M O N A ACT P ALM A TX RX A TST ALM A ALM PWR DSX DSX DSX 7 4 10 LP ALM PWR 3 DSL LBK LP 2 10 DSL DSX LBK 1 10 DSL 1181310L1 PWR DSX 10 DSL TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX M O N RX RX ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN PWR/NET Figure 40. Application Diagram To configure a Total Access 600 for use with the Voice Gateway, you need to know the VPI and VCI to be used on the ATM network. You also need to know the format for Idle Cells and whether Data Scrambling is used on this ATM network. The following procedure will help you navigate the Total Access 600 menus for configuring the necessary elements for VoATM with the Voice Gateway. 244 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Voice Turn Up Step Action 1. From the Total Access 600 main menu, select the WAN menu. Select DSLAM TYPE and select the name of the DSLAM type you are using. (At this point you need to back out of the menu to save the changes. The unit will need to reboot if it was not previously configured for this DSLAM type.) 2. Select DSL RATE CONFIG (BIT RATE) and change the setting to match that in your DSLAM. (If this field is read-only, allow a few seconds for autobaud to expire and the field will change to writeable.) 3. Select WAN, and then select the ATM CONFIG menu. 4. Enter the IDLE CELLS format for your network. 5. Set DATA SCRAMBLING appropriately for your network. 6. Back all the way out to the top level Total Access 600 menu, and then select the VOICE menu. (From this menu, the appropriate Voice information for working with the Voice Gateway is entered.) 7. Select CONFIG, and from the CONFIG menu, enter the Gateway type under CALL CONTROL and enter the VPI and VCI values for communicating with that Gateway. CALL CONTROL should be set to the Gateway type, and the VPI and VCI values should be set appropriately for your network. 8. To verify correct setup, use the STATUS menu (under the VOICE menu) to look at the current status of the voice connection. Under STATUS, you can view the GATEWAY STATS and information about the voice PVC along with information about the POTs ports available on the Gateway. The GATEWAY STATS menu should show the Gateway Link is up (if everything is configured correctly). A visual inspection of the VOICE LED on the front panel will also yield the status. Green = Up. Red = Down. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 245 Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Appendix B. RFC1483 Quick Start (IP Routing) The Total Access 600 allows for complete integration of voice and data delivery from one compact platform (see Figure 41). Once you have completed the voice turn up procedure from the previous example, adding data to the circuit requires some additional setup. TX RX LINK V.35 RX V.35 TX DATA VOICE BATT PWR/NET Figure 41. Application Diagram To configure a Total Access 600 for IP routing, you need to know the VPI and VCI values for the data circuit on your network. You also need the IP address of the next hop router in the circuit. The table on the next page shows how to configure the Total Access 600 for IP Routing. .. IP Routing Step 246 Action 1. From the Total Access 600 main menu, select the WAN menu. (Here you set up the ATM network.) 2. Select the ATM CONFIG menu. 3. Enter the IDLE CELLS format for your network. 4. Set DATA SCRAMBLING appropriately for your network. 5. Back all the way out to the top level Total Access 600 menu, and then select the ROUTER menu. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG IP Routing 6. Select CONFIGURATION. From the CONFIGURATION menu, you will set up addresses for your LAN and WAN. For basic IP routing, use all the default values from the GLOBAL menu. 7. From the ETHERNET menu, enter the IP menu to enter your LAN configuration. 8. Enter your LAN IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK, and DEFAULT GATEWAY information. For this example, the IP ADDRESS is 192.168.1.2, the SUBNET MASK is 255.255.255.0, and the DEFAULT GATEWAY is 10.25.4.10. 9. Arrow back to the main ROUTER CONFIGURATION menu, and select the WAN menu and then the ATM menu. (Here you will enter your data PVC information.) 10. Create a new PVC by entering the menu. Enter your VPI and VCI values. 11. From the RFC1483 IP menu, enter your LAN information. For this example, the FAR END IP ADDRESS is 10.25.4.9, the IP NETMASK is 255.255.255.252, and the LOCAL IP ADDRESS is 10.25.4.10. 12. 61200624L1-1A Arrow back to the top level Total Access 600 menu to activate your changes. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 247 Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Appendix C. RFC1483 Quick Start (IP Routing with NAT) To illustrate the use of NAT, consider the example from Appendix B. To set up a single public address that will be used to access the public network, you will use the NAT menu on the WAN/ATM/RFC1483 IP menu. IP Routing with NAT Step 248 Action 1. From the NAT menu, set NETWORK ADDRESS PORT TRANSLATION to ENABLED. (This will enable translation and allow you to enter the NAT options.) 2. Set PUBLIC IP ADDRESS MODE to SPECIFIED so you can enter your public address. During transmission, private addresses are translated into this public (NAPT) address. 3. You will also need to set up the Translation Table to do translation on the body of the packets for certain protocols, such as FTP, to work correctly. 4. From the TRANSLATION TABLE menu, create a new entry by arrowing into the table. 5. For PUBLIC ADDRESS MODE, select NAPT ADDRESS to use the previously specified public address. 6. For PROTOCOL, select TCP. 7. Make sure that TRANSLATE BODY is set to YES. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG Appendix D. RFC1483 Quick Start (Bridging) The Total Access 600 allows for complete integration of voice and data delivery from one compact platform. Once you have completed the voice turn up procedure from the previous example, adding data to the circuit requires some additional setup. To configure a Total Access 600 for Bridging, you need to know the VPI and VCI values for the data circuit on your network. Bridging Step Action 1. From the Total Access 600 main menu, select the WAN menu. (Here you set up the ATM network.) 2. Select the ATM CONFIG menu. 3. Enter the IDLE CELLS format for your network. 4. Set DATA SCRAMBLING appropriately for your network. 5. Back all the way out to the top level Total Access 600 menu, and then select the ROUTER menu. 6. Enter the CONFIGURATION menu. From this menu, you will set up addresses for your LAN and WAN. For basic IP routing, use all the default values from the GLOBAL menu. 7. From the ETHERNET menu, enter the IP menu to enter your LAN configuration. 8. Enter your LAN IP ADDRESS and SUBNET MASK. For this example, the IP ADDRESS is 192.168.1.2 and the SUBNET MASK is 255.255.255.0. This is not required, but will allow Telnet configuration and TFTP upgrades from the LAN. 9. Arrow back to the main ROUTER CONFIGURATION menu, and select the WAN menu and then the ATM menu. (Here you will enter your data PVC information.) 10. Create a new PVC by entering the menu. Enter your VPI and VCI values. 11. Disable IP on the RFC1483 IP menu and enable Bridging on the RFC1483 BRIDGE menu. (This enables the Total Access 600 as a bridge.) 12. Arrow back to the top level Total Access 600 menu to activate your changes. All packets that come in on the Ethernet will be forwarded on the WAN. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 249 Section 4.4 ADSL ATM UIG 250 Total Access 600 Series System Manual © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A SECTION 4.5 SDSL ATM USER INTERFACE GUIDE The SDSL ATM User Interface Guide is designed for use by network administrators and others who will configure and provision the system. This section provides details unique to the SDSL ATM IADs. It contains an overview, application details, configuration information, and menu descriptions. It is recommended that you review Section 4.1, Commons User Interface Guide in addition to this section. CONTENTS Total Access 600 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Analog Lifeline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Firmware Updates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Voice Over DSL Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Voice Over ATM Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Voice Over DSL Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Configuring the Total Access 600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 System Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 System Config. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 System Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Configuring WAN Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Configuring the Router – Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Configuring the Router – Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Configuring the Router – Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Configuring Voice Support – Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Configuring Voice Support – Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Managing the Modules – Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Managing the Modules – V.35 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Appendix A. Voice Gateway Quick Start Procedure (Voice Turn up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Appendix B. RFC1483 Quick Start (IP Routing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Appendix C. RFC1483 Quick Start (IP Routing with NAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Appendix D. RFC1483 Quick Start (Bridging) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Appendix E. Routing in HDIA Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 FIGURES Figure 1. Figure 2. Figure 3. Figure 4. Figure 5. Figure 6. Figure 7. Figure 8. Figure 9. Total Access 600 Rear Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice over DSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Configuration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Utility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WAN Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Config Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Router/Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 253 255 256 258 261 264 265 266 268 251 Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Figure 10. Figure 11. Figure 12. Figure 13. Figure 14. Figure 15. Figure 16. Figure 17. Figure 18. Figure 19. Figure 20. Figure 21. 252 Total Access 600 Series System Manual Global Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WAN Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Router/Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Router/Logs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice/Config Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice/Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modules Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V.35 Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Routing with Copper Mountain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 268 273 275 281 282 284 285 286 287 290 292 297 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual 1. Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG TOTAL ACCESS 600 OVERVIEW The Total Access 600 is a complete solution Integrated Access Device (IAD) for Voice over ATM (VoATM) applications. The unit includes a modular network interface, Nx64 V.35 interface, 10/100BaseT interface, FXS ports, life-line voice backup, and an optional battery back-up for added security. The Total Access 600 can provision, test, and provide status for any of the voice and data interfaces. All connections are made via the rear panel. In addition to a built-in IP router, the Total Access 600 contains an echo canceller and ADPCM compression modules necessary for VoATM applications. Analog Lifeline The LIFE LINE connector on the rear panel (see Figure 1) provides assured voice for port 1. When a connection to the Voice Gateway is not possible due to loss of power or some other reason, an on-board relay opens and the first port of the voice connector is provided with analog voice from the analog lifeline connection. For the analog lifeline feature to work, the user must subscribe to an analog voice line and it must be connected via the lifeline connector. Figure 1. Total Access 600 Rear Panel Firmware Updates Firmware can be updated by using XMODEM transfer protocol via the unit’s CRAFT port (see Figure 1) or by using TFTP from a network server. (See DLP-007, Upgrading the Firmware Using XMODEM and DLP-008, Upgrading the Firmware Using TFTP.) The terminal menu is the access point to all other operations. Each terminal menu item has several functions and submenus that identify and provide access to specific operations and parameters. These menu selections are described later in this User Interface Guide. See Section 1, Commons User Interface Guide for instructions about navigating the terminal menus. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 253 Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual See Section 2, Engineering Guidelines for the CRAFT port connection pin-out. 2. VOICE OVER DSL OVERVIEW Voice over DSL (VoDSL) refers to providing toll quality voice access to the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) over twisted copper pair using DSL. Data can be combined with multiple voice lines over a single medium via DSL, thus yielding many advantages over traditional TDM technologies. Traditional TDM technologies are limited by statically allocating bandwidth. DSL overcomes this by providing a large bandwidth and utilizing other technologies, such as ATM, to dynamically assign bandwidth as it is needed. Because of this, the user is able to add voice and data connections over a DSL line with flexibility and ease. 3. VOICE OVER ATM OVERVIEW Voice over ATM is the technology used to transmit voice conversations over a data network using Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM). There are several potential benefits to moving voice over a data network using ATM. First, the small, fixed-length cells require lower processing overhead. Second, these small, fixed-length cells allow higher transmission speeds than traditional packet switching methods. ATM allocates bandwidth on demand, making it suitable for high-speed connection of voice, data, and video services. Conventional networks carry data in a synchronous manner. Because empty slots are circulating even when the link is not needed, network capacity is wasted. ATM automatically adjusts the network capacity to meet the system needs. 4. VOICE OVER DSL APPLICATION The Total Access 600 connects to a DSLAM via DSL and ATM. The Total Access 600 has a built in echo canceller that provides G.165 echo cancellation. The module can automatically detect ADPCM and enable it as needed. Figure 2 shows a typical VoDSL application. The Total Access 600 connects to the ATM network, via a DSLAM, to provide both voice and high speed data from a single platform. 254 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG SCU 1181015L1 DS3MX 1181020L1 DS3MX 1181020L1 POWER POWER STATUS STATUS TEST TEST LOCKOUT LOCKOUT ON LINE ON LINE MODE HD-10 BRI Mux HD-10 BRI Mux HD-10 BRI Mux HD-10 BRI Mux QFC-C QFC-C QFC-C QFC-C T1-OR T1-OR T1-OR T1-OR HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C POWER POWER POWER HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C POWER PWR PWR PWR PWR 1181200L1 1181200L1 1181200L1 1181200L1 DSX DSX DSX DSX LBK LBK LBK LBK 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 DSX #1 DSX #1 DSX #1 DSX #1 5 5 5 5 DSX #2 DSX #2 DSX #2 DSX #2 6 6 6 6 DSX #3 DSX #3 DSX #3 DSX #3 7 7 7 7 DSX #4 DSX #4 DSX #4 DSX #4 SELECT HST ACO FSE ALM ACO C R A APS APS TEST/ TEST/ ENABLE ENABLE F T 8 9 8 9 8 9 1181300L1 10 10 DSL DSL 1181310L1 1181300L1 1181310L1 1181310L1 1181310L1 1181101L1 PWR DSX LBK TST ALM TX RX + TST ALM A ACT P GRN = NORM YEL = MAN S LINK S ACT ALM A ACT P GRN = NORM YEL = MAN S V.35 RX GRN = NORM YEL = MAN – R X 6V – R X 6V – X 6V – T R X X M O N RX M O N RX TX A ACT A ACT P P P S V.35 TX DATA S GRN = NORM YEL = MAN S VOICE GRN = NORM YEL = MAN BATT TX M O N RX A ACT P S GRN = NORM YEL = MAN TX M O N RX A ACT P S TST LP1 LP1 LP2 LP2 ALM TX E Q TX E Q E Q RX RX TX M O N RX A GRN = NORM YEL = MAN DSX TST ALM TX RX 1181101L1 PWR DSX LP1 LP2 E Q RX 1181101L1 PWR TST ALM TX E Q RX 1181101L1 DSX LP1 LP2 ALM TX E Q PWR TST LP2 ALM TX RX 1181101L1 DSX LP1 LP2 E Q PWR TST LP1 ALM TX RX 1181101L1 DSX TST LP2 E Q PWR DSX LP1 ALM TX RX 1181101L1 PWR TST LP2 E Q RX 1181101L1 DSX LP1 ALM TX E Q PWR TST LP1 LP2 ALM TX RX 1181101L1 DSX TST LP1 LP2 E Q PWR DSX TST ALM TX RX 1181101L1 PWR DSX LP1 LP2 E Q RX 1181101L1 PWR TST ALM TX E Q RX 1181101L1 DSX LP2 ALM TX E Q PWR LP1 LP2 ALM TX RX 1181101L1 TST LP1 LP2 ALM + R DSX TST LP1 ALM T X TX PWR DSX TST LP + T X TX 1181101L1 PWR DSX LBK ALM + T X TX M O N TST ALM A P GRN = NORM YEL = MAN DSX LP ALM PWR 6V TST ACT PWR LBK LP ALM PWR DSX LBK LP 9 10 DSL 1181300L1 DSX 8 10 DSL 1181300L1 PWR TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX M O N RX RX ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN PWR/NET Figure 2. Voice over DSL 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 255 Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG 5. Total Access 600 Series System Manual CONFIGURING THE TOTAL ACCESS 600 System Info The SYSTEM INFO menu provides basic information about the unit and contains data fields for editing information. Figure 3 displays the submenus available when you select this menu item. Figure 3. System Information Menu >System Name Provides a user-configurable text string for the name of the Total Access 600. This name can help you distinguish between different installations. You can enter up to 31 characters in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underbar). This name will appear on the top line of all screens. >System Location Provides a user-configurable text string for the location of the Total Access 600. This field is to help you keep track of the actual physical location of the unit. You can enter up to 31 characters in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underbar). >System Contact Provides a user-configurable text string for a contact name. You can use this field to enter the name, phone number, or email address of a person responsible for the Total Access 600 system. You can enter up to 31 characters in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underbar). >Unit Name Product-specific name for the product assembly. >CLEI Code CLEI code for the product assembly. > Part Number ADTRAN part number for the product assembly. 256 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG >Serial Number Serial number of the product assembly. >Firmware Revision Displays the current firmware revision level of the controller. >Bootcode Revision Displays the bootcode revision. >System Uptime Displays the length of time since the Total Access 600 system reboot. >Date/Time Displays the current date and time, including seconds. This field can be edited. Enter the time in 24-hour format (such as 23:00:00 for 11:00 pm). Enter the date in mm-dd-yyyy format (for example, 10-30-1998). Each time you reset the system, this value resets to 0 days, 0 hours, 0 min and 0 secs. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 257 Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual System Config Set up the Total Access 600 operational configuration from the SYSTEM CONFIG menu. Figure 4 shows the items included in this menu. Figure 4. System Configuration Menu >Network Timing Mode Selects the timing source for the entire system. Network is the only timing option available. Network The system’s clock is recovered from the network (WAN interface). >Telnet Access Sets Telnet access to ON or OFF. >Telnet User List Up to four users can be configured for access to the Total Access 600. Each user can be assigned a security level and time out. Name A text string of the user name for this session. Authen Method The user can be authenticated in two ways: PASSWORD RADIUS The Password field is used to authenticate the user. The Radius client is used for authenticating the user. Password When the authenticating method is PASSWORD, this text string is used for the password. Idle Time (1-255) This sets the amount of time you can be idle before you are automatically logged off. 258 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Level This is the security level granted to the user. >Maint Port Menu The Total Access 600’s VT 100 CRAFT port can be accessed via an RJ-48 located on the rear panel. The setup for these ports is under this menu. Password Protect When set to NO, the maintenance port is not password protected. When YES (def), the Total Access 600 will prompt for a password upon startup. Password This is the text string that is used for comparison when password protecting the maintenance port. By default, no password is entered. If you forget your password, type CHALLENGE in all capital letters. Call technical support and have the displayed CHALLENGE code ready. The security level for the maintenance port is always set to 0. This gives full access to all menus. Passwords are case-sensitive. Instructions for Changing Passwords Step Action 1. Select the PASSWORD field—a new PASSWORD field displays. 2. Type the new password in the ENTER field. 3. Type the new password again in the CONFIRM field. The password can contain up to 12 alphanumeric characters. You can also use spaces and special characters in the password. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 259 Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Baud Rate This is the asynchronous rate that the maintenance port will run. The possible values are 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 (def), 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200. Data Bits This is the asynchronous bit rate that the maintenance port will run. The possible values are 7 or 8 (def) bits. Parity This is the asynchronous parity that the maintenance port will run. The possible values are NONE (def), ODD, or EVEN. Stop Bits This is the stop bit used for the maintenance port. The possible values are 1 (def), 1.5 or 2. >Network Time The Total Access 600 unit time can be entered manually from the SYSTEM INFO menu, or the unit can receive time from an NTP/SNTP server. The NETWORK TIME menu includes all parameters relating to how the unit communicates with the time server. Server Type The server type defines which port the Total Access 600 will listen on to receive timing information from the time server. NT Time The Total Access 600 will receive time from an NT server running SNTP software on its TIME port. SNTP The Total Access 600 will receive time directly from an SNTP server. Active This network timing feature can be turned on and off. It determines whether the unit will request and receive time from a time server. Time Zone There are several time zones available for the time to be displayed in. All time zones are based off of Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Adjust for Daylight Saving Since some areas of the world use Daylight Savings Time, the Total Access 600 is designed to adjust the time on the first Sunday in April and the last Sunday in October accordingly if this option is turned on. Host Address This is the IP address of the time server that the Total Access 600 will request and receive time from. Refresh This is the interval of time between each request the Total Access 600 sends out to the time server. A smaller refresh time guarantees that the unit receives the correct time from the server and corrects possible errors more quickly, but it is more taxing on the machine. A range of refresh times is available for the user to decide which is best for their unit. 260 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Status This displays the current status of the time negotiation process. If an error is displayed, check all connections and configurations to try to resolve the problem. System Utility Use the SYSTEM UTILITY menu to view and set the system parameters shown in Figure 5. Figure 5. System Utility Menu >Upgrade Firmware Updates firmware when Total Access 600 enhancements are released. Two transfer methods are available for use in updating the Total Access 600 system controller. Transfer Method The two methods for upgrading are XMODEM and TFTP. (See DLP-007, Upgrading the Firmware Using XMODEM and DLP-008, Upgrading the Firmware Using TFTP for more information.) TFTP requires a TFTP server running somewhere on the network. The Total Access 600 starts a TFTP client function which gets the upgrade code from the TFTP server. Selecting XMODEM will load the upgrade code through the CRAFT port using any PC terminal emulator with xmodem capability. TFTP Server Address This is required when the transfer method is TFTP. It is the IP address or domain name (if DNS is configured) of the TFTP server. TFTP Server Filename This is required when the transfer method is TFTP. It is the case-sensitive file name which contains the upgrade code. Transfer Status This appears when TFTP is used. It displays the status of the transfer as it happens. Any error or success message will be displayed here. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 261 Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Start Transfer This activator is used when the configurable items in this menu are complete. Before using START TRANSFER, the Total Access 600 should have a valid IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway (if required). Abort Transfer Use this activator to cancel any TFTP transfer in progress. >Config Transfer Sends a file containing the Total Access 600 configuration to a PC connected to the CRAFT port using XMODEM protocol or to a file on a TFTP server using the TFTP protocol. See DLP-007, Upgrading the Firmware Using XMODEM and DLP-008, Upgrading the Firmware Using TFTP for details. CONFIG TRANSFER also lets you save the Total Access 600 configuration as a backup file, so you can use the same configuration with multiple Total Access 600 units. In addition, CONFIG TRANSFER can retrieve a configuration file from a TFTP server. To support these transfers, ADTRAN delivers a TFTP program with the Total Access 600 called TFTP Server. You can configure any PC running Microsoft Windows with this software, and store a configuration file. Before using CONFIG TRANSFER, the Total Access 600 should have a valid IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway (if required). Only one configuration transfer session (upload or download) can be active at a time. Transfer Method Displays the method used to transfer the configuration file to or from a server. XMODEM and TFTP are supported. Transfer Type Only BINARY transfers are currently supported. TFTP Server IP Address Specifies the IP address of the TFTP server. Get this number from your system administrator. TFTP Server Filename Defines the name of the configuration file that you transfer to or retrieve from the TFTP server. The default name is ta600.cfg, but you can edit this name. 262 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Current Transfer Status Indicates the current status of the update. Previous Transfer Status Indicates the status of the previous update. Load and Use Config Retrieves the configuration file specified in the TFTP SERVER FILENAME field from the server. To start this command, enter Y to begin or enter N to cancel. If you execute this command, the Total Access 600 retrieves the configuration file, reboots, then restarts using the new configuration. Save Config Remotely Saves the configuration file specified in TFTP SERVER FILENAME to the server identified in TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS. To start this command, enter Y to begin or enter N to cancel. Before using this command, you must have identified a valid TFTP server in TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS. >Ping Allows you to send pings (ICMP requests) to hosts. The following items are under this menu: Only one ping session can be active at a time. Start/Stop Activator to start and cancel a ping test. Host Address IP address or domain name (if DNS is configured) of device to receive the ping. Size (40-1500) Total size of the ping to send. Range is 40 (64 is def) to 1500 bytes. # of Packets Total packets to send every 2 seconds. Setting this to 0 allows the client to ping continuously. # Transmits Total packets sent (read only). # Receives Total packets received (read only). 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 263 Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual %Loss Percentage loss based on ping returned from host (read only). Configuring WAN Settings >DSLAM Type Set this to the type of DSLAM the Total Access 600 will be connecting to. >Layer One Interface This is the physical layer protocol used to connect the DSLAM to the Total Access 600. >Layer Two Protocol This is the data link layer protocol used to connect the DSLAM to the Total Access 600. If the DSLAM Type is CopperMountain, refer to Appendix E. Routing in HDIA Mode for further information. >ATM Config Use the WAN menu (Figure 6) to access the ATM CONFIG menu. Figure 6. WAN Menu Use the ATM CONFIG menu (Figure 7) to set the parameters listed below the figure. 264 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Figure 7. ATM Config Menu Idle Cells The IDLE CELLS format must be configured for either ATM FORUM or ITU. Configuring this setting incorrectly for a particular circuit will cause poor performance at the ATM layer. This setting must match the configuration setting of the ATM switch or DSLAM at the other end of the circuit. Data Scrambling DATA SCRAMBLING can be ENABLED or DISABLED for cell traffic. Configuring this setting incorrectly for a particular circuit will cause poor performance. This setting must match the configuration setting of the ATM switch or DSLAM at the other end of the circuit. >ATM Stats Use the WAN menu (Figure 6 on page 264) to access the ATM STATS menu (Figure 8) and view the parameters listed below the figure. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 265 Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Figure 8. ATM Stats Menu AP: Tx Cells This is the number of cells transmitted. AP: Rx Cells This is the number of cells received. AP: Rx OAM Cells This is the number of OAM cells received AP: Receive Cells Discarded This is the number of cells received and discarded. An incrementing count in this field could indicate a configuration problem with the ATM layer. AP: Receive Cell Errors This is the number of cells received with an HEC error. AP: Sync This indicates cell delineation at the ATM layer. AP: Out Of Cell Delineation This indicates loss of cell delineation at the ATM layer. AAL5: Transmit Frames This is the number of AAL5 frames transmitted. AAL5: Receive Frames This is the number of AAL5 frames received. AAL5: Transmit Discarded Frames This is the number of AAL5 frames discarded. AAL5: Receive Errors This is the number of AAL5 errors received. 266 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG AAL5: Receive Discarded Frames This is the number of AAL5 frames discarded. AAL5: No ATM Frames This is for internal use only. AAL5: No Data Packets This is for internal use only. Clear Stats This is used to clear the counters on this menu screen. >DSL Rate Config This is the bit rate the SDSL link has trained to. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 267 Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Configuring the Router – Configuration Use the ROUTER/CONFIGURATION menu (Figure 9) to access the GLOBAL, ETHERNET, and WAN menus. Figure 9. Router/Configuration Menu >Global Use the GLOBAL menu (Figure 10) to set up general router functions. Figure 10. Global Menu IP This is used for general IP configuration. Mode This item controls how the Total Access 600 handles IP routes. When this option is set to ON (def), the Total Access 600 will advertise and listen to routes from other IP routers. If OFF, the route table is still used, but only static routes are used for routing IP packets and only the Ethernet port is used. IP packets can be sent over the WAN, but only when bridged. Static Routes Use this menu to enter static routes to other networks. 268 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual ACTIVE IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK GATEWAY HOPS PRIVATE Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Adds this static route entry to the IP routing table when set to YES and removes it (if it was previously added) if set to NO (def). The IP address of the host or network address of the device being routed to. Determines the bits in the previous IP address that are used. If this is to be a host route, it must be set to all ones (255.255.255.255). The IP address of the router to receive the forwarded IP packet. The number of router hops required to get to the network or host. Maximum distance is 15 hops. When set to NO, the Total Access 600 will advertise this static route using RIP. Setting to YES means that the route is kept private. DHCP Server DHCP MODE DHCP RENEWAL TIME When set to ON, the Total Access 600 acts as a DHCP server and will dynamically assign IP, network mask, default gateway, and DNS addresses to any device which transmits a broadcast DHCP request. The addresses assigned are based on the Total Access 600’s own IP address and will be within the same network. The number of hours that the DHCP server should allow the device before it is required to send a new DHCP request. The default is 15 hours, and 0 represents an infinite lease. Domain Names Enter the Total Access 600's domain name and the primary and secondary DNS servers in this menu. DOMAIN NAME PRIMARY DNS SECONDARY DNS PRIMARY NBNS/WINS SECONDARY NBNS/WINS 61200624L1-1A Text string used to represent the domain name used by the Total Access 600. First server to which domain name requests are sent. Server used as a backup, in case the primary address does not respond to the request. Server to which NT domain name requests are sent. Server used when there is no response from the primary server. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 269 Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual UDP Relay This menu configures the Total Access 600 to act as a UDP relay agent for applications requiring a response from UDP hosts that are not on the same network segment as their clients. Mode When this option is set to ON, the Total Access 600 will act as a relay agent. UDP Relay List Up to four relay destination servers can be specified in this list. RELAY ADDRESS This is the IP address of the server that will receive the relay packet. UDP PORT TYPE STANDARD (def) The following standard UDP protocols are relayed when set: DHCP, TFTP, DNS, NTP (Network Time Protocol, port 123, NBNS (NetBios Name Server, port 137), NBDG (NetBIOS Datagram, port 138), and BootP. SPECIFIED When set, the UDP port (1 to 65535) can be specified in the UDP Port columns (up to three per server). UDP PORT 1, 2, 3 Used for specifying UDP ports to be relayed. These fields only apply when UDP PORT TYPE is set to SPECIFIED. Bridge The BRIDGE menu is used to set up the bridge parameters for the Total Access 600. The bridging function runs at the Media Access Control (MAC) level which allows any protocol packets that run over Ethernet to be forwarded. Bridging can run concurrently with IP. However, when IP routing is active, IP packets (which include ARP packets) are not bridged. Mode This is used to enable the bridge function. Address Table The Total Access 600 automatically maintains a table of MAC addresses detected and associates those addresses with the LAN or WAN port from which they were received. AGING FORWARD POLICY 270 The maximum time an idle MAC address remains in the table before being removed. The value is in minutes. When this parameter is set to UNKNOWN (def), any bridge packet with a destination MAC address that is not in the bridge table is forwarded to all other ports. When set to KNOWN, the packet with the unknown destination MAC address is dropped and is not forwarded. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Security Filter Defines The Total Access 600 can filter packets based on certain parameters within the packet. The method used by the Total Access 600 allows the highest flexibility for defining filters and assigning them to a PVC. The filters are set up in two steps: (1) defining the packet types, and (2) adding them to a list under the PVC. This menu is used to define the individual filter defines based on packet type. Filter Defines /MAC Filter Defines The MAC filter is applied to bridge packets only. Bridge packets which are forwarded by the bridge functionality of the Total Access 600 are defined here. Up to 32 MAC defines can be specified. NAME SRC ADDR SRC MASK DEST ADDR DEST MASK MAC TYPE TYPE MSK Identifies the filter entry. 48-bit MAC source address used for comparison. (hexadecimal format) Bits in the MAC source address which are compared. (hexadecimal format) 48-bit MAC destination address used for comparison. (hexadecimal format) Bits in the MAC destination address used for comparison. (hexadecimal format) 16-bit MAC type field used for comparison. (hexadecimal format) Bits in the MAC type field used for comparison. (hexadecimal format) Filter Defines /Pattern Filter Defines The pattern filter is applied to bridge packets only. That is any packet which is forwarded by the bridge functionality of the Total Access 600. Up to 32 pattern defines can be specified. NAME Identifies the filter entry. OFFSET Offset from beginning of packet of where to start the pattern comparison. PATTERN 64 bits used for comparison. (hexadecimal format) MASK Bits in the pattern to be compared. (hexadecimal format) Filter Defines /IP Filter Defines The IP filter defines apply to any IP packet, whether it is routed or bridged. Up to 32 IP defines can be specified. 61200624L1-1A NAME Identifies the filter entry. IP SRC IP address compared to the source address. (dotted decimal format) © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 271 Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual SRC MASK Bits which are used in the source comparison. (dotted decimal format) IP DEST IP address compared to the destination address. (dotted decimal format) DEST MASK Bits which are used in the destination comparison. (dotted decimal format) SRC PORT IP source port number used for comparison Range: 0 to 65535. (decimal format) SRC PORT CMPR Type of comparison that is performed. = means ports equal to not = means port not equal to > means port greater than < means port less than None - means the source port is not compared DST PORT IP destination port number used for comparison Range: 0 to 65535. (decimal format) DST PORT CMPR Type of comparison that is performed = means ports equal to not = means port not equal to > means port greater than < means port less than None - means the destination port is not compared PROTO Protocol used for comparison. Range: 0 to 255. (decimal format) PROTO CMPR Type of comparison that is performed = means protocols equal to not = means protocols not equal to > means protocols greater than < means protocols less than None means the protocol is not compared TCP EST 272 Yes - only when TCP established © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG No - only when TCP not established Ignore - ignore TCP flags >Ethernet Use the ETHERNET menu (Figure 11) to configure the Ethernet port on the Total Access 600. Figure 11. Ethernet Menu IP This is used to set up the IP addresses for the LAN on the Total Access 600. IP Address The IP address assigned to the Total Access 600's Ethernet port is set here. This address must be unique within the network. Subnet Mask This is the IP network mask that is to be applied to the Total Access 600's Ethernet port. Default Gateway The default gateway is used by the Total Access 600 to send IP packets whose destination address is not found in the route table. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 273 Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual RIP Use this menu to enable RIP on the LAN interface. MODE PROTOCOL METHOD Enables or disables RIP. Specifies the RIP protocol. Choices are V1 (def) (which is RIP version 1) or V2 (RIP version 2). Specifies the way the RIP protocol sends out its advertisements. Choices are given below. NONE All routes in the router table are advertised with no modification of the metrics. SPLIT HORIZON Only routes not learned from this circuit are advertised. POISON REVERSE (def) All routes are advertised, but the routes learned from this port are “poisoned” with an infinite metric. DIRECTION Allows the direction at which RIP advertisements are sent and listened to be specified. TX AND RX (def) RIP advertisements are periodically transmitted and are listened to on this port. TX ONLY RIP advertisements are periodically transmitted but are not listened to on this port. RX ONLY RIP advertisements are not transmitted on this port, but are listened. V2 SECRET Enter the secret used by RIP version 2 here. Proxy ARP This feature allows the network portion of a group of addresses to be shared among several physical network segments. The ARP protocol provides a way for devices to create a mapping between physical addresses and logical IP addresses. Proxy ARP makes use of this mapping feature by instructing a router to answer ARP requests as a "proxy" for the IP addresses behind one of its ports. The device which sent the ARP request will then correctly assume that it can reach the requested IP address by sending packets to the physical address that was returned. This technique effectively hides the fact that a network has been (further) subnetted. If this option is set to YES, when an ARP request is received on the Ethernet port the address is looked up in the IP routing table. If the forwarding port is not on the Ethernet port and the route is not the default route, the Total Access 600 will answer the request with its own hardware address. MAC Address This is a read-only MAC address programmed at ADTRAN. 274 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG >WAN Use the WAN menu (Figure 12) to configure WAN settings on the Total Access 600. Figure 12. WAN Menu L2 Protocol Displays the current L2 protocol - ATM (Read Only). ATM Use the ATM menu to setup Data PVCs for the router. Description This is the text description for the PVC. VPI ATM virtual port identifier. VCI This is the ATM virtual channel identifier. PCR Peak Cell Rate. Limits transmitted cells. QOS Quality of Service. Indicates this PVC’s traffic class. Protocol This is the protocol supported on the PVC. RFC1483 IP Use this selection to support IP on this PVC. (These settings only take effect when RFC1483 is the selected protocol.) Active This selection enables IP on this PVC. Far - End IP Address This is the address of the NEXT hop router on this interface. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 275 Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual IP netmask This is the network mask used for this interface. Local IP Address This is the IP address for this PVC. NAT Use this menu to set up and use Network Address Translation on this interface. NETWORK ADDRESS PORT TRANSLATION PUBLIC IP ADDRESS MODE TRANSLATION TABLE PUBLIC ADDRESS MODE PROTOCOL PUBLIC PORT MODE PRIVATE ADDRESS MODE 276 By enabling port translation, IP packets are modified as they pass through this interface. During transmission, private addresses are translated into a single public (NAPT) IP address. Incoming packets are translated from the public to private address based on the protocol port numbers. Once enabled, you must set up NAT for use. The port translation requires at least a single real IP address for translating. This value can use the IP assigned to the interface (or assigned via layer 2 protocol like PPP), obtained using DHCP client, or statically specified on this menu. If the address cannot be learned, then it must be specified in order for the translation to work. Add translation entries to "fine tune" special protocols or specify private addresses. The public IP address used for this translation entry can be the NAPT IP address assigned to the link or can be specified. You specify an address to direct packets with certain protocols to different servers. The upper layer protocol that is to be monitored for translation. For TCP and UDP, a port number must also be specified. The public destination port associated with this entry can be specified to add more control over certain types of traffic. The default, ANY PORT, covers all port types. The private IP address can be specified to steer certain protocols and ports to specific servers in the private network. Likewise, internal hosts can be steered to certain servers on the public network. A new request from the public network matching this entry’s public parameters will be dropped if this mode is set to ANY INTERNAL. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual PRIVATE PORT MODE TRANSLATE BODY NAT VIEW NAPT ADDRESS ENTRY COUNT ENTRY OVERFLOW COUNT Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG The private destination port associated with this entry can be specified to add more control over certain types of traffic. Leave as ANY PORT to cover all port types. By default, the application payload in the packet is scanned for occurrences of the private/public IP address in binary or ASCII form. Set this to No for applications where this will cause problems. Shows the protocols that are actively being translated. Represents the public address that is being used as the NAPT address. The number of entries in the NAT table. A count of the dropped entries due to low memory. RIP Use this menu to enable RIP on the WAN interface. (See RIP on page 274 for description of options.) RFC 1483 Bridge This is used to enable bridge mode on this PVC. (These settings only take effect when RFC1483 is the selected protocol.) PPPoATM The Total Access 600 uses the PPPoATM profile to specify the profile used when connected using PPP. Authentication The authentication menu contains the required parameters for the authentication of the PPP peer and for being authenticated by the PPP peer. Authentication is applied between the Total Access 600 and the PPP peer as follows: TX Method This parameter specifies how the Total Access 600 is to be authenticated by the PPP peer. There are four possible selections. NONE (def) The connection will not allow the PPP peer to PAP, CHAP, OR EAP CHAP OR EAP EAP authenticate it. The connection can be authenticated using PAP, CHAP or EAP. The connection can be authenticated using CHAP or EAP only. The connection will only allow authentication by the peer using EAP. TX Username This is the username that is used when being authenticated by the PPP peer. TX Password This is the password or secret that is used when being authenticated by the PPP peer. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 277 Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual RX Username This is the username used to authenticate the PPP peer. RX Password This is the password or secret that is used to authenticate the PPP peer. IP The IP menu contains the parameters for exchanging IP data with the PPP peer. Mode Setting to ON (def) will permit this connection profile to negotiate PPP IPCP with the PPP peer for exchanging of IP packets. Local IP This is the IP address that is assigned to the PPP link when using numbered links. Leaving this as 0.0.0.0 means the Total Access 600 will determine its IP address using PPP IPCP. If the far end router does not assign an IP address, the PPP link is left unnumbered. Netmask This network mask is applied to the IP/Local IP address for determining the PPP peer's network. If left as 0.0.0.0, a standard network mask is used. Remote IP The PPP peer's IP address or network can be set here, if known. Leaving this at 0.0.0.0 means that the Total Access 600 will determine the PPP peer's IP and network using the PPP IPCP. NAT The Total Access 600 can perform Network Address Translation. This feature is most widely used when connecting to the Internet. The Ethernet network can consist of private network numbers. When this profile is connected, all IP addresses on the Ethernet side are translated into the one real IP address negotiated with the PPP peer (ISP). Multiple stations on the Ethernet side can access the Internet simultaneously. Setting this option to ON will cause the Total Access 600 to perform NAT. In the OFF (def) position, the unit will route across the connection normally. Route The IP parameters are configured in this menu. Usually the Total Access 600 will automatically discover the PPP peer's networks using PPP IPCP and/or RIP. • Route/Static Route Selecting yes will add a static route to the remote peer to the route table. • Route/Private Selecting yes will prevent this route from being advertised. • Route/Hops (1-16) This value is the metric or number of hops that RIP will use in advertising the static route. The range is 1 to 16, where 1 is the default. The value 16 is considered an infinite distance (poisoned route). • Route/Force IP When set to YES, the Total Access 600 will force the PPP peer to use the IP address in the LOCAL IP for this profile as its WAN IP address. Normally this is set in the NO (def) position. RIP The RIP parameters can be adjusted from their defaults under this menu. 278 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG • Mode The Total Access 600 performs RIP over the WAN connection when this is set to ON (def). • Protocol The Total Access 600 performs version 1, V1 (def), or version 2, V2, of RIP on this WAN connection. • Method SPLIT HORIZON POISON REVERSE (def) NONE Only routes not learned on the WAN connection are advertised. All routes are advertised, including routes learned from the WAN connection. These routes are poisoned. All routes are advertised, including routes learned from the WAN connection. No attempt is made to poison these routes. • Direction TX AND RX (def) TX ONLY RX ONLY RIP advertisements are transmitted and listened to on the WAN connection. RIP advertisements are transmitted and not listened to. RIP advertisements are listened to but not transmitted. • Triggered When set to YES, only IP RIP updates are sent when the routing table has changed and learned routes are not "aged." When set to NO (def), updates are sent periodically. • Retain When this Connection List entry is disconnected and this parameter is set to YES, all routes learned from this WAN connection are retained and their routing interface is set to idle. PPP The Total Access 600 supports the IETF standards for the Point-to-Point Protocol. The PPP state machine running in the Total Access 600 can be fine-tuned to support many applications that can be employed. The configurable items under this menu can be changed from their default values for special cases. VJ Compression When this item is set to ON, the Total Access 600 will perform TCP/IP header compression known as Van Jacobson compression to the PPP peer. Max Config This value is the number of unanswered configuration-requests that should be transmitted before giving up on a call. The possible values are 5, 10 (def), 15 and 20. Max Timer This value is the number of seconds to wait between unanswered configuration requests. The possible values are 1 sec, 2 secs (def), 3 secs, 5 secs and 10 secs. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 279 Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Max Failure Due to the nature of PPP, configuration options may not be agreed upon between two PPP peers. This value is the number of configuration-naks that should occur before an option is configuration-rejected. This allows a connection to succeed that might otherwise fail. The possible values are 5 (def), 10, 15 and 20. Encapsulation This is the PPP encapsulation. (LLC or VC-Mux) Filters The Total Access 600 can block packets in and out of a WAN port by use of the filters. They are set up in two steps: 1) define the types of packets that would be of interest in the CONFIGURATION/GLOBAL/SECURITY/FILTER DEFINES menu, and 2) set up the filter type and combination of defines that will cause a packet block. WAN-TO-LAN (In) The packets which come into the Total Access 600 can be filtered in three ways: DISABLED (def) BLOCK ALL FORWARD ALL Turns off packet input filtering. No incoming packets are blocked. All incoming packets from the WAN are blocked except as defined in the FILTERS/IN EXCEPTIONS list. All incoming packets from the WAN are not blocked except as defined in the FILTERS/IN EXCEPTIONS list. In Exceptions This is a list of up to 32 filter entries which can be combined using the operations field. The operations are performed in the order they appear on the list. ACTIVE TYPE 280 Turns this entry active when set to ON. Selects the filter define list to reference: MAC from the CONFIGURATION/GLOBAL/SECURITY/FILTER DEFINES/MAC FILTER DEFINES list. PATTERN from the CONFIGURATION/GLOBAL/SECURITY/FILTER DEFINES/PATTERN FILTER DEFINES list. IP from the CONFIGURATION/GLOBAL/SECURITY/FILTER DEFINES/IP FILTER DEFINES list. IPX from the CONFIGURATION/GLOBAL/SECURITY/FILTER DEFINES/IPX FILTER DEFINES list. FILTER LIST NAME Selects between filters defined in the list. NEXT OPER The next operation to use to combine with the next filter in the list: © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG END the last filter to combination. AND logically AND this filter with the next filter in the list. OR logically OR this filter with the next filter in the list. LAN-TO-WAN (Out) The packets which come out toward the WAN from the TA600 can be filtered in three ways: DISABLED (def) BLOCK ALL FORWARD ALL Turns off packet input filtering. No outgoing packets are blocked. All outgoing packets to the WAN are blocked except as defined in the FILTERS/OUT EXCEPTIONS list. All outgoing packets to the WAN are not blocked except as defined in the FILTERS/OUT EXCEPTIONS list. Out Exceptions This is a list of up to 32 filter entries. The setup is exactly the same as the FILTERS/IN EXCEPTIONS list. Configuring the Router – Status Use the ROUTER/STATUS menu to view and set the parameters shown in Figure 13. The ROUTER/STATUS screens give the user useful information for debugging the current routes in the Total Access 600. Figure 13. Router/Status Menu >Session This menu maintains statistics about the active ATM PVCs. >ARP cache This is a listing of the currently connected Ethernet port on the LAN. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 281 Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual >Bridge Table This shows the detected MAC addresses and the interface to which they are associated. >IP Routes This shows the current routes in the Total Access 600 and their use. >LAN Stats This shows traffic over the LAN interface. >IP Stats This shows IP traffic through the Total Access 600. Configuring the Router – Logs The Logs menu (Figure 14) contains logs displaying important information about the running condition of the Total Access 600. The logs can be set to capture diagnostics of error conditions only by way of a log level. The levels are divided up as follows: level 0 - Fatal event (causes reset) level 1 - Critical event level 2 - Error event level 3 - Warning event level 4 - Notify event level 5 - Informational event level 6 - Debugging event Figure 14. Router/Logs Menu Sys log Host Set this to the IP address or domain name (if DNS configured) of the sys log host device. All log events are sent to this device. PPP Log Information pertaining to the PPP negotiation and authentication is logged in the PPP log. 282 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Connection Log Information pertaining to the call placement and answering is logged in the Connection log. Network Log Information pertaining to routing protocols is placed in this log. Each log (PPP log, Connection log, and Network log) contains the following elements. Active When set to YES (def), PPP events below or equal the log level are logged into the log. Wrap When set to YES (def), new PPP events will overwrite old PPP events when the log is full. All logging will stop when the log is full and set to NO. Level In order to log events, they must be at or below this level. Range is 0 to 6. The default is 3. View This menu displays the log list. The fields are as follows: DATE/TIME Date and time event occurred. LEVEL Level associated with this event (0-6). MESSAGE Text message for this event. If message is too long to fit on the line, another event appears below it continuing the message. Clear This clears the log when activated. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 283 Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Configuring Voice Support – Config Use the VOICE/CONFIG menu to view and set the parameters shown in Figure 15. Figure 15. Voice/Config Menu >Call Control The CALL CONTROL setting is used to configure the correct Voice Gateway protocol for voice signaling control between the Total Access 600 and the configured Gateway. The CALL CONTROL setting must be configured correctly before the voice circuits will work correctly. The Total Access 600 supports Jetstream, Tollbridge, and CopperCom Voice Gateways. >VPI The VPI setting is used to configure the Total Access 600 virtual path setting used to communicate with the configured Voice Gateway. >VCI The VCI setting is used to configure the Total Access 600 virtual circuit setting used to communicate with the configured Voice Gateway. 284 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Configuring Voice Support – Status Use the VOICE/STATUS menu to view and set the parameters shown in Figure 16. Figure 16. Voice/Status Menu >Gateway Stats The GATEWAY STATS menu shows the current state of the communication link between the Total Access 600 and the Voice Gateway. The Gateway Link is indicated as UP or DOWN. A count of management messages is indicated along with the number of active calls in progress. >PVC Stats The PVC STATS menu shows the current state of the virtual circuit used between the Voice Gateway and the Total Access 600 IAD for voice signaling and voice payload delivery. >POTS Stats The POTS STATS menu shows real-time indication status of each voice port on the Total Access 600. From this menu, on a per port basis, the user can determine which ports are active/inactive. Several statistics at this menu are used only for internal ADTRAN development. Task, Inserts, and Drops indicators are for internal use only. >Clear Stats The CLEAR STATS menu can be used to clear the counters used for Voice Status menus. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 285 Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Managing the Modules – Modules Use the MODULES menu to view and set the parameters shown in Figure 17. The Total Access 600 contains four fixed modules: The WAN/Network interface, FXS, Echo Canceller/ADPCM module, and the V.35 interface. The MODULES table allows management of the on-board modules in the Total Access 600. The table contains MENU, ALARM, TEST, and STATUS indicators/menus customized for each module. Figure 17. Modules Menu >NET (SDSL) Test These tests are meant for debug purposes only. A reboot may be required to return the Total Access 600 to normal operation. Network Loopback Sets the network interface in loopback mode. Send/Check 2047 Sends and checks a 2047 BERT pattern over the network interface (assuming LTU in loopback). Results of the test can be found in Test Results. Send/Check ALT Sends and checks an alternating pattern over the network interface (assuming LTU in loopback). Results of the test can be found in Test Results. >FXS Refer to Section 7, FXS User Interface Guide. >EC/ADPCM Refer to Section 7, FXS User Interface Guide. 286 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Managing the Modules – V.35 Setup Use the V.35 SETUP menu to view and set the parameters shown in Figure 18. Figure 18. V.35 Setup Menu CHANNEL RATE and EIA settings are supported via this menu option. For all typical applications, these settings are left in their default states. >ATM/FR IWF This menu contains the setup and status for the ATM/Frame Relay interworking functions. Mode The MODE setting configures the V.35 port for FRF5 or FRF8 operation, depending upon the application being supported. FRF5 This is also known as Network Interworking. Use this mode for Frame Relay over ATM. FRF8 This is also known as Service Interworking. In this mode, the Total Access 600 performs a translation between Frame Relay and ATM protocols. Configuration The CONFIGURATION menu is used to support the configuration of Frame-to-ATM interworking, signaling formats, timeout values, and PVC settings. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 287 Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual The following settings are used for FRF5. LAN FR MAINT PROTOCOL LAN FR POLL TIMEOUT T392 (5-30) FRN PORT CONFIG 288 Frame Relay maintenance or signaling protocol between local V.35 port and the attached DTE port, support ANSI Annex A, CCITT Q933 Annex D, CISCO LMI or Static (no signaling). T392 for signaling protocol, typical value 15. No meaning if Maint Protocol is Static. Logical Frame Relay ports over ATM. Up to 4 ports are supported with each port supporting up to 4 DLCI mappings. Go to NUM field. Typing "i" or "I" will insert another entry, and typing "d" or "D" will delete one entry. NAME To identify your port. ATM VPI Specifies the virtual path over which this logical port is running. ATM VCI Specifies the virtual circuit over which this logical port is running. DE MAP Frame Relay to ATM DE mapping; default value (Frn Only, ATM 0) suggested. CLPI MAP ATM to Frame Relay CLPI map; default value (Frn Only) suggested. D/C Set D/C field in the header to 0 or 1. HEADER Header format; only 2 bytes supported now. MAINT PROTOCOL Maintenance or signaling protocol over this logical Frame Relay port. Support Annex A, Annex D, CISCO LMI or Static. MUX MODE Many DLCIs or one DLCI mapping over this port. DLCI MAP Actual DLCI mappings. LAN DLCI The DLCI configured over local V.35 Frame Relay port. NET DLCI The DLCI configured over the WAN side logical Frame Relay port. ACTIVE Always active, not configurable. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG The following settings are used for FRF8. LAN FR MAINT PROTOCOL LAN FR POLL TIMEOUT T392 (5-30) FR/ATM PVC MAPPING 61200624L1-1A Frame Relay maintenance or signaling protocol between local V.35 port and the attached DTE port, support ANSI Annex A, CCITT Q933 Annex D, CISCO LMI or Static (no signaling). T392 for signaling protocol, typical value 15. No meaning if Maint Protocol is Static. Up to 4 mappings are supported. FR DLCI Frame Relay DLCI on V.35 port. ATM VPI Specifies the virtual path to which DLCI is mapped. ATM VCI Specifies the virtual circuit to which DLCI is mapped. TRANSLATE Translate or transparent mode between Frame Relay frames and ATM cells. DE MAP Map Frame Relay DE bit to ATM CLPI bit, Always 0, Always 1 or Convert each other. FECN MAP Map Frame Relay FECN bit to ATM EFCI bit, Always 0, Always 1 or Convert each other. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 289 Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Appendix A. Voice Gateway Quick Start Procedure (Voice Turn up) A typical VoATM application (see Figure 19) uses a Total Access 600 connected to an ATM network. For voice applications, a Voice Gateway is needed to interface with the PSTN. Jetstream, Tollbridge, and CopperCom are popular Gateway types. SCU 1181015L1 DS3MX 1181020L1 POWER STATUS TEST DS3MX 1181020L1 POWER STATUS TEST MODE HD-10 BRI Mux HD-10 BRI Mux HD-10 BRI Mux HD-10 BRI Mux QFC-C QFC-C QFC-C QFC-C T1-OR T1-OR T1-OR T1-OR HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C POWER POWER POWER HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C POWER PWR PWR PWR PWR 1181200L1 1181200L1 1181200L1 1181200L1 DSX DSX DSX DSX LBK LBK LBK LBK 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 DSX #1 DSX #1 DSX #1 DSX #1 5 5 5 5 DSX #2 DSX #2 DSX #2 DSX #2 6 6 6 6 DSX #3 DSX #3 DSX #3 DSX #3 7 7 7 7 DSX #4 DSX #4 DSX #4 DSX #4 8 8 8 8 TST TST TST TST 9 9 9 ALM ALM ALM ALM SELECT HST ACO FSE ALM ACO LOCKOUT C ON LINE LOCKOUT ON LINE R A APS APS TEST/ TEST/ ENABLE ENABLE F T 1181300L1 10 10 10 DSL DSL DSL 1181300L1 1181310L1 1181300L1 1181310L1 1181310L1 1181310L1 1181101L1 PWR DSX DSX LBK ACT A TX RX S ACT A ACT P GRN = NORM YEL = MAN LINK S + A ACT P GRN = NORM YEL = MAN DSX S V.35 RX GRN = NORM YEL = MAN – + T R X X 6V – R X 6V – R X 6V – TX TX M O N M O N M O N RX RX RX T R X X RX A ACT A ACT A ACT P P P P S S GRN = NORM YEL = MAN V.35 TX S GRN = NORM YEL = MAN DATA S GRN = NORM YEL = MAN S VOICE RX RX TX TX TX GRN = NORM YEL = MAN BATT RX RX RX RX ACT ACT ACT ACT GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN M O N RX ACT GRN=NORM YEL=MAN M O N RX DSX TST LP1 TST LP1 LP2 LP1 LP2 LP2 ALM TX ALM TX E Q TX E Q RX E Q RX TX RX TX M O N TX M O N RX 1181101L1 PWR DSX TST M O N RX 1181101L1 PWR DSX ALM E Q TX M O N RX 1181101L1 PWR TX RX TX RX 1181101L1 LP2 RX M O N RX ALM TX E Q RX TX M O N LP1 LP2 RX TX M O N TST LP1 E Q RX TX M O N DSX TST ALM TX RX TX M O N PWR DSX LP2 RX TX M O N 1181101L1 PWR LP1 E Q RX TX RX A ACT P TST ALM TX E Q RX M O N A DSX LP2 ALM TX 1181101L1 PWR LP1 LP2 E Q 1181101L1 TST LP1 ALM TX E Q DSX TST LP2 ALM TX PWR DSX LP1 LP2 1181101L1 PWR TST LP1 E Q 1181101L1 DSX TST ALM TX E Q PWR DSX LP1 LP2 ALM TX 1181101L1 PWR TST LP2 E Q 1181101L1 DSX LP1 ALM TX E Q PWR TST LP2 ALM TX 1181101L1 DSX LP1 LP2 ALM + T X TX M O N PWR TST LP1 ALM + T X TX 1181101L1 DSX TST LP ALM PWR DSX LBK LP ALM PWR 6V P GRN = NORM YEL = MAN PWR LBK LP ALM PWR DSX LBK LP 9 10 DSL 1181300L1 PWR M O N RX RX ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN PWR/NET Figure 19. Application Diagram To configure a Total Access 600 for use with the Voice Gateway, you need to know the VPI and VCI to be used on the ATM network. You also need to know the format for Idle Cells and whether Data Scrambling is used on this ATM network. The following procedure will help you navigate the Total Access 600 menus for configuring the necessary elements for VoATM with the Voice Gateway. 290 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Voice Turn Up Step Action 1. From the Total Access 600 main menu, select the WAN menu. Select DSLAM TYPE and select the name of the DSLAM type you are using. (At this point you need to back out of the menu to save the changes. The unit will need to reboot if it was not previously configured for this DSLAM type.) 2. Select DSL RATE CONFIG (BIT RATE) and change the setting to match that in your DSLAM. (If this field is read-only, allow a few seconds for autobaud to expire and the field will change to writeable.) 3. Select WAN, and then select the ATM CONFIG menu. 4. Enter the IDLE CELLS format for your network. 5. Set DATA SCRAMBLING appropriately for your network. 6. Back all the way out to the top level Total Access 600 menu, and then select the VOICE menu. (From this menu, the appropriate Voice information for working with the Voice Gateway is entered.) 7. Select CONFIG, and from the CONFIG menu, enter the Gateway type under CALL CONTROL and enter the VPI and VCI values for communicating with that Gateway. CALL CONTROL should be set to the Gateway type, and the VPI and VCI values should be set appropriately for your network. 8. To verify correct setup, use the STATUS menu (under the VOICE menu) to look at the current status of the voice connection. Under STATUS, you can view the GATEWAY STATS and information about the voice PVC along with information about the POTs ports available on the Gateway. The GATEWAY STATS menu should show the Gateway Link is up (if everything is configured correctly). A visual inspection of the VOICE LED on the front panel will also yield the status. Green = Up. Red = Down. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 291 Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Appendix B. RFC1483 Quick Start (IP Routing) The Total Access 600 allows for complete integration of voice and data delivery from one compact platform (see Figure 20). Once you have completed the voice turn up procedure from the previous example, adding data to the circuit requires some additional setup. TX RX LINK V.35 RX V.35 TX DATA VOICE BATT PWR/NET Figure 20. Application Diagram To configure a Total Access 600 for IP routing, you need to know the VPI and VCI values for the data circuit on your network. You also need the IP address of the next hop router in the circuit. The table on the next page shows how to configure the Total Access 600 for IP Routing. .. IP Routing Step 292 Action 1. From the Total Access 600 main menu, select the WAN menu. (Here you set up the ATM network.) 2. Select the ATM CONFIG menu. 3. Enter the IDLE CELLS format for your network. 4. Set DATA SCRAMBLING appropriately for your network. 5. Back all the way out to the top level Total Access 600 menu, and then select the ROUTER menu. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG IP Routing 6. Select CONFIGURATION. From the CONFIGURATION menu, you will set up addresses for your LAN and WAN. For basic IP routing, use all the default values from the GLOBAL menu. 7. From the ETHERNET menu, enter the IP menu to enter your LAN configuration. 8. Enter your LAN IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK, and DEFAULT GATEWAY information. For this example, the IP ADDRESS is 192.168.1.2, the SUBNET MASK is 255.255.255.0, and the DEFAULT GATEWAY is 10.25.4.10. 9. Arrow back to the main ROUTER CONFIGURATION menu, and select the WAN menu and then the ATM menu. (Here you will enter your data PVC information.) 10. Create a new PVC by entering the menu. Enter your VPI and VCI values. 11. From the RFC1483 IP menu, enter your LAN information. For this example, the FAR END IP ADDRESS is 10.25.4.9, the IP NETMASK is 255.255.255.252, and the LOCAL IP ADDRESS is 10.25.4.10. 12. 61200624L1-1A Arrow back to the top level Total Access 600 menu to activate your changes. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 293 Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Appendix C. RFC1483 Quick Start (IP Routing with NAT) To illustrate the use of NAT, consider the example from Appendix B. To set up a single public address that will be used to access the public network, you will use the NAT menu on the WAN/ATM/RFC1483 IP menu. IP Routing with NAT Step 294 Action 1. From the NAT menu, set NETWORK ADDRESS PORT TRANSLATION to ENABLED. (This will enable translation and allow you to enter the NAT options.) 2. Set PUBLIC IP ADDRESS MODE to SPECIFIED so you can enter your public address. During transmission, private addresses are translated into this public (NAPT) address. 3. You will also need to set up the Translation Table to do translation on the body of the packets for certain protocols, such as FTP, to work correctly. 4. From the TRANSLATION TABLE menu, create a new entry by arrowing into the table. 5. For PUBLIC ADDRESS MODE, select NAPT ADDRESS to use the previously specified public address. 6. For PROTOCOL, select TCP. 7. Make sure that TRANSLATE BODY is set to YES. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Appendix D. RFC1483 Quick Start (Bridging) The Total Access 600 allows for complete integration of voice and data delivery from one compact platform. Once you have completed the voice turn up procedure from the previous example, adding data to the circuit requires some additional setup. To configure a Total Access 600 for Bridging, you need to know the VPI and VCI values for the data circuit on your network. Bridging Step Action 1. From the Total Access 600 main menu, select the WAN menu. (Here you set up the ATM network.) 2. Select the ATM CONFIG menu. 3. Enter the IDLE CELLS format for your network. 4. Set DATA SCRAMBLING appropriately for your network. 5. Back all the way out to the top level Total Access 600 menu, and then select the ROUTER menu. 6. Enter the CONFIGURATION menu. From this menu, you will set up addresses for your LAN and WAN. For basic IP routing, use all the default values from the GLOBAL menu. 7. From the ETHERNET menu, enter the IP menu to enter your LAN configuration. 8. Enter your LAN IP ADDRESS and SUBNET MASK. For this example, the IP ADDRESS is 192.168.1.2 and the SUBNET MASK is 255.255.255.0. This is not required, but will allow Telnet configuration and TFTP upgrades from the LAN. 9. Arrow back to the main ROUTER CONFIGURATION menu, and select the WAN menu and then the ATM menu. (Here you will enter your data PVC information.) 10. Create a new PVC by entering the menu. Enter your VPI and VCI values. 11. Disable IP on the RFC1483 IP menu and enable Bridging on the RFC1483 BRIDGE menu. (This enables the Total Access 600 as a bridge.) 12. Arrow back to the top level Total Access 600 menu to activate your changes. All packets that come in on the Ethernet will be forwarded on the WAN. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 295 Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Appendix E. Routing in HDIA Mode The Total Access 600 allows for complete integration of voice and data delivery from one compact platform. The CopperMountain DSLAM uses Frame Relay instead of ATM as their Layer 2 protocol. Once you have completed the Layer 1 configuration from the previous examples, you must configure the Layer 2 protocol. Refer to Figure 21 on page 297 as you complete the steps below. Frame Relay Setup Step Action 1. From the IAD/WAN/FRAME RELAY CONFIG menu, select MAINTENANCE PROTOCOL. Set MAINTENANCE PROTOCOL to STATIC. 2. From the IAD/WAN/FRAME RELAY CONFIG menu, select DLCI MAPPING. 3. On the DLCI MAPPING menu, DLCI 528 should be selected. Right arrow to the IP MAP menu. 4. On the IP MAP menu, set up the following: Set ACTIVE to YES W/BRIDGE ENCAPSULATION. Set ADDRESS MODE to either USER SPECIFIED or DHCP CLIENT. If DHCP CLIENT is selected, the link addresses will be learned through DHCP (skip to Step 5). Set FAR-END IP ADDRESS to the next hop router on the ATM interface connected to the Copper Mountain for this DSL line (10.100.2.145 in Figure 21). Set IP NETMASK appropriately for this interface. Set LOCAL IP ADDRESS to the Copper Mountain IP address for this line (10.100.2.148 in Figure 21). 5. On the NAT menu, set up the following: Set NETWORK ADDRESS PORTTRANSLATION to ENABLED. Set PUBLIC IP ADDRESS MODE to SPECIFIED. Set PUBLIC IP ADDRESS the same as LOCAL IP ADDRESS above. From the TRANSLATION TABLE, set up the following (create entries so that the appropriate protocols are translated): Right arrow to create an entry. Keep the defaults to enable TCP translation. Press I over the 1 in the first entry to create entry 2. Change the Protocol to ICMP for this entry. Continue creating entries as appropriate for each application. 296 6. Arrow back (left arrow) to the IAD/WAN/FRAME RELAY CONFIG/DLCI MAPPING menu. 7. From the BRIDGE MAP menu, set ACTIVE to NO. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG Frame Relay Setup 8. Arrow back to the IAD/ROUTER menu. Select CONFIGURATION. 9. On the GLOBAL menu, set up the following: Select IP. Set MODE to ON. Select DHCP SERVER. Set DHCP MODE to ON. From DOMAIN NAMES, set up the following: Set PRIMARY DNS appropriately (172.22.48.47 in Figure 21). Set SECONDARY DNS appropriately (172.22.48.1 in Figure 21). Select BRIDGE. Set MODE to OFF. 10. Arrow back to the ETHERNET menu, and set up the following: Select IP. Set IP ADDRESS appropriately for your LAN (10.0.0.1 in Figure 21). Set SUBNET MASK appropriately. Set DEFAULT GATEWAY to the ATM router connected to the Copper Mountain (10.100.2.145 in Figure 21). Private LAN 10.100.2.148 NAT 10.100.2.148 DHCP 10.0.0.1 10.0.0.2 Host#1 CopperMtn DSLAM TA608 IAD 10.0.0.3 Host#2 ATM DNS Server Router 10.100.2.145 172.22.48.47 172.22.48.1 10.0.0.4 Host#3 Figure 21. Routing with Copper Mountain 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 297 Section 4.5 SDSL ATM UIG 298 Total Access 600 Series System Manual © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A SECTION 4.6 SHDSL ATM USER INTERFACE GUIDE The SHDSL ATM User Interface Guide is designed for use by network administrators and others who will configure and provision the system. This section provides details unique to the SHDSL ATM IADs. It contains an overview, application details, configuration information, and menu descriptions. It is recommended that you review Section 4.1, Commons User Interface Guide in addition to this section. CONTENTS Total Access 600 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Analog Lifeline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Firmware Updates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Voice Over DSL Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Voice Over ATM Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Voice Over DSL Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Configuring the Total Access 600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 System Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 System Config. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 System Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Configuring WAN Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Configuring the Router – Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Configuring the Router – Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Configuring the Router – Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Configuring Voice Support – Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Configuring Voice Support – Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Managing the Modules – Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Managing the Modules – V.35 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Appendix A. Voice Gateway Quick Start Procedure (Voice Turn up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Appendix B. RFC1483 Quick Start (IP Routing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Appendix C. RFC1483 Quick Start (IP Routing with NAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Appendix D. RFC1483 Quick Start (Bridging) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 FIGURES Figure 1. Figure 2. Figure 3. Figure 4. Figure 5. Figure 6. Figure 7. Figure 8. Figure 9. Figure 10. Figure 11. Total Access 600 Rear Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice over DSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Configuration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Utility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WAN Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Config Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Router/Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Global Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 301 303 304 306 309 312 313 314 316 316 321 299 Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Figure 12. Figure 13. Figure 14. Figure 15. Figure 16. Figure 17. Figure 18. Figure 19. Figure 20. 300 Total Access 600 Series System Manual WAN Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Router/Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Router/Logs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice/Config Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice/Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modules Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V.35 Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 323 329 330 332 333 334 336 339 341 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual 1. Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG TOTAL ACCESS 600 OVERVIEW The Total Access® 600 is a complete solution Integrated Access Device (IAD) for Voice over ATM (VoATM) applications. The unit includes a modular network interface, Nx64 V.35 interface, 10/100BaseT interface, FXS ports, life-line voice backup, and an optional battery back-up for added security. The Total Access 600 can provision, test, and provide status for any of the voice and data interfaces. All connections are made via the rear panel. In addition to a built-in IP router, the Total Access 600 contains an echo canceller and ADPCM compression modules necessary for VoATM applications. Analog Lifeline The LIFE LINE connector on the rear panel (see Figure 1) provides assured voice for port 1. When a connection to the Voice Gateway is not possible due to loss of power or some other reason, an on-board relay opens and the first port of the voice connector is provided with analog voice from the analog lifeline connection. For the analog lifeline feature to work, the user must subscribe to an analog voice line and it must be connected via the lifeline connector. Figure 1. Total Access 600 Rear Panel Firmware Updates Firmware can be updated by using XMODEM transfer protocol via the unit’s CRAFT port (see Figure 1) or by using TFTP from a network server. (See DLP-007, Upgrading the Firmware Using XMODEM and DLP-008, Upgrading the Firmware Using TFTP.) The terminal menu is the access point to all other operations. Each terminal menu item has several functions and submenus that identify and provide access to specific operations and parameters. These menu selections are described later in this User Interface Guide. See Section 4.1, Commons User Interface Guide for instructions about navigating the terminal menus. See Section 2.2, Engineering Guidelines for the CRAFT port connection pin-out. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 301 Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG 2. Total Access 600 Series System Manual VOICE OVER DSL OVERVIEW Voice over DSL (VoDSL) refers to providing toll quality voice access to the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) over twisted copper pair using DSL. Data can be combined with multiple voice lines over a single medium via DSL, thus yielding many advantages over traditional TDM technologies. Traditional TDM technologies are limited by statically allocating bandwidth. DSL overcomes this by providing a large bandwidth and utilizing other technologies, such as ATM, to dynamically assign bandwidth as it is needed. Because of this, the user is able to add voice and data connections over a DSL line with flexibility and ease. 3. VOICE OVER ATM OVERVIEW Voice over ATM is the technology used to transmit voice conversations over a data network using Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM). There are several potential benefits to moving voice over a data network using ATM. First, the small, fixed-length cells require lower processing overhead. Second, these small, fixed-length cells allow higher transmission speeds than traditional packet switching methods. ATM allocates bandwidth on demand, making it suitable for high-speed connection of voice, data, and video services. Conventional networks carry data in a synchronous manner. Because empty slots are circulating even when the link is not needed, network capacity is wasted. ATM automatically adjusts the network capacity to meet the system needs. 4. VOICE OVER DSL APPLICATION The Total Access 600 connects to a DSLAM via DSL and ATM. The Total Access 600 has a built in echo canceller that provides G.165 echo cancellation. The module can automatically detect ADPCM and enable it as needed. Figure 2 shows a typical VoDSL application. The Total Access 600 connects to the ATM network, via a DSLAM, to provide both voice and high speed data from a single platform. 302 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG SCU 1181015L1 DS3MX 1181020L1 DS3MX 1181020L1 POWER POWER STATUS STATUS TEST TEST LOCKOUT LOCKOUT ON LINE ON LINE MODE HD-10 BRI Mux HD-10 BRI Mux HD-10 BRI Mux HD-10 BRI Mux QFC-C QFC-C QFC-C QFC-C T1-OR T1-OR T1-OR T1-OR HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C POWER POWER POWER HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C POWER PWR PWR PWR PWR 1181200L1 1181200L1 1181200L1 1181200L1 DSX DSX DSX DSX LBK LBK LBK LBK 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 DSX #1 DSX #1 DSX #1 DSX #1 5 5 5 5 DSX #2 DSX #2 DSX #2 DSX #2 6 6 6 6 DSX #3 DSX #3 DSX #3 DSX #3 7 7 7 7 DSX #4 DSX #4 DSX #4 DSX #4 SELECT HST ACO FSE ALM ACO C R A APS APS TEST/ TEST/ ENABLE ENABLE F T 8 9 8 9 8 9 1181300L1 10 10 DSL DSL 1181310L1 1181300L1 1181310L1 1181310L1 1181310L1 1181101L1 PWR DSX LBK TST ALM TX RX + TST ALM A ACT P GRN = NORM YEL = MAN S LINK S ACT ALM A ACT P GRN = NORM YEL = MAN S V.35 RX GRN = NORM YEL = MAN – R X 6V – R X 6V – X 6V – T R X X M O N RX M O N RX TX A ACT A ACT P P P S V.35 TX DATA S GRN = NORM YEL = MAN S VOICE GRN = NORM YEL = MAN BATT TX M O N RX A ACT P S GRN = NORM YEL = MAN TX M O N RX A ACT P S TST LP1 LP1 LP2 LP2 ALM TX E Q TX E Q E Q RX RX TX M O N RX A GRN = NORM YEL = MAN DSX TST ALM TX RX 1181101L1 PWR DSX LP1 LP2 E Q RX 1181101L1 PWR TST ALM TX E Q RX 1181101L1 DSX LP1 LP2 ALM TX E Q PWR TST LP2 ALM TX RX 1181101L1 DSX LP1 LP2 E Q PWR TST LP1 ALM TX RX 1181101L1 DSX TST LP2 E Q PWR DSX LP1 ALM TX RX 1181101L1 PWR TST LP2 E Q RX 1181101L1 DSX LP1 ALM TX E Q PWR TST LP1 LP2 ALM TX RX 1181101L1 DSX TST LP1 LP2 E Q PWR DSX TST ALM TX RX 1181101L1 PWR DSX LP1 LP2 E Q RX 1181101L1 PWR TST ALM TX E Q RX 1181101L1 DSX LP2 ALM TX E Q PWR LP1 LP2 ALM TX RX 1181101L1 TST LP1 LP2 ALM + R DSX TST LP1 ALM T X TX PWR DSX TST LP + T X TX 1181101L1 PWR DSX LBK ALM + T X TX M O N TST ALM A P GRN = NORM YEL = MAN DSX LP ALM PWR 6V TST ACT PWR LBK LP ALM PWR DSX LBK LP 9 10 DSL 1181300L1 DSX 8 10 DSL 1181300L1 PWR TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX TX M O N RX M O N RX RX ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN PWR/NET Figure 2. Voice over DSL 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 303 Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG 5. Total Access 600 Series System Manual CONFIGURING THE TOTAL ACCESS 600 System Info The SYSTEM INFO menu provides basic information about the unit and contains data fields for editing information. Figure 3 displays the submenus available when you select this menu item. Figure 3. System Information Menu >System Name Provides a user-configurable text string for the name of the Total Access 600. This name can help you distinguish between different installations. You can enter up to 31 characters in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underbar). This name will appear on the top line of all screens. >System Location Provides a user-configurable text string for the location of the Total Access 600. This field is to help you keep track of the actual physical location of the unit. You can enter up to 31 characters in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underbar). >System Contact Provides a user-configurable text string for a contact name. You can use this field to enter the name, phone number, or E-mail address of a person responsible for the Total Access 600 system. You can enter up to 31 characters in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underbar). >Unit Name Product-specific name for the product assembly. >CLEI Code CLEI code for the product assembly. >Part Number ADTRAN part number for the product assembly. 304 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG >Serial Number Serial number of the product assembly. >Firmware Revision Displays the current firmware revision level of the controller. >Bootcode Revision Displays the bootcode revision. >System Uptime Displays the length of time since the Total Access 600 system reboot. >Date/Time Displays the current date and time, including seconds. This field can be edited. Enter the time in 24-hour format (such as 23:00:00 for 11:00 pm). Enter the date in mm-dd-yyyy format (for example, 10-30-1998). Each time you reset the system, this value resets to 0 days, 0 hours, 0 min and 0 secs. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 305 Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual System Config Set up the Total Access 600 operational configuration from the SYSTEM CONFIG menu. Figure 4 shows the items included in this menu. Figure 4. System Configuration Menu >Network Timing Mode Selects the timing source for the entire system. Network is the only timing option available. Network The system’s clock is recovered from the network (WAN interface). >Telnet Access Sets Telnet access to ON or OFF. >Telnet User List Up to four users can be configured for access to the Total Access 600. Each user can be assigned a security level and time out. Name A text string of the user name for this session. Authen Method The user can be authenticated in two ways: PASSWORD RADIUS The Password field is used to authenticate the user. The Radius client is used for authenticating the user. Password When the authenticating method is PASSWORD, this text string is used for the password. Idle Time (1-255) This sets the amount of time you can be idle before you are automatically logged off. 306 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Level This is the security level granted to the user. >Maint Port Menu The Total Access 600’s VT 100 CRAFT port can be accessed via an RJ-48 located on the rear panel. The setup for these ports is under this menu. Password Protect When set to NO, the maintenance port is not password protected. When YES (def), the Total Access 600 will prompt for a password upon startup. Password This is the text string that is used for comparison when password protecting the maintenance port. By default, no password is entered. If you forget your password, type CHALLENGE in all capital letters. Call technical support and have the displayed CHALLENGE code ready. The security level for the maintenance port is always set to 0. This gives full access to all menus. Passwords are case-sensitive. Instructions for Changing Passwords Step Action 1. Select the PASSWORD field—a new PASSWORD field displays. 2. Type the new password in the ENTER field. 3. Type the new password again in the CONFIRM field. The password can contain up to 12 alphanumeric characters. You can also use spaces and special characters in the password. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 307 Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Baud Rate This is the asynchronous rate that the maintenance port will run. The possible values are 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 (def), 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200. Data Bits This is the asynchronous bit rate that the maintenance port will run. The possible values are 7 or 8 (def) bits. Parity This is the asynchronous parity that the maintenance port will run. The possible values are NONE (def), ODD, or EVEN. Stop Bits This is the stop bit used for the maintenance port. The possible values are 1 (def), 1.5 or 2. >Network Time The Total Access 600 unit time can be entered manually from the SYSTEM INFO menu, or the unit can receive time from an NTP/SNTP server. The NETWORK TIME menu includes all parameters relating to how the unit communicates with the time server. Server Type The server type defines which port the Total Access 600 will listen on to receive timing information from the time server. NT Time The Total Access 600 will receive time from an NT server running SNTP software on its TIME port. SNTP The Total Access 600 will receive time directly from an SNTP server. Active This network timing feature can be turned on and off. It determines whether the unit will request and receive time from a time server. Time Zone There are several time zones available for the time to be displayed in. All time zones are based off of Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Adjust for Daylight Saving Since some areas of the world use Daylight Savings Time, the Total Access 600 is designed to adjust the time on the first Sunday in April and the last Sunday in October accordingly if this option is turned on. Host Address This is the IP address of the time server that the Total Access 600 will request and receive time from. Refresh This is the interval of time between each request the Total Access 600 sends out to the time server. A smaller refresh time guarantees that the unit receives the correct time from the server and corrects possible errors more quickly, but it is more taxing on the machine. A range of refresh times is available for the user to decide which is best for their unit. 308 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Status This displays the current status of the time negotiation process. If an error is displayed, check all connections and configurations to try to resolve the problem. System Utility Use the SYSTEM UTILITY menu to view and set the system parameters shown in Figure 5. Figure 5. System Utility Menu >Upgrade Firmware Updates firmware when Total Access 600 enhancements are released. Two transfer methods are available for use in updating the Total Access 600 system controller. Transfer Method The two methods for upgrading are XMODEM and TFTP. (See DLP-007, Upgrading the Firmware Using XMODEM and DLP-008, Upgrading the Firmware Using TFTP for more information.) TFTP requires a TFTP server running somewhere on the network. The Total Access 600 starts a TFTP client function which gets the upgrade code from the TFTP server. Selecting XMODEM will load the upgrade code through the CRAFT port using any PC terminal emulator with xmodem capability. TFTP Server Address This is required when the transfer method is TFTP. It is the IP address or domain name (if DNS is configured) of the TFTP server. TFTP Server Filename This is required when the transfer method is TFTP. It is the case-sensitive file name which contains the upgrade code. Transfer Status This appears when TFTP is used. It displays the status of the transfer as it happens. Any error or success message will be displayed here. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 309 Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Start Transfer This activator is used when the configurable items in this menu are complete. Before using START TRANSFER, the Total Access 600 should have a valid IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway (if required). Abort Transfer Use this activator to cancel any TFTP transfer in progress. >Config Transfer Sends a file containing the Total Access 600 configuration to a PC connected to the CRAFT port using XMODEM protocol or to a file on a TFTP server using the TFTP protocol. See DLP-007, Upgrading the Firmware Using XMODEM and DLP-008, Upgrading the Firmware Using TFTP for details. CONFIG TRANSFER also lets you save the Total Access 600 configuration as a backup file, so you can use the same configuration with multiple Total Access 600 units. In addition, CONFIG TRANSFER can retrieve a configuration file from a TFTP server. To support these transfers, ADTRAN delivers a TFTP program with the Total Access 600 called TFTP Server. You can configure any PC running Microsoft Windows with this software, and store a configuration file. Before using CONFIG TRANSFER, the Total Access 600 should have a valid IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway (if required). Only one configuration transfer session (upload or download) can be active at a time. Transfer Method Displays the method used to transfer the configuration file to or from a server. XMODEM and TFTP are supported. Transfer Type Only BINARY transfers are currently supported. TFTP Server IP Address Specifies the IP address of the TFTP server. Get this number from your system administrator. TFTP Server Filename Defines the name of the configuration file that you transfer to or retrieve from the TFTP server. The default name is ta600.cfg, but you can edit this name. 310 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Current Transfer Status Indicates the current status of the update. Previous Transfer Status Indicates the status of the previous update. Load and Use Config Retrieves the configuration file specified in the TFTP SERVER FILENAME field from the server. To start this command, enter Y to begin or enter N to cancel. If you execute this command, the Total Access 600 retrieves the configuration file, reboots, then restarts using the new configuration. Save Config Remotely Saves the configuration file specified in TFTP SERVER FILENAME to the server identified in TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS. To start this command, enter Y to begin or enter N to cancel. Before using this command, you must have identified a valid TFTP server in TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS. >Ping Allows you to send pings (ICMP requests) to hosts. The following items are under this menu: Only one ping session can be active at a time. Start/Stop Activator to start and cancel a ping test. Host Address IP address or domain name (if DNS is configured) of device to receive the ping. Size (40-1500) Total size of the ping to send. Range is 40 to 1500 bytes. 64 is default. # of Packets Total packets to send every 2 seconds. Setting this to 0 allows the client to ping continuously. # Transmits Total packets sent (read only). # Receives Total packets received (read only). 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 311 Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual %Loss Percentage loss based on ping returned from host (read only). Configuring WAN Settings >DSLAM Type Set this to the type of DSLAM the Total Access 600 will be connecting to. >Layer One Interface This is the physical layer protocol used to connect the DSLAM to the Total Access 600. >Layer Two Protocol This is the data link layer protocol used to connect the DSLAM to the Total Access 600. >ATM Config Use the WAN menu (Figure 6) to access the ATM CONFIG menu. Figure 6. WAN Menu 312 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Use the ATM CONFIG menu (Figure 7) to set the parameters listed below the figure. Figure 7. ATM Config Menu Idle Cells The IDLE CELLS format must be configured for either ATM FORUM or ITU. Configuring this setting incorrectly for a particular circuit will cause poor performance at the ATM layer. This setting must match the configuration setting of the ATM switch or DSLAM at the other end of the circuit. Data Scrambling DATA SCRAMBLING can be ENABLED or DISABLED for cell traffic. Configuring this setting incorrectly for a particular circuit will cause poor performance. This setting must match the configuration setting of the ATM switch or DSLAM at the other end of the circuit. >ATM Stats Use the WAN menu (Figure 6 on page 312) to access the ATM STATS menu (Figure 8) and view the parameters listed below the figure. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 313 Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Figure 8. ATM Stats Menu AP: Tx Cells This is the number of cells transmitted. AP: Rx Cells This is the number of cells received. AP: Rx OAM Cells This is the number of OAM cells received AP: Receive Cells Discarded This is the number of cells received and discarded. An incrementing count in this field could indicate a configuration problem with the ATM layer. AP: Receive Cell Errors This is the number of cells received with an HEC error. AP: Sync This indicates cell delineation at the ATM layer. AP: Out Of Cell Delineation This indicates loss of cell delineation at the ATM layer. AAL5: Transmit Frames This is the number of AAL5 frames transmitted. AAL5: Receive Frames This is the number of AAL5 frames received. AAL5: Transmit Discarded Frames This is the number of AAL5 frames discarded. AAL5: Receive Errors This is the number of AAL5 errors received. 314 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG AAL5: Receive Discarded Frames This is the number of AAL5 frames discarded. AAL5: No ATM Frames This is for internal use only. AAL5: No Data Packets This is for internal use only. Clear Stats This is used to clear the counters on this menu screen. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 315 Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Configuring the Router – Configuration Use the ROUTER/CONFIGURATION menu (Figure 9) to access the GLOBAL, ETHERNET, and WAN menus. Figure 9. Router/Configuration Menu >Global Use the GLOBAL menu (Figure 10) to set up general router functions. Figure 10. Global Menu IP This is used for general IP configuration. Mode This item controls how the Total Access 600 handles IP routes. When this option is set to ON (def), the Total Access 600 will advertise and listen to routes from other IP routers. If OFF, the route table is still used, but only static routes are used for routing IP packets and only the Ethernet port is used. IP packets can be sent over the WAN, but only when bridged. Static Routes Use this menu to enter static routes to other networks. 316 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual ACTIVE IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK GATEWAY HOPS PRIVATE Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Adds this static route entry to the IP routing table when set to YES and removes it (if it was previously added) if set to NO (def). The IP address of the host or network address of the device being routed to. Determines the bits in the previous IP address that are used. If this is to be a host route, it must be set to all ones (255.255.255.255). The IP address of the router to receive the forwarded IP packet. The number of router hops required to get to the network or host. Maximum distance is 15 hops. When set to NO, the Total Access 600 will advertise this static route using RIP. Setting to YES means that the route is kept private. DHCP Server DHCP MODE DHCP RENEWAL TIME When set to ON, the Total Access 600 acts as a DHCP server and will dynamically assign IP, network mask, default gateway, and DNS addresses to any device which transmits a broadcast DHCP request. The addresses assigned are based on the Total Access 600’s own IP address and will be within the same network. The number of hours that the DHCP server should allow the device before it is required to send a new DHCP request. The default is 15 hours, and 0 represents an infinite lease. Domain Names Enter the Total Access 600's domain name and the primary and secondary DNS servers in this menu. DOMAIN NAME PRIMARY DNS SECONDARY DNS PRIMARY NBNS/WINS SECONDARY NBNS/WINS 61200624L1-1A Text string used to represent the domain name used by the Total Access 600. First server to which domain name requests are sent. Server used as a backup, in case the primary address does not respond to the request. Server to which NT domain name requests are sent. Server used when there is no response from the primary server. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 317 Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual UDP Relay This menu configures the Total Access 600 to act as a UDP relay agent for applications requiring a response from UDP hosts that are not on the same network segment as their clients. Mode When this option is set to ON, the Total Access 600 will act as a relay agent. UDP Relay List Up to four relay destination servers can be specified in this list. RELAY ADDRESS This is the IP address of the server that will receive the relay packet. UDP PORT TYPE STANDARD (def) The following standard UDP protocols are relayed when set: DHCP, TFTP, DNS, NTP (Network Time Protocol, port 123, NBNS (NetBios Name Server, port 137), NBDG (NetBIOS Datagram, port 138), and BootP. SPECIFIED When set, the UDP port (1 to 65535) can be specified in the UDP Port columns (up to three per server). UDP PORT 1, 2, 3 Used for specifying UDP ports to be relayed. These fields only apply when UDP PORT TYPE is set to SPECIFIED. Bridge The BRIDGE menu is used to set up the bridge parameters for the Total Access 600. The bridging function runs at the Media Access Control (MAC) level which allows any protocol packets that run over Ethernet to be forwarded. Bridging can run concurrently with IP. However, when IP routing is active, IP packets (which include ARP packets) are not bridged. Mode This is used to enable the bridge function. Address Table The Total Access 600 automatically maintains a table of MAC addresses detected and associates those addresses with the LAN or WAN port from which they were received. AGING FORWARD POLICY 318 The maximum time an idle MAC address remains in the table before being removed. The value is in minutes. When this parameter is set to UNKNOWN (def), any bridge packet with a destination MAC address that is not in the bridge table is forwarded to all other ports. When set to KNOWN, the packet with the unknown destination MAC address is dropped and is not forwarded. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Security Filter Defines The Total Access 600 can filter packets based on certain parameters within the packet. The method used by the Total Access 600 allows the highest flexibility for defining filters and assigning them to a PVC. The filters are set up in two steps: (1) defining the packet types, and (2) adding them to a list under the PVC. This menu is used to define the individual filter defines based on packet type. Filter Defines /MAC Filter Defines The MAC filter is applied to bridge packets only. Bridge packets which are forwarded by the bridge functionality of the Total Access 600 are defined here. Up to 32 MAC defines can be specified. NAME SRC ADDR SRC MASK DEST ADDR DEST MASK MAC TYPE TYPE MSK Identifies the filter entry. 48-bit MAC source address used for comparison. (hexadecimal format) Bits in the MAC source address which are compared. (hexadecimal format) 48-bit MAC destination address used for comparison. (hexadecimal format) Bits in the MAC destination address used for comparison. (hexadecimal format) 16-bit MAC type field used for comparison. (hexadecimal format) Bits in the MAC type field used for comparison. (hexadecimal format) Filter Defines /Pattern Filter Defines The pattern filter is applied to bridge packets only. That is any packet which is forwarded by the bridge functionality of the Total Access 600. Up to 32 pattern defines can be specified. NAME Identifies the filter entry. OFFSET Offset from beginning of packet of where to start the pattern comparison. PATTERN 64 bits used for comparison. (hexadecimal format) MASK Bits in the pattern to be compared. (hexadecimal format) Filter Defines /IP Filter Defines The IP filter defines apply to any IP packet, whether it is routed or bridged. Up to 32 IP defines can be specified. 61200624L1-1A NAME Identifies the filter entry. IP SRC IP address compared to the source address. (dotted decimal format) © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 319 Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual SRC MASK Bits which are used in the source comparison. (dotted decimal format) IP DEST IP address compared to the destination address. (dotted decimal format) DEST MASK Bits which are used in the destination comparison. (dotted decimal format) SRC PORT IP source port number used for comparison Range: 0 to 65535. (decimal format) SRC PORT CMPR Type of comparison that is performed. = means ports equal to not = means port not equal to > means port greater than < means port less than None - means the source port is not compared DST PORT IP destination port number used for comparison Range: 0 to 65535. (decimal format) DST PORT CMPR Type of comparison that is performed = means ports equal to not = means port not equal to > means port greater than < means port less than None - means the destination port is not compared PROTO Protocol used for comparison. Range: 0 to 255. (decimal format) PROTO CMPR Type of comparison that is performed = means protocols equal to not = means protocols not equal to > means protocols greater than < means protocols less than None means the protocol is not compared TCP EST 320 Yes - only when TCP established © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG No - only when TCP not established Ignore - ignore TCP flags >Ethernet Use the ETHERNET menu (Figure 11) to configure the Ethernet port on the Total Access 600. Figure 11. Ethernet Menu IP This is used to set up the IP addresses for the LAN on the Total Access 600. IP Address The IP address assigned to the Total Access 600's Ethernet port is set here. This address must be unique within the network. Subnet Mask This is the IP network mask that is to be applied to the Total Access 600's Ethernet port. Default Gateway The default gateway is used by the Total Access 600 to send IP packets whose destination address is not found in the route table. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 321 Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual RIP Use this menu to enable RIP on the LAN interface. MODE PROTOCOL METHOD Enables or disables RIP. Specifies the RIP protocol. Choices are V1 (def) (which is RIP version 1) or V2 (RIP version 2). Specifies the way the RIP protocol sends out its advertisements. Choices are given below. NONE All routes in the router table are advertised with no modification of the metrics. SPLIT HORIZON Only routes not learned from this circuit are advertised. POISON REVERSE (def) All routes are advertised, but the routes learned from this port are “poisoned” with an infinite metric. DIRECTION Allows the direction at which RIP advertisements are sent and listened to be specified. TX AND RX (def) RIP advertisements are periodically transmitted and are listened to on this port. TX ONLY RIP advertisements are periodically transmitted but are not listened to on this port. RX ONLY RIP advertisements are not transmitted on this port, but are listened. V2 SECRET Enter the secret used by RIP version 2 here. Proxy ARP This feature allows the network portion of a group of addresses to be shared among several physical network segments. The ARP protocol provides a way for devices to create a mapping between physical addresses and logical IP addresses. Proxy ARP makes use of this mapping feature by instructing a router to answer ARP requests as a "proxy" for the IP addresses behind one of its ports. The device which sent the ARP request will then correctly assume that it can reach the requested IP address by sending packets to the physical address that was returned. This technique effectively hides the fact that a network has been (further) subnetted. If this option is set to YES, when an ARP request is received on the Ethernet port the address is looked up in the IP routing table. If the forwarding port is not on the Ethernet port and the route is not the default route, the Total Access 600 will answer the request with its own hardware address. MAC Address This is a read-only MAC address programmed at ADTRAN. 322 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG >WAN Use the WAN menu (Figure 12) to configure WAN settings on the Total Access 600. Figure 12. WAN Menu L2 Protocol Displays the current L2 protocol - ATM (Read Only). ATM Use the ATM menu to setup Data PVCs for the router. Description This is the text description for the PVC. VPI ATM virtual port identifier. VCI This is the ATM virtual channel identifier. PCR (Peak Cell Rate) Limits transmitted cells. QOS (Quality of Service) Indicates this PVC’s traffic class. Protocol This is the protocol supported on the PVC. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 323 Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual RFC1483 IP Use this selection to support IP on this PVC. (These settings only take effect when RFC1483 is the selected protocol.) Active This selection enables IP on this PVC. Far - End IP Address This is the address of the NEXT hop router on this interface. IP netmask This is the network mask used for this interface. Local IP Address This is the IP address for this PVC. NAT Use this menu to set up and use Network Address Translation on this interface. NETWORK ADDRESS PORT TRANSLATION PUBLIC IP ADDRESS MODE TRANSLATION TABLE PUBLIC ADDRESS MODE PROTOCOL PUBLIC PORT MODE 324 By enabling port translation, IP packets are modified as they pass through this interface. During transmission, private addresses are translated into a single public (NAPT) IP address. Incoming packets are translated from the public to private address based on the protocol port numbers. Once enabled, you must set up NAT for use. The port translation requires at least a single real IP address for translating. This value can use the IP assigned to the interface (or assigned via layer 2 protocol like PPP), obtained using DHCP client, or statically specified on this menu. If the address cannot be learned, then it must be specified in order for the translation to work. Add translation entries to "fine tune" special protocols or specify private addresses. The public IP address used for this translation entry can be the NAPT IP address assigned to the link or can be specified. You specify an address to direct packets with certain protocols to different servers. The upper layer protocol that is to be monitored for translation. For TCP and UDP, a port number must also be specified. The public destination port associated with this entry can be specified to add more control over certain types of traffic. The default, ANY PORT, covers all port types. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual PRIVATE ADDRESS MODE PRIVATE PORT MODE TRANSLATE BODY NAT VIEW NAPT ADDRESS ENTRY COUNT ENTRY OVERFLOW COUNT Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG The private IP address can be specified to steer certain protocols and ports to specific servers in the private network. Likewise, internal hosts can be steered to certain servers on the public network. A new request from the public network matching this entry’s public parameters will be dropped if this mode is set to ANY INTERNAL. The private destination port associated with this entry can be specified to add more control over certain types of traffic. Leave as ANY PORT to cover all port types. By default, the application payload in the packet is scanned for occurrences of the private/public IP address in binary or ASCII form. Set this to No for applications where this will cause problems. Shows the protocols that are actively being translated. Represents the public address that is being used as the NAPT address. The number of entries in the NAT table. A count of the dropped entries due to low memory. RIP Use this menu to enable RIP on the WAN interface. (See RIP on page 322 for description of options.) RFC 1483 Bridge This is used to enable bridge mode on this PVC. (These settings only take effect when RFC 1483 is the selected protocol.) PPPoATM The Total Access 600 uses the PPPoATM profile to specify the profile used when connected using PPP. Authentication The authentication menu contains the required parameters for the authentication of the PPP peer and for being authenticated by the PPP peer. Authentication is applied between the Total Access 600 and the PPP peer as follows: TX Method This parameter specifies how the Total Access 600 is to be authenticated by the PPP peer. There are four possible selections. NONE (def) The connection will not allow the PPP peer to PAP, CHAP, OR EAP CHAP OR EAP EAP 61200624L1-1A authenticate it. The connection can be authenticated using PAP, CHAP or EAP. The connection can be authenticated using CHAP or EAP only. The connection will only allow authentication by the peer using EAP. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 325 Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual TX Username This is the username that is used when being authenticated by the PPP peer. TX Password This is the password or secret that is used when being authenticated by the PPP peer. RX Username This is the username used to authenticate the PPP peer. RX Password This is the password or secret that is used to authenticate the PPP peer. IP The IP menu contains the parameters for exchanging IP data with the PPP peer. Mode Setting to ON (def) will permit this connection profile to negotiate PPP IPCP with the PPP peer for exchanging of IP packets. Local IP This is the IP address that is assigned to the PPP link when using numbered links. Leaving this as 0.0.0.0 means the Total Access 600 will determine its IP address using PPP IPCP. If the far end router does not assign an IP address, the PPP link is left unnumbered. Netmask This network mask is applied to the IP/Local IP address for determining the PPP peer's network. If left as 0.0.0.0, a standard network mask is used. Remote IP The PPP peer's IP address or network can be set here, if known. Leaving this at 0.0.0.0 means that the Total Access 600 will determine the PPP peer's IP and network using the PPP IPCP. NAT The Total Access 600 can perform Network Address Translation. This feature is most widely used when connecting to the Internet. The Ethernet network can consist of private network numbers. When this profile is connected, all IP addresses on the Ethernet side are translated into the one real IP address negotiated with the PPP peer (ISP). Multiple stations on the Ethernet side can access the Internet simultaneously. Setting this option to ON will cause the Total Access 600 to perform NAT. In the OFF (def) position, the unit will route across the connection normally. Route The IP parameters are configured in this menu. Usually the Total Access 600 will automatically discover the PPP peer's networks using PPP IPCP and/or RIP. • Route/Static Route Selecting yes will add a static route to the remote peer to the route table. • Route/Private Selecting yes will prevent this route from being advertised. • Route/Hops (1-16) This value is the metric or number of hops that RIP will use in advertising the static route. The range is 1 to 16, where 1 is the default. The value 16 is considered an infinite distance (poisoned route). 326 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG • Route/Force IP When set to YES, the Total Access 600 will force the PPP peer to use the IP address in the LOCAL IP for this profile as its WAN IP address. Normally this is set in the NO (def) position. RIP The RIP parameters can be adjusted from their defaults under this menu. • Mode The Total Access 600 performs RIP over the WAN connection when this is set to ON (def). • Protocol The Total Access 600 performs version 1, V1 (def), or version 2, V2, of RIP on this WAN connection. • Method SPLIT HORIZON POISON REVERSE (def) NONE Only routes not learned on the WAN connection are advertised. All routes are advertised, including routes learned from the WAN connection. These routes are poisoned. All routes are advertised, including routes learned from the WAN connection. No attempt is made to poison these routes. • Direction TX AND RX (def) TX ONLY RX ONLY RIP advertisements are transmitted and listened to on the WAN connection. RIP advertisements are transmitted and not listened to. RIP advertisements are listened to but not transmitted. • Triggered When set to YES, only IP RIP updates are sent when the routing table has changed and learned routes are not "aged." When set to NO (def), updates are sent periodically. • Retain When this Connection List entry is disconnected and this parameter is set to YES, all routes learned from this WAN connection are retained and their routing interface is set to idle. PPP The Total Access 600 supports the IETF standards for the Point-to-Point Protocol. The PPP state machine running in the Total Access 600 can be fine-tuned to support many applications that can be employed. The configurable items under this menu can be changed from their default values for special cases. VJ Compression When this item is set to ON, the Total Access 600 will perform TCP/IP header compression known as Van Jacobson compression to the PPP peer. Max Config This value is the number of unanswered configuration-requests that should be transmitted before giving up on a call. The possible values are 5, 10 (def), 15 and 20. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 327 Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Max Timer This value is the number of seconds to wait between unanswered configuration requests. The possible values are 1 sec, 2 secs (def), 3 secs, 5 secs and 10 secs. Max Failure Due to the nature of PPP, configuration options may not be agreed upon between two PPP peers. This value is the number of configuration-naks that should occur before an option is configuration-rejected. This allows a connection to succeed that might otherwise fail. The possible values are 5 (def), 10, 15 and 20. Encapsulation This is the PPP encapsulation. (LLC or VC-Mux) Filters The Total Access 600 can block packets in and out of a WAN port by use of the filters. They are set up in two steps: 1) define the types of packets that would be of interest in the CONFIGURATION/GLOBAL/SECURITY/FILTER DEFINES menu, and 2) set up the filter type and combination of defines that will cause a packet block. WAN-TO-LAN (In) The packets which come into the Total Access 600 can be filtered in three ways: DISABLED (def) BLOCK ALL FORWARD ALL Turns off packet input filtering. No incoming packets are blocked. All incoming packets from the WAN are blocked except as defined in the FILTERS/IN EXCEPTIONS list. All incoming packets from the WAN are not blocked except as defined in the FILTERS/IN EXCEPTIONS list. In Exceptions This is a list of up to 32 filter entries which can be combined using the operations field. The operations are performed in the order they appear on the list. ACTIVE TYPE MAC PATTERN IP IPX FILTER LIST NAME 328 Turns this entry active when set to ON. Selects the filter define list to reference: from the CONFIGURATION/GLOBAL/SECURITY/FILTER DEFINES/MAC FILTER DEFINES list. from the CONFIGURATION/GLOBAL/SECURITY/FILTER DEFINES/PATTERN FILTER DEFINES list. from the CONFIGURATION/GLOBAL/SECURITY/FILTER DEFINES/IP FILTER DEFINES list. from the CONFIGURATION/GLOBAL/SECURITY/FILTER DEFINES/IPX FILTER DEFINES list. Selects between filters defined in the list. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual NEXT OPER END AND OR Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG The next operation to use to combine with the next filter in the list: the last filter to combination. logically AND this filter with the next filter in the list. logically OR this filter with the next filter in the list. LAN-TO-WAN (Out) The packets which come out toward the WAN from the TA600 can be filtered in three ways: DISABLED (def) BLOCK ALL FORWARD ALL Turns off packet input filtering. No outgoing packets are blocked. All outgoing packets to the WAN are blocked except as defined in the FILTERS/OUT EXCEPTIONS list. All outgoing packets to the WAN are not blocked except as defined in the FILTERS/OUT EXCEPTIONS list. Out Exceptions This is a list of up to 32 filter entries. The setup is exactly the same as the FILTERS/IN EXCEPTIONS list. Configuring the Router – Status Use the ROUTER/STATUS menu to view and set the parameters shown in Figure 13. The ROUTER/STATUS screens give the user useful information for debugging the current routes in the Total Access 600. Figure 13. Router/Status Menu 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 329 Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual >Session This menu maintains statistics about the active ATM PVCs. >ARP cache This is a listing of the currently connected Ethernet port on the LAN. >Bridge Table This shows the detected MAC addresses and the interface to which they are associated. >IP Routes This shows the current routes in the Total Access 600 and their use. >LAN Stats This shows traffic over the LAN interface. >IP Stats This shows IP traffic through the Total Access 600. Configuring the Router – Logs The Logs menu (Figure 14) contains logs displaying important information about the running condition of the Total Access 600. The logs can be set to capture diagnostics of error conditions only by way of a log level. The levels are divided up as follows: level 0 - Fatal event (causes reset) level 1 - Critical event level 2 - Error event level 3 - Warning event level 4 - Notify event level 5 - Informational event level 6 - Debugging event Figure 14. Router/Logs Menu 330 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Sys log Host Set this to the IP address or domain name (if DNS configured) of the sys log host device. All log events are sent to this device. PPP Log Information pertaining to the PPP negotiation and authentication is logged in the PPP log. Connection Log Information pertaining to the call placement and answering is logged in the Connection log. Network Log Information pertaining to routing protocols is placed in this log. Each log (PPP log, Connection log, and Network log) contains the following elements. Active When set to YES (def), PPP events below or equal the log level are logged into the log. Wrap When set to YES (def), new PPP events will overwrite old PPP events when the log is full. All logging will stop when the log is full and set to NO. Level In order to log events, they must be at or below this level. Range is 0 to 6. The default is 3. View This menu displays the log list. The fields are as follows: DATE/TIME Date and time event occurred. LEVEL Level associated with this event (0-6). MESSAGE Text message for this event. If message is too long to fit on the line, another event appears below it continuing the message. Clear This clears the log when activated. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 331 Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Configuring Voice Support – Config Use the VOICE/CONFIG menu to view and set the parameters shown in Figure 15. Figure 15. Voice/Config Menu >Call Control The CALL CONTROL setting is used to configure the correct Voice Gateway protocol for voice signaling control between the Total Access 600 and the configured Gateway. The CALL CONTROL setting must be configured correctly before the voice circuits will work correctly. The Total Access 600 supports Jetstream, Tollbridge, and CopperCom Voice Gateways. >VPI The VPI setting is used to configure the Total Access 600 virtual path setting used to communicate with the configured Voice Gateway. >VCI The VCI setting is used to configure the Total Access 600 virtual circuit setting used to communicate with the configured Voice Gateway. 332 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Configuring Voice Support – Status Use the VOICE/STATUS menu to view and set the parameters shown in Figure 16. Figure 16. Voice/Status Menu >Gateway Stats The GATEWAY STATS menu shows the current state of the communication link between the Total Access 600 and the Voice Gateway. The Gateway Link is indicated as UP or DOWN. A count of management messages is indicated along with the number of active calls in progress. >PVC Stats The PVC STATS menu shows the current state of the virtual circuit used between the Voice Gateway and the Total Access 600 IAD for voice signaling and voice payload delivery. >POTS Stats The POTS STATS menu shows real-time indication status of each voice port on the Total Access 600. From this menu, on a per port basis, the user can determine which ports are active/inactive. Several statistics at this menu are used only for internal ADTRAN development. Task, Inserts, and Drops indicators are for internal use only. >Clear Stats The CLEAR STATS menu can be used to clear the counters used for Voice Status menus. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 333 Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Managing the Modules – Modules Use the MODULES menu to view and set the parameters shown in Figure 17. The Total Access 600 contains four fixed modules: The WAN/Network interface, FXS, Echo Canceller/ADPCM module, and the V.35 interface. The MODULES table allows management of the on-board modules in the Total Access 600. This menu contains MENU, ALARM, TEST, and STATUS indicators/menus customized for each module. Figure 17. Modules Menu >NET (SHDSL) Menu Data Rate Used to select data rate of the network connection. (This should match the DSLAM settings.) Frame Mode Used to select either SDSL Framed (def) or SDSL Framed Plesiosynchronous with bit stuffing. (This should match the DSLAM settings.) Annex A/B Used to select ANNEX A, ANNEX B, or both. ITU-991.2/Gspan Chooses between ITU-T 991.2 or GLOBESPAN V1.2. Test These tests are meant for debug purposes only. A reboot may be required to return the Total Access 600 to normal operation. Network Loopback Sets the network interface in loopback mode. 334 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Send/Check 2047 Sends and checks a 2047 BERT pattern over the network interface (assuming LTU in loopback). Results of the test can be found in Test Results. Send/Check ALT Sends and checks an alternating pattern over the network interface (assuming LTU in loopback). Results of the test can be found in Test Results. Status Signal State Internal ADTRAN use. Data Rate Rate at which the WAN has connected. Frame Mode Framing mode. G.hs State Internal ADTRAN use. G.hs Event Internal ADTRAN use. >FXS Refer to Section 4.7, FXS User Interface Guide. >EC/ADPCM Refer to Section 4.7, FXS User Interface Guide. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 335 Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Managing the Modules – V.35 Setup Use the V.35 SETUP menu to view and set the parameters shown in Figure 18. Figure 18. V.35 Setup Menu CHANNEL RATE and EIA settings are supported via this menu option. For all typical applications, these settings are left in their default states. >ATM/FR IWF This menu contains the setup and status for the ATM/Frame Relay interworking functions. Mode The MODE setting configures the V.35 port for FRF5 or FRF8 operation, depending upon the application being supported. FRF5 This is also known as Network Interworking. Use this mode for Frame Relay over ATM. FRF8 This is also known as Service Interworking. In this mode, the Total Access 600 performs a translation between Frame Relay and ATM protocols. Configuration The CONFIGURATION menu is used to support the configuration of Frame-to-ATM interworking, signaling formats, timeout values, and PVC settings. 336 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG The following settings are used for FRF5. LAN FR MAINT PROTOCOL LAN FR POLL TIMEOUT T392 (5-30) FRN PORT CONFIG 61200624L1-1A Frame Relay maintenance or signaling protocol between local V.35 port and the attached DTE port, support ANSI Annex A, CCITT Q933 Annex D, CISCO LMI or Static (no signaling). T392 for signaling protocol, typical value 15. No meaning if Maint Protocol is Static. Logical Frame Relay ports over ATM. Up to 4 ports are supported with each port supporting up to 4 DLCI mappings. Go to NUM field. Typing "i" or "I" will insert another entry, and typing "d" or "D" will delete one entry. NAME To identify your port. ATM VPI Specifies the virtual path over which this logical port is running. ATM VCI Specifies the virtual circuit over which this logical port is running. DE MAP Frame Relay to ATM DE mapping; default value (Frn Only, ATM 0) suggested. CLPI MAP ATM to Frame Relay CLPI map; default value (Frn Only) suggested. D/C Set D/C field in the header to 0 or 1. HEADER Header format; only 2 bytes supported now. MAINT PROTOCOL Maintenance or signaling protocol over this logical Frame Relay port. Support Annex A, Annex D, CISCO LMI or Static. MUX MODE Many DLCIs or one DLCI mapping over this port. DLCI MAP Actual DLCI mappings. LAN DLCI The DLCI configured over local V.35 Frame Relay port. NET DLCI The DLCI configured over the WAN side logical Frame Relay port. ACTIVE Always active, not configurable. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 337 Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual The following settings are used for FRF8. LAN FR MAINT PROTOCOL LAN FR POLL TIMEOUT T392 (5-30) FR/ATM PVC MAPPING 338 Frame Relay maintenance or signaling protocol between local V.35 port and the attached DTE port, support ANSI Annex A, CCITT Q933 Annex D, CISCO LMI or Static (no signaling). T392 for signaling protocol, typical value 15. No meaning if Maint Protocol is Static. Up to 4 mappings are supported. FR DLCI Frame Relay DLCI on V.35 port. ATM VPI Specifies the virtual path to which DLCI is mapped. ATM VCI Specifies the virtual circuit to which DLCI is mapped. TRANSLATE Translate or transparent mode between Frame Relay frames and ATM cells. DE MAP Map Frame Relay DE bit to ATM CLPI bit, Always 0, Always 1 or Convert each other. FECN MAP Map Frame Relay FECN bit to ATM EFCI bit, Always 0, Always 1 or Convert each other. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Appendix A. Voice Gateway Quick Start Procedure (Voice Turn up) A typical VoATM application (see Figure 19) uses a Total Access 600 connected to an ATM network. For voice applications, a Voice Gateway is needed to interface with the PSTN. Jetstream, Tollbridge, and CopperCom are popular Gateway types. SCU 1181015L1 DS3MX 1181020L1 POWER STATUS TEST DS3MX 1181020L1 POWER STATUS TEST MODE HD-10 BRI Mux HD-10 BRI Mux HD-10 BRI Mux HD-10 BRI Mux QFC-C QFC-C QFC-C QFC-C T1-OR T1-OR T1-OR T1-OR HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C POWER POWER POWER HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C HTU-C POWER PWR PWR PWR PWR 1181200L1 1181200L1 1181200L1 1181200L1 DSX DSX DSX DSX LBK LBK LBK LBK 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 DSX #1 DSX #1 DSX #1 DSX #1 5 5 5 5 DSX #2 DSX #2 DSX #2 DSX #2 6 6 6 6 DSX #3 DSX #3 DSX #3 DSX #3 7 7 7 7 DSX #4 DSX #4 DSX #4 DSX #4 8 8 8 8 TST TST TST 9 9 ALM ALM ALM SELECT HST ACO FSE ALM ACO LOCKOUT C ON LINE LOCKOUT ON LINE R A APS APS TEST/ TEST/ ENABLE ENABLE F T 9 1181300L1 10 10 10 DSL DSL DSL 1181300L1 1181310L1 1181300L1 1181310L1 1181310L1 1181310L1 1181101L1 PWR DSX DSX LBK ACT A TX RX S ACT A ACT P GRN = NORM YEL = MAN LINK S + TST ALM A ACT P GRN = NORM YEL = MAN DSX S V.35 RX GRN = NORM YEL = MAN – + T R X X 6V – R X 6V – R X 6V – TX TX M O N M O N M O N RX RX RX T R X X RX A ACT A ACT A ACT P P P P S S GRN = NORM YEL = MAN V.35 TX S GRN = NORM YEL = MAN DATA S GRN = NORM YEL = MAN S VOICE RX TX TX GRN = NORM YEL = MAN BATT RX RX RX ACT ACT ACT GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN RX ACT GRN=NORM YEL=MAN M O N RX ACT GRN=NORM YEL=MAN LP2 ALM TX TX E Q E Q RX TX RX TX M O N TX M O N RX 1181101L1 LP1 LP2 E Q RX M O N TST LP1 ALM TX E Q TX RX DSX TST LP1 LP2 ALM TX RX PWR DSX TST LP1 LP2 1181101L1 PWR DSX TST M O N RX 1181101L1 PWR DSX ALM E Q TX M O N RX 1181101L1 PWR TX RX TX RX 1181101L1 LP2 RX M O N RX ALM TX E Q RX TX M O N LP1 LP2 RX TX M O N TST LP1 RX TX M O N DSX TST RX TX M O N PWR DSX ALM E Q RX TX M O N 1181101L1 PWR TX E Q RX TX RX A ACT P LP2 ALM TX RX M O N A LP1 LP2 E Q 1181101L1 TST LP1 ALM TX E Q DSX TST LP2 ALM TX PWR DSX LP1 LP2 1181101L1 PWR TST LP1 E Q 1181101L1 DSX TST ALM TX E Q PWR DSX LP1 LP2 ALM TX 1181101L1 PWR TST LP2 E Q 1181101L1 DSX LP1 ALM TX E Q PWR TST LP2 ALM TX 1181101L1 DSX LP1 LP2 ALM + T X TX M O N PWR TST LP1 ALM + T X TX 1181101L1 DSX TST LP ALM PWR DSX LBK LP ALM PWR 6V P GRN = NORM YEL = MAN PWR LBK LP ALM PWR DSX LBK LP 9 10 DSL 1181300L1 PWR M O N RX RX ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN GRN=NORM YEL=MAN PWR/NET Figure 19. Application Diagram To configure a Total Access 600 for use with the Voice Gateway, you need to know the VPI and VCI to be used on the ATM network. You also need to know the format for Idle Cells and whether Data Scrambling is used on this ATM network. The following procedure will help you navigate the Total Access 600 menus for configuring the necessary elements for VoATM with the Voice Gateway. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 339 Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Voice Turn Up Step Action 1. From the Total Access 600 main menu, select the WAN menu. Select DSLAM TYPE and select the name of the DSLAM type you are using. (At this point you need to back out of the menu to save the changes. The unit will need to reboot if it was not previously configured for this DSLAM type.) 2. Select DSL RATE CONFIG (BIT RATE) and change the setting to match that in your DSLAM. (If this field is read-only, allow a few seconds for autobaud to expire and the field will change to writeable.) 3. Select WAN, and then select the ATM CONFIG menu. 4. Enter the IDLE CELLS format for your network. 5. Set DATA SCRAMBLING appropriately for your network. 6. Back all the way out to the top level Total Access 600 menu, and then select the VOICE menu. (From this menu, the appropriate Voice information for working with the Voice Gateway is entered.) 7. Select CONFIG, and from the CONFIG menu, enter the Gateway type under CALL CONTROL and enter the VPI and VCI values for communicating with that Gateway. CALL CONTROL should be set to the Gateway type, and the VPI and VCI values should be set appropriately for your network. 8. To verify correct setup, use the STATUS menu (under the VOICE menu) to look at the current status of the voice connection. Under STATUS, you can view the GATEWAY STATS and information about the voice PVC along with information about the POTs ports available on the Gateway. The GATEWAY STATS menu should show the Gateway Link is up (if everything is configured correctly). A visual inspection of the VOICE LED on the front panel will also yield the status. Green = Up. Red = Down. 340 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Appendix B. RFC1483 Quick Start (IP Routing) The Total Access 600 allows for complete integration of voice and data delivery from one compact platform (see Figure 20). Once you have completed the voice turn up procedure from the previous example, adding data to the circuit requires some additional setup. TX RX LINK V.35 RX V.35 TX DATA VOICE BATT PWR/NET Figure 20. Application Diagram To configure a Total Access 600 for IP routing, you need to know the VPI and VCI values for the data circuit on your network. You also need the IP address of the next hop router in the circuit. The table on the next page shows how to configure the Total Access 600 for IP Routing. .. IP Routing Step 61200624L1-1A Action 1. From the Total Access 600 main menu, select the WAN menu. (Here you set up the ATM network.) 2. Select the ATM CONFIG menu. 3. Enter the IDLE CELLS format for your network. 4. Set DATA SCRAMBLING appropriately for your network. 5. Back all the way out to the top level Total Access 600 menu, and then select the ROUTER menu. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 341 Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual IP Routing 6. Select CONFIGURATION. From the CONFIGURATION menu, you will set up addresses for your LAN and WAN. For basic IP routing, use all the default values from the GLOBAL menu. 7. From the ETHERNET menu, enter the IP menu to enter your LAN configuration. 8. Enter your LAN IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK, and DEFAULT GATEWAY information. For this example, the IP ADDRESS is 192.168.1.2, the SUBNET MASK is 255.255.255.0, and the DEFAULT GATEWAY is 10.25.4.10. 9. Arrow back to the main ROUTER CONFIGURATION menu, and select the WAN menu and then the ATM menu. (Here you will enter your data PVC information.) 10. Create a new PVC by entering the menu. Enter your VPI and VCI values. 11. From the RFC1483 IP menu, enter your LAN information. For this example, the FAR END IP ADDRESS is 10.25.4.9, the IP NETMASK is 255.255.255.252, and the LOCAL IP ADDRESS is 10.25.4.10. 12. 342 Arrow back to the top level Total Access 600 menu to activate your changes. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Appendix C. RFC1483 Quick Start (IP Routing with NAT) To illustrate the use of NAT, consider the example from Appendix B. To set up a single public address that will be used to access the public network, you will use the NAT menu on the WAN/ATM/RFC1483 IP menu. IP Routing with NAT Step 61200624L1-1A Action 1. From the NAT menu, set NETWORK ADDRESS PORT TRANSLATION to ENABLED. (This will enable translation and allow you to enter the NAT options.) 2. Set PUBLIC IP ADDRESS MODE to SPECIFIED so you can enter your public address. During transmission, private addresses are translated into this public (NAPT) address. 3. You will also need to set up the Translation Table to do translation on the body of the packets for certain protocols, such as FTP, to work correctly. 4. From the TRANSLATION TABLE menu, create a new entry by arrowing into the table. 5. For PUBLIC ADDRESS MODE, select NAPT ADDRESS to use the previously specified public address. 6. For PROTOCOL, select TCP. 7. Make sure that TRANSLATE BODY is set to YES. © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 343 Section 4.6 SHDSL ATM UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Appendix D. RFC1483 Quick Start (Bridging) The Total Access 600 allows for complete integration of voice and data delivery from one compact platform. Once you have completed the voice turn up procedure from the previous example, adding data to the circuit requires some additional setup. To configure a Total Access 600 for Bridging, you need to know the VPI and VCI values for the data circuit on your network. Bridging Step Action 1. From the Total Access 600 main menu, select the WAN menu. (Here you set up the ATM network.) 2. Select the ATM CONFIG menu. 3. Enter the IDLE CELLS format for your network. 4. Set DATA SCRAMBLING appropriately for your network. 5. Back all the way out to the top level Total Access 600 menu, and then select the ROUTER menu. 6. Enter the CONFIGURATION menu. From this menu, you will set up addresses for your LAN and WAN. For basic IP routing, use all the default values from the GLOBAL menu. 7. From the ETHERNET menu, enter the IP menu to enter your LAN configuration. 8. Enter your LAN IP ADDRESS and SUBNET MASK. For this example, the IP ADDRESS is 192.168.1.2 and the SUBNET MASK is 255.255.255.0. This is not required, but will allow Telnet configuration and TFTP upgrades from the LAN. 9. Arrow back to the main ROUTER CONFIGURATION menu, and select the WAN menu and then the ATM menu. (Here you will enter your data PVC information.) 10. Create a new PVC by entering the menu. Enter your VPI and VCI values. 11. Disable IP on the RFC1483 IP menu and enable Bridging on the RFC1483 BRIDGE menu. (This enables the Total Access 600 as a bridge.) 12. Arrow back to the top level Total Access 600 menu to activate your changes. All packets that come in on the Ethernet will be forwarded on the WAN. 344 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A SECTION 4.7 FXS USER INTERFACE GUIDE The FXS User Interface Guide is designed for use by network administrators and others who will configure and provision the system. It gives a general description, specifications, and a menu description for the Total Access 600 FXS Voice Ports. It is recommended that you review Section 4.1, Commons User Interface Guide in addition to this section. CONTENTS Total Access 600 FXS Voice Ports Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Functional Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 FXS Voice Ports Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 LED Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Methods of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Terminal Menu Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 FXS Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 TX (dB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 RX (dB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Svc Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Coding Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Line Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Ring V-rms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 FXS Voice Ports Test Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Test Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 FXS Voice Ports Status Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Total Access 600 Features Used with FXS Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Factory Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Echo Canceller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 345 Section 4.7 FXS UIG 346 Total Access 600 Series System Manual © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual 1. Section 4.7 FXS UIG TOTAL ACCESS 600 FXS VOICE PORTS OVERVIEW The Total Access 600 comes complete with integrated FXS Voice ports. Each port provides an analog voice connection via any standard analog telephone. The last two digits of the product name indicate the number of on-board ports. The Total Access 604 contains four ports, the Total Access 608 contains eight ports, etc. Functional Description Because the FXS ports are located on-board, no installation is required. The VOICE indicator on the Total Access 600 front panel indicates off-hook status on any port by a flashing lamp. When all ports are on-hook, the lamp remains solid. Additional status information is available via the terminal menus, accessible through either a VT 100 terminal connected to the Total Access 600 CRAFT port or via a Telnet session established through the Ethernet port. See Section 2, Engineering Guidelines for the CRAFT port connection pin-out. Features Features of the FXS include: • • • • • • • 4,8,12,16 and 24 fixed port configurations µ-law encoding and decoding Loop start signaling Up to 1000 foot V.90 modem compliant Support for CLASS™ features such as Caller ID UL 60950 third edition compliant 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 347 Section 4.7 FXS UIG 2. Total Access 600 Series System Manual FXS VOICE PORTS SPECIFICATIONS The FXS conforms to the following specifications: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS Loop Current 24 mA nominal 20 mA minimum 600 ohm Return Loss 600 ohm + 2.16 µF, ERL > 28 dB, SRL > 20 dB Trans Hybrid Loss 600 ohm + 2.16 µF, ERL > 28 dB, SRL > 20 dB Longitudinal Balance 200, 500, and 1000 Hz: > 58 dB min., > 63 dB avg. 3000 Hz: > 53 dB min., > 58 dB avg. Frequency Response 300 to 3400 Hz: -0.5 and 1.0 dB Idle Channel Noise < 20 dBrnC Signal-to-Distortion Ratio 0 to -30 dBm0: > 33 dB -30 to -40 dBm0: > 27 dB Terminating Impedance 3. WIRING A single 50-pin female amphenol connector on the rear of the Total Access 600 chassis provides the interconnect wiring for the four analog circuits on each access module. Figure 1 shows the pinout connection. 25 50 24 49 23 48 22 47 21 20 46 45 19 44 18 43 17 16 42 41 15 40 14 39 13 12 38 37 11 36 10 35 9 34 8 33 7 32 6 31 5 30 4 29 3 28 2 27 1 26 P P P Slot 6 P P P P Slot 5 P P P P Slot 4 P P P P Slot 3 P P P P Slot 2 P P P P P Slot 1 NC NC T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R Circuit 4 Circuit 3 Circuit 2 Circuit 1 Circuit 4 Circuit 3 Circuit 2 Circuit 1 Circuit 4 Circuit 3 Circuit 2 Circuit 1 Circuit 4 Circuit 3 Circuit 2 Circuit 1 Circuit 4 Circuit 3 Circuit 2 Circuit 1 Circuit 4 Circuit 3 Circuit 2 Circuit 1 50 PIN AMP RECEPTACLE Figure 1. Connector Pin Assignments 348 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual 4. Section 4.7 FXS UIG OPERATION Provisioning, status, and testing of the FXS ports are performed via the MODULES screen menus and a VT 100 terminal. The VOICE LED on the front panel provides quick status. LED Status After the initialization sequence, the VOICE LED provides collective status of the analog service. Red Voice Gateway or Network connection prevents analog service. Green Analog service is available. Flashing Off Hook (Busy) Methods of Operation You can control and configure the FXS from the terminal menus, allowing detailed configuration, status, and diagnostic. The remainder of this section describes the menu items presented when managing the Total Access 600 via the terminal menu. Access the terminal menu using either a VT 100 terminal attached to the Total Access 600’s CRAFT port or a Telnet session established through the unit’s Ethernet port. The factory default is no password. Terminal Menu Structure The Total Access 600 uses a hierarchical menu structure to provide access to all of its features. The top-most menu level leads to submenus which are grouped by functionality. All menu items display in the terminal window. To access the FXS, activate the MODULES menu. From the MODULES menu, select the FXS menu, and then press Enter to access the features of the FXS ports. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 349 Section 4.7 FXS UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual FXS Menu Options Some provisioning options are read-only fields. The Total Access 600 does not allow configuration of all FXS line variables. Figures 2 and 3 show the menu options available for the FXS. (Figure 3 shows the menu options available when you scroll over by arrowing right.) The pages following the figures describe these options. Figure 2. FXS Menu Options Figure 3. Additional FXS Menu Options 350 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.7 FXS UIG Port Identifies the port involved. Mode Options are given below. Loop Start Sets the port to use FXS loop start signalling on the T-span and loop start supervision on the analog 2-wire interface. TX (dB) Indicates the Tx direction transmit level points. The transmission level is indicated in dBm. RX (dB) Indicates the Rx direction transmit level points. The transmission level is indicated in dBm. Svc Mode Indicates whether the ports are IN SERVICE or OUT OF SVC. This does not indicate whether the port has been mapped. Coding Type Indicates voice encoding type. PCM (G.711) indicates standard 8-bit sampling. ADPCM (G.721) indicates that 32 kbps compression is being used. This option only appears in ATM code. Line Z Indicates the line impedance. Ring V-rms Controls the DC offset and voltage settings during the ring cycle. The following options are available: 45V-RMS (20V DC OFFSET), 55V-RMS (10V DC OFFSET), and 62V-RMS (NO DC OFFSET). Many analog phones work better with a DC offset. 45V-RMS is the recommended and default setting for most scenarios. This option is only available in the 604/608. The 612/616/624’s have a ring voltage of 94 VAC. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 351 Section 4.7 FXS UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual FXS Voice Ports Test Options Tests are conducted on the FXS ports via the MODULES screen menus and a VT 100 terminal. Port Identifies the port involved. Test To initiate a module test, scroll to the TEST column and press Enter. Options are detailed below. Customer Ring Test The Customer Ring Test will activate the unit’s ring relay in a 2-on/4-off ring cadence, providing ringing to the customer loop. Test Status Tells whether a test is in progress. FXS Voice Ports Status Options The transmit and receive signalling bits are shown in the STATUS menu of the FXS ports. Total Access 600 Features Used with FXS Options Factory Restore You can restore the factory default settings for an FXS by pressing F while the cursor is over the SLT number (this action restores the factory settings for all of the module options), while the cursor is over the PRT number (this action restores the factory settings for the port), or while the cursor is over an individual field (this action restores factory settings for the particular field only). Echo Canceller By using an integrated echo canceller and Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation (ADPCM) encoder/decoder, the Total Access 600 can support a variety of voice applications. Voice over packet/cell applications require that echo cancellation techniques be applied to the voice traffic to achieve high quality voice. By using ADPCM compression schemes outlined in ITU-T G.721, the Total Access 600 can minimize bandwidth requirements and more efficiently utilize the physical link. 352 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 4.7 FXS UIG Echo Canceller Menus Figure 4 shows the MODULES menu, from which you access echo canceller options. Figure 4. Modules Menu Arrow to EC/DPCM and over to the MENU column. Press Enter. The PROVISIONING menu appears. Figure 5. Provisioning Menu Arrow to ECHO CANCELLER and press Enter to view choices for this menu (ENABLE or DISABLE). Arrow to ADPCM and press Enter to access the PROVISIONING/ADPCM menu (Figure 6). 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 353 Section 4.7 FXS UIG Total Access 600 Series System Manual Figure 6. Provisioning/ADPCM Menu 354 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A DETAIL LEVEL PROCEDURES DLP-001 Connecting the Terminal or PC to the CRAFT Port .............................................................357 DLP-002 Logging in to the System ......................................................................................................359 DLP-003 Adding/Removing Telnet Users and Changing Password Security Levels ..........................363 DLP-004 Setting Ethernet IP Parameters ...........................................................................................367 DLP-005 Verifying Communications Over an IP LAN .........................................................................369 DLP-006 Telnetting to the Unit ............................................................................................................373 DLP-007 Upgrading the Firmware Using XMODEM ...........................................................................377 DLP-008 Upgrading the Firmware Using TFTP ..................................................................................381 DLP-009 Saving the Current Configuration Using TFTP .....................................................................385 DLP-010 Loading the Current Configuration Using TFTP ...................................................................389 DLP-011 Saving the Current Configuration Using XMODEM .............................................................393 DLP-012 Loading the Current Configuration Using XMODEM ............................................................395 DLP-013 Saving and Loading Text Configuration Using the Terminal Command Line ......................397 DLP-014 Unit Installation Using the Auto-Config Feature ...................................................................401 DLP-015 TDM to ATM Upgrade ..........................................................................................................405 DLP-016 A.03 to A.04 Firmware Upgrade ...........................................................................................409 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 355 Section 5 DLP-Index 356 Total Access 600 Series System Manual © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A CONNECTING THE TERMINAL OR PC TO THE CRAFT PORT Introduction Provisioning is facilitated by a series of intuitive menus that are accessible on a computer screen. Connecting either a VT100 terminal or a PC emulating a VT100 terminal to the CRAFT port on the rear of the unit allows access to the menus and management features of the unit. This section specifies how to connect the VT100 terminal or PC to the unit. Access to the unit is through the port labeled CRAFT. It is an RJ-45 connector on the back of the unit. A special ADTRAN adapter is required for access to this port. Prerequisite Procedures The unit must be powered for terminal communication to function. Tools and Materials Required • • • VT100 compatible terminal or computer with terminal emulation software Appropriate cable to connect terminal to the unit (customer-provided) DB-9 female to RJ-45 female adapter (customer-provided) for connecting to the CRAFT port on the rear of the unit. This adapter is ADTRAN-proprietary. To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm. In this DLP, unit refers to the Total Access 604, 608, 612, 616, and 624. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 357 Section 5 DLP-001 Total Access 600 Series System Manual DLP-001 Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed 1. Connect a VT100 terminal to the unit. • • • Set the parameters of the VT100 terminal to: – 9600 baud rate – 8 data bits – No parity – 1 stop bit – No flow control If the terminal has a parallel setting, disable it and use serial port. Plug the RJ-45 male end of the data cable into the CRAFT port on the rear of the unit by using the ADTRAN-proprietary DB-9 to RJ-45 adapter. Make the connection to the VT100 terminal as appropriate for your equipment. 2. Connect a PC emulating a VT100 terminal to the unit. 3. Most personal computers or laptops can run communications software that will emulate a VT100 terminal. Windows programs such as Terminal© or Hyperterminal© are two such examples in the Windows format. However, there are many other adequate, commercially available software packages which will allow your PC or laptop to emulate a VT100 terminal. Certain configuration items must be set on a PC or laptop for it to act as a VT100 terminal for the unit. • • • Set the PC for direct connect on the appropriate com port (instead of dial-up connection). Set the parameters of the communications software to: – 9600 baud rate – 8 data bits – No parity – 1 stop bit – No flow control Plug the RJ-45 male end of the data cable into the CRAFT port on the rear of the unit. Make connection to the PC or laptop as appropriate for your equipment. 4. Press <Enter> or <Ctrl> <R> until Login menu appears on screen. You are now ready to log in to the unit, as described in DLP-002, Logging in to the System. A VT100 terminal program is provided with the ADTRAN Utilities. Follow-up Procedures Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there. 358 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A LOGGING IN TO THE SYSTEM Introduction Once connected to the unit via either a VT100 terminal or PC configured as a VT100 terminal, it is necessary to log in to the system to gain access to the management and provisioning functions. This DLP provides specific steps for logging in to the system and accessing the various management and provisioning functions. Prerequisite Procedures Complete DLP-001, Connecting the Terminal or PC to the CRAFT Port, before logging in to a unit. Tools and Materials Required • • • VT100 compatible terminal or computer with terminal emulation software Appropriate cable to connect terminal to the unit (customer-provided) DB-9 female to RJ-45 female adapter (customer-provided) for connecting to the CRAFT port on the rear of the unit. This adapter is ADTRAN-proprietary. To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm. In this DLP, unit refers to the Total Access 604, 608, 612, 616, and 624. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 359 Section 5 DLP-002 Total Access 600 Series System Manual DLP-002 Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed 1. After connecting to the system, a blank screen will appear. Pressing any key will display the login screen shown below. The cursor will blink at the LOGIN field, waiting for a password to be entered. 2. At the LOGIN field, enter the password for the unit. Passwords are case sensitive. There is not a manufacturer’s password by default. Press <Enter> to enter the menu. If a customer forgets the password, they can contact ADTRAN Technical Support at 888-4ADTRAN for instructions on how to access the unit. 360 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 5 DLP-002 3. Upon entering the correct password, the MAIN MENU is displayed as shown below. 4. You are now logged in to the menu system. CONTROL L or CONTROL S will return to the login prompt shown in step 1. Follow-up Procedures Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 361 Section 5 DLP-002 362 Total Access 600 Series System Manual © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A ADDING/REMOVING TELNET USERS AND CHANGING PASSWORD SECURITY LEVELS Introduction All menu items in the unit are protected by passwords of varying security levels. By assigning different passwords to different security levels, the System Administrator can control which users can view or change various menu items. You can assign multiple passwords at the same access level. This way, different users with the same access privileges can have different passwords. This procedure details the steps which must be performed to add/remove user profiles and assign password security levels in the unit. Tools and Materials Required • • • • • VT100 compatible terminal or computer with terminal emulation software Appropriate cable to connect terminal to the unit (customer-provided) DB-9 female to RJ-45 female adapter (customer-provided) for connecting to the CRAFT port on the rear of the unit. This adapter is ADTRAN-proprietary. Ethernet cable from the 10/100BASET port on the unit to a hub (customer-provided) Use Ethernet crossover if going from the unit to a PC (customer-provided). To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm. In this DLP, unit refers to the Total Access 604, 608, 612, 616, and 624. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 363 Section 5 DLP-003 Total Access 600 Series System Manual DLP-003 Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed 1. Connect to the unit using either the 10/100BASET or CRAFT interfaces. If you are not already connected to the unit’s CRAFT interface (either with a VT100 compatible terminal or with a PC running VT100 emulation software), follow the procedure in DLP-001. Alternately, if the unit is part of a management cluster connected to the local network, you may use a PC connected to the network to Telnet into the unit. Use the procedures in DLP-004 and DLP-006 to connect to the 10/100BASET interface. 2. Log in to the unit. Log in to the unit (see DLP-002, Logging in to the System for details). 3. Go to the SYSTEM CONFIG menu and select the MANAGEMENT menu and press <Enter>. 4. Go to the TELNET ACCESS menu and press <Enter>. 5. Go to the AUTHEN METHOD menu and press <Enter>. Select the appropriate authentication method. The choices are PASSWORD, RADIUS, PASSWORD/RADIUS, and RADIUS/PASSWORD. 6. Go to the USER LIST menu and press <Enter>. 7. To add a new user profile and password, right arrow over to the right pane. 8. Give the new user profile a name by selecting the NAME field, pressing <Enter>, and typing the user defined name. 9. Personalize the password for the appropriate level by selecting the PASSWORD field, pressing <Enter>, then typing the desired password. You will have to type the new password again to confirm it. Passwords for the unit are case sensitive. There is no default password for a new user (i.e., you can configure a user as blank with no password). The current password displays as a series of asterisks (********). 10. Select the IDLE TIME (MINS) field and press <Enter>. This field defines the amount of time in minutes the session may be idle before the user is logged off. The range is 1-255. The default value is 10. 11. Assign the password level by selecting the LEVEL field and choosing from the following level descriptions. 364 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 5 DLP-003 The unit contains six different password levels. The table below gives a brief description of each level. Security Level Description Full The user has all access to view and configure all menus (same as logging in to the CRAFT port) Support The user has access to view SYSTEM INFO. The user has privileges to view and change everything under the SYSTEM CONFIG menu except for the CRAFT port settings, TELNET ACCESS lists, and the SNMP MANAGEMENT COMMUNITIES. The user has full access to the SYSTEM UTILITY menu, including the ability to upgrade firmware and reset the unit. The user has full access to the INTERFACES, L2 PROTOCOL, BRIDGE, ROUTER, and DS0 menus. The user does not have the ability to set RADIUS SERVER settings under the SECURITY menu. Config The same privileges as support, except that the user does not have privileges to download firmware or configuration from the SYSTEM UTILITY menu. The user additionally does not have the privilege to reset the unit remotely, or enter the terminal menu. Router The user has view only privileges of SYSTEM INFO. There is no access to the SYSTEM CONFIG menu. The user has PING and TRACEROUTE access from the SYSTEM UTILITY menu. The user is limited to Ethernet configuration and status from the INTERFACES menu. The user has full access to the BRIDGE and ROUTER menus. Access is limited to filters only from the SECURITY menu. Voice The user has read privileges of the SYSTEM INFO menu. The user has access to the PING and TRACEROUTE utilities from the SYSTEM UTILITIES menu. The user has full access to the FXS module from the INTERFACES menu. Status The user has read access of all menus except for the following: SYSTEM CONFIG/ CRAFT PORT, SYSTEM CONFIG/TELNET ACCESS, SYSTEM CONFIG/SNMP MANAGEMENT, and SECURITY/ RADIUS SERVER. The user does not have access to UPGRADE FIRMWARE, UPGRADE CONFIG, PING, or TRACEROUTE menus. The user cannot reset the unit or enter terminal mode. In the A.03 firmware, only one telnet session can be active at a time. The A.04 firmware will support five simultaneous telnet sessions. In the A.03 firmware, the default conditions for the username and password fields are to have no entries in these fields. In the A.04 firmware, the default username and password are guest and password, respectively. Follow-up Procedures Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 365 Section 5 DLP-003 366 Total Access 600 Series System Manual © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A SETTING ETHERNET IP PARAMETERS Introduction If the unit is connected to an IP network for Telnet, TFTP, or SNMP management, several IP parameters must be set for the unit to communicate with the network. These parameters are described in this DLP along with the procedures for setting them. Please see your Network Administrator for the proper assignment of the following parameters: IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK, and DEFAULT GATEWAY. Prerequisite Procedures This procedure assumes that the unit is connected to an IP network and is powered up. Tools and Materials Required • • • • • VT100 compatible terminal or computer with terminal emulation software Appropriate cable to connect terminal to the unit (customer-provided) DB-9 female to RJ-45 female adapter (customer-provided) for connecting to the CRAFT port on the rear of the unit. This adapter is ADTRAN-proprietary. Ethernet cable from the 10/100BASET port on the unit to a hub (customer-provided) Use Ethernet crossover if going from the unit to a PC (customer-provided). To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm. In this DLP, unit refers to the Total Access 604, 608, 612, 616, and 624. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 367 Section 5 DLP-004 Total Access 600 Series System Manual DLP-004 Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed 1. Connect the unit to your VT100 system (details found in DLP-001, Connecting the Terminal or PC to the CRAFT Port). 2. Log in to the system with maximum rights (details for logging in are in DLP-002 and DLP-003). 3. From the ROUTER/CONFIG/INTERFACES (ETH[1]) menu, select the SETUP option and press <Enter>. 4. Select the PRIMARY IP option and press <Enter>. Select IP ADDRESS and press <Enter>. Enter the appropriate IP address. 5. From the ROUTER/CONFIG/INTERFACES (ETH[1])/SETUP/PRIMARY IP menu, select the SUBNET MASK option and press <Enter>. Enter the appropriate Subnet Mask. 6. From the ROUTER/CONFIG/ROUTES menu, select the DEFAULT GATEWAY option and press <Enter>. Enter the appropriate Default Gateway. 7. Escape out to the ROUTER menu and logoff by pressing <Ctrl + L>. Follow-up Procedures Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there. 368 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A VERIFYING COMMUNICATIONS OVER AN IP LAN Introduction When an ETHERNET port is connected to a local area network (LAN), test steps must be performed on the unit to ensure that it is communicating properly over the network. This procedure outlines those steps. Prerequisite Procedures Before beginning this procedure, the unit should be physically connected to the LAN and the provisioning tasks detailed in DLP-004, Setting Ethernet IP Parameters should be complete. Tools and Materials Required • • • • • VT100 compatible terminal or computer with terminal emulation software Appropriate cable to connect the terminal to the unit (customer-provided) DB-9 female to RJ-45 female adapter (customer-provided) for connecting to the CRAFT port on the rear of the unit. This adapter is ADTRAN-proprietary. Ethernet cable from the 10/100BASET port on the unit to a hub (customer-provided) Use Ethernet crossover if going from the unit to a PC (customer-provided). To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm. In this DLP, unit refers to the Total Access 604, 608, 612, 616, and 624. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 369 Section 5 DLP-005 Total Access 600 Series System Manual DLP-005 Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed 1. Ascertain the unit IP address. If you do not already have the IP Address for the unit, either obtain it from the Network Administrator or manually check for the address in the ROUTER/CONFIG/INTERFACES (ETH[1])/SETUP/ PRIMARY IP/IP ADDRESS menu. You must log in with a security level of CONFIG, SUPPORT, or FULL to modify the IP parameters on the unit. 2. Ping the unit from a remote computer on the network. Using a remote computer system connected to the LAN, perform an ICMP Ping on the IP Address of the unit. Verify that the unit responds properly. If the unit fails to respond, try the following: • • • • • • Verify that the proper IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway are provisioned in the unit (see DLP-004, Setting Ethernet IP Parameters for details). Verify that the unit is properly cabled into the LAN and that the Ethernet cable is properly seated in the RJ-45 10/100BASET port on the rear of the unit. Verify the link light on the front of the unit is lit. If not lit, check the cabling between the hub and the unit. If the unit is connected to a hub or other network device that provides a carrier sense light for each port, verify that the carrier sense light for the port to which the unit is connected is lit. If this light is not lit, check the cabling between the hub and the unit. Verify the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway on the remote computer system. Use Ethernet straight-through cable for connection to hub or switch. Use Ethernet crossover if connecting to a PC. If none of these steps are successful, contact the LAN Administrator for assistance. Refer to the documentation of the computer system if you are unsure how to perform a Ping command. Most computers running a networked version of Microsoft Windows™ or UNIX allow a Ping to be performed by simply typing ping <IP Address> at a command line prompt. Typically, the Ping program will respond by indicating that the remote IP Address has responded in a certain amount of time or that no response was received. 370 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 5 DLP-005 Some versions of Ping will continue running until you explicitly tell them to stop. If the program does not terminate on its own, type <Ctrl+C> to get the program to stop. 3. Telnet to the unit. From the same computer used in the previous step, Telnet to the unit and verify that the Telnet session is properly opened (see DLP-006, Telnetting to the Unit). Once the Telnet session is established, press <Ctrl+L> to log out and close the session. Refer to the documentation of the computer system if you are unsure how to perform a Telnet. Most computers running a networked version of Microsoft Windows™ or UNIX allow a Telnet to be performed by simply typing Telnet <IP Address> at a command line prompt. Telnet is a utility common on many local area networks that allows remote access to another computer or piece of equipment. Follow-up Procedures Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 371 Section 5 DLP-005 372 Total Access 600 Series System Manual © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A TELNETTING TO THE UNIT Introduction If the unit is part of a management cluster connected to the local network, you may use a PC connected to the network to Telnet into the unit. This procedure details the steps which must be performed to Telnet into the unit. Prerequisite Procedures Complete DLP-004 and DLP-005 (steps 1 and 2 only). Tools and Materials Required • • • • • • Access to a PC or other computer connected to the LAN. VT100 compatible terminal or computer with terminal emulation software Appropriate cable to connect terminal to the unit (customer-provided) DB-9 female to RJ-45 female adapter (customer-provided) for connecting to the CRAFT port on the rear of the unit. This adapter is ADTRAN-proprietary. Ethernet cable from 10/100BASET port on the unit to a hub (customer-provided) Use Ethernet crossover if going from the unit to a PC (customer-provided). In this DLP, unit refers to the Total Access 604, 608, 612, 616, and 624. The ATM D.01.XX firmware supports one telnet session active at a time. The TDM A.03.XX firmware supports on telnet session active at a time. The TDM A.04 firmware supports five simultaneous telnet sessions. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 373 Section 5 DLP-006 Total Access 600 Series System Manual DLP-006 Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed 1. Connect the computer to the unit’s CRAFT port as shown in DLP-001, Connecting the Terminal or PC to the CRAFT Port. 2. Log in to the unit as shown in DLP-002, Logging in to the System. 3. Down arrow to AUTHEN METHOD and press <Enter>. Select PASSWORD, RADIUS, PASSWORD/RADIUS, or RADIUS/PASSWORD and press <Enter>. 4. Under the SYSTEM CONFIG menu, right arrow and select MANAGEMENT; press <Enter>. Right arrow and select the TELNET ACCESS LIST; press <Enter>. Set the TELNET ACCESS to ON. Select USER LIST and press <Enter>. The following screen will appear. 5. Use the right arrow key to select the NAME field; press <Enter>. Enter a username to be used for Telnet logins. 6. If PASSWORD was selected for the AUTHEN METHOD in step 3, right arrow over to PASSWORD; press <Enter>. Enter a password to be used for Telnet logins. 7. Use the right arrow key to select IDLE TIME (MINS); press <Enter>. This field defines the amount of time in minutes the Telnet session may be idle before the user is logged off. The range is 1-255. The default value is 10 minutes. Enter the appropriate Idle Time. 8. Use the right arrow key to select LEVEL. Select the appropriate security level. For security level definitions, reference DLP-003 Adding/Removing Telnet Users and Changing Password Security Levels. 9. This completes the addition of one Telnet user. Repeat steps 1-8 for each user needing Telnet access. 374 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 5 DLP-006 10. Press <Control L> to log out of the unit. 11. From a remote computer system connected to the LAN, Telnet to the unit. Refer to the documentation of the computer system if you are unsure how to perform a Telnet. Most computers running a networked version of Microsoft Windows™ or UNIX allow a Telnet to be performed by simply typing Telnet <IP Address> at a command line prompt. Telnet is a utility common on many local area networks that allows remote access to another computer or piece of equipment. The following screen will appear. 12. Enter the user name assigned in step five and press <Enter>. The following screen will appear. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 375 Section 5 DLP-006 Total Access 600 Series System Manual 13. Enter the password assigned in step 6. Upon entering the correct password, the unit’s Main Menu is displayed as shown below: You are now Telnetted into the unit’s menu system. 14. When you complete your configuration changes and save the changes (when prompted), press <Ctrl+L> to log out and close the session. Follow-up Procedures Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there. 376 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A UPGRADING THE FIRMWARE USING XMODEM Introduction The unit supports firmware updates via the 10/100BASET port using either TFTP from a network server or the CRAFT interface using XMODEM. XMODEM is found in the VT100 terminal application in the ADTRAN Utilities package and in most PC VT100 communications software packages. This procedure outlines the steps for a successful firmware upgrade using the CRAFT interface and XMODEM software. Firmware may be obtained from the ADTRAN website at www.adtran.com. Select Support and then Post-Sales Technical Support. Tools and Materials Required • • • • VT100 compatible terminal or computer with terminal emulation software Appropriate cable to connect terminal to the unit (customer-provided) DB-9 female to RJ-45 female adapter (customer-provided) for connecting to the CRAFT port on the rear of the unit. This adapter is ADTRAN-proprietary. ADTRAN-provided file containing upgraded code • XMODEM software To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm. In this DLP, unit refers to the Total Access 604, 608, 612, 616, and 624. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 377 Section 5 DLP-007 Total Access 600 Series System Manual DLP-007 Perform the Steps Below in the Order Listed 1. Connect to the unit using the CRAFT interface. If you are not already connected to the unit’s CRAFT interface (either with a VT100 compatible terminal or with a PC running VT100 emulation software), follow the procedure in DLP-001, Connecting the Terminal or PC to the CRAFT Port. Connecting to the CRAFT interface limits the upgrade procedure to XMODEM Only. 2. Log in to the unit. Log in to the unit (see DLP-002, Logging in to the System for details). 3. Go to the SYSTEM UTILITY menu and select the UPGRADE FIRMWARE menu; press <Enter>. 4. Go to the TRANSFER METHOD menu and select XMODEM. 5. Select START TRANSFER to start the update. Enter Y to confirm the upgrade. 6. From the terminal emulation software, begin the XMODEM upload by using the appropriate command sequence. If necessary, refer to the terminal emulation software documentation for help. Also, when specifying the filename, ensure that the file transferred is the one provided by ADTRAN. Otherwise, the update will not complete successfully. This may take several minutes. Because XMODEM data is being transferred in-band through the menu interface, the VT100 menus of the unit will be inoperable from the CRAFT interface. You can cancel the update at any time within the terminal emulation software. (Please consult the documentation provided by the terminal emulation software to determine how to do this.) 7. When the update has successfully completed, the following messages will display: Verifying downloaded FLASH image... Erasing FLASH... Programming FLASH... FLASH programmed successfully. The unit will restart immediately and the user may then log back into the system. Alternately, if the unit is part of a management cluster connected to the local network, you may use a PC connected to the network to Telnet into the unit. By utilizing the 10/100BASET port, the unit may be quickly upgraded using TFTP, provided there is a TFTP server on the local network. The unit can also be upgraded across the WAN using TFTP provided there is a TFTP server accessible to the unit. The unit ships with ADTRAN Utilities software, which includes a TFTP server. See DLP-008, Upgrading the Firmware Using TFTP, for more details. 378 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 5 DLP-007 Follow-up Procedures Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 379 Section 5 DLP-007 380 Total Access 600 Series System Manual © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A UPGRADING THE FIRMWARE USING TFTP Introduction The unit supports firmware updates via the 10/100BASET Ethernet port using either TFTP from a network server or the CRAFT interfaces using XMODEM. The unit also supports TFTP updates across the WAN using the data/router channels. This DLP provides the steps to follow for a successful firmware upgrade using the 10/100BASET Ethernet port and a TFTP Server. Tools and Materials Required • • • • • • A TFTP Server accessible on the local network (a TFTP server is provided with the unit as part of the ADTRAN Utilities software) or a TFTP server accessible across the WAN VT100 compatible terminal or computer with terminal emulation software Appropriate cable to connect terminal to the unit (customer-provided) DB-9 female to RJ-45 female adapter (customer-provided) for connecting to the CRAFT port on the rear of the unit. This adapter is ADTRAN-proprietary. Ethernet cable from 10/100BASET port on the unit to a hub (customer-provided) Use Ethernet crossover if going from the unit to a PC (customer-provided). To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm. In this DLP, unit refers to the Total Access 604, 608, 612, 616, and 624. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 381 Section 5 DLP-008 Total Access 600 Series System Manual DLP-008 Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed For LAN Upgrades 1. Connect to the unit using the 10/100BASET interface. If you are not already connected to the unit’s 10/100BASET port using Telnet client software, use the procedure in DLP-006, Telnetting to the Unit to connect to the unit. 2. Verify the TFTP server is running on the network. The user may ping the TFTP server from the unit to verify communication. A TFTP server ships as part of the ADTRAN utilities. If using ADTRAN utilities, choose START>PROGRAMS>ADTRAN UTILITIES>TFTP SERVER to start the server. 3. Download the firmware upgrade file to your computer. If using ADTRAN utilities, save the upgrade file to the “ADTNUTIL” directory on your hard drive. 4. Go to the SYSTEM UTILITY menu and select the UPDATE FIRMWARE menu; press <Enter>. 5. Go to the TRANSFER METHOD menu and select TFTP. 6. Set the TFTP SERVER ADDRESS to the IP address of the machine running the TFTP server program. If using ADTRAN utilities, this will be the IP address that appears in the TFTP SERVER STATUS window. 7. Enter the filename of the update file into the TFTP SERVER FILENAME field. 8. Select START TRANSFER to start the update. Enter Y to confirm the upgrade. 382 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 5 DLP-008 Prior to the start of the upgrade, the transfer status will display IDLE. During the TFTP upload, various status messages display in TRANSFER STATUS to indicate progress. The following table describes these messages. Message Meaning Transferring... [X KB] Indicates communication with the TFTP network server has been established and the update file is being transferred between the unit and the TFTP network server. Flash Programmed Successfully The unit has been upgraded successfully. Loaded code ver x.x.x chksum = xxxx Unit displays the version and checksum of the upgraded code. Resetting.... Unit is power cycling. RECV Error Unit will display this message if server filename is incorrect. Host Timeout Unit will display this message if TFTP server address is incorrect. idle The upgrade has not yet been initiated. 9. When the update has successfully completed, FLASH PROGRAMMED SUCCESSFULLY will display briefly in the TRANSFER STATUS field. This will be followed by a LOADED CODE VER X.X.X CHKSUM = XXXX message. Finally the TRANSFER STATUS field will display RESETTING... The unit will restart immediately and resume operation. After giving the unit sufficient time to reboot, the user may telnet back into the unit and log in. For WAN Upgrades 1. Telnet into the unit using FULL or SUPPORT levels (refer to DLP-003, Adding/Removing Telnet Users and Changing Password Security Levels). 2. Verify the TFTP server is running on the network. Verify that the unit can ping the TFTP server. 3. Go to the SYSTEM UTILITY menu and select the UPDATE FIRMWARE menu; press <Enter>. 4. Go to the TRANSFER METHOD menu and select TFTP. 5. Set the TFTP SERVER ADDRESS to the IP address of the machine running the TFTP server program. If using ADTRAN utilities, this will be the IP address that appears in the TFTP SERVER STATUS window. 6. Enter the filename of the update file into the TFTP SERVER FILENAME field. 7. Select START TRANSFER to start the update. Enter Y to confirm the upgrade. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 383 Section 5 DLP-008 Total Access 600 Series System Manual Prior to the start of the upgrade, the transfer status will display IDLE. During the TFTP upload, various status messages display in TRANSFER STATUS to indicate progress. The following table describes these messages. Message Meaning Transferring... [X KB] Indicates communication with the TFTP network server has been established and the update file is being transferred between the unit and the TFTP network server. Flash Programmed Successfully The unit has been upgraded successfully. Loaded code ver x.x.x chksum = xxxx Unit displays the version and checksum of the upgraded code. Resetting.... Unit is power cycling. RECV Error Unit will display this message if server filename is incorrect. Host Timeout Unit will display this message if TFTP server address is incorrect. idle The upgrade has not yet been initiated. 8. When the update has successfully completed, FLASH PROGRAMMED SUCCESSFULLY will display briefly in the TRANSFER STATUS field. This will be followed by a LOADED CODE VER X.X.X CHKSUM = XXXX message. Finally the TRANSFER STATUS field will display RESETTING... The unit will restart immediately and resume operation. After giving the unit sufficient time to reboot, the user may telnet back into the unit and log in. Follow-up Procedures Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there. 384 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A SAVING THE CURRENT CONFIGURATION USING TFTP Introduction The unit supports configuration transfers from the unit (via the 10/100BASET Ethernet port) to a TFTP server located on the network or a TFTP server accessible across the WAN. This DLP provides the steps to follow for a successful configuration transfer using the 10/100BASET Ethernet port and a TFTP Server. Tools and Materials Required • • • • • • • A PC with a Telnet client software A TFTP Server accessible on the local network (a TFTP server is provided with the unit as part of the ADTRAN Utilities software) or a TFTP server accessible across the WAN. VT100 compatible terminal or computer with terminal emulation software Appropriate cable to connect terminal to the unit (customer-provided) DB-9 female to RJ-45 female adapter (customer-provided) for connecting to the CRAFT port on the rear of the unit. This adapter is ADTRAN-proprietary. Ethernet cable from the 10/100BASET port on the unit to a hub (customer-provided) Use Ethernet crossover if going from the unit to a PC (customer-provided). To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm. In this DLP, unit refers to the Total Access 604, 608, 612, 616, and 624. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 385 Section 5 DLP-009 Total Access 600 Series System Manual DLP-009 Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed Saving Configuration using TFTP Server on Local Network 1. Connect to the unit using the 10/100BASET interface. If you are not already connected to the unit’s 10/100BASET port using Telnet client software, use the procedure in DLP-006, Telnetting to the Unit to connect to the unit. 2. Verify the TFTP server is running on the network. A TFTP server ships as part of the ADTRAN utilities. If using ADTRAN utilities, choose START>PROGRAMS>ADTRAN UTILITIES>TFTP SERVER to start the server. 3. Go to the SYSTEM UTILITY menu and select the CONFIGURATION TRANSFER menu; press <Enter>. 4. Verify the TRANSFER METHOD is set to TFTP. 5. Set the TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS to the IP address of the machine running the TFTP Server Program. If you are using the ADTRAN TFTP server, the IP address displays in the STATUS field. For other TFTP servers, please refer to the appropriate documentation. 6. Change TFTP SERVER FILENAME to a unique filename. This will be the name of the configuration file saved to the remote server. An example filename would be ta_iad.cfg. Some TFTP servers constrain the format of the filename depending on the operating system of the server. For example, a TFTP server running on a PC under Windows 3.1 may only permit 8.3 format filenames (8 characters, period and three extension characters). 7. Select the SAVE CONFIG REMOTELY menu field and press <Enter>. Enter Y to confirm the request. 386 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 5 DLP-009 8. View CURRENT TRANSFER STATUS to verify the progress of the current transfer. During a successful transfer, you will first see DOWNLOAD: COPYING INTERNAL CONFIG, and then DOWNLOAD IN PROGRESS.... 9. When the transfer has successfully completed, IDLE displays in the CURRENT TRANSFER STATUS field. TFTP is not secure. No passwords are required for client access. Anyone can access files through the IP port on the server machine if they know the target file’s name. Saving Configuration using TFTP Server Accessible Across the WAN 1. Telnet into the unit using FULL or SUPPORT levels (refer to DLP-003, Adding/Removing Telnet Users and Changing Password Security Levels). 2. Verify the TFTP server is running on the network. Verify that the unit can ping the TFTP server. 3. Go to the SYSTEM UTILITY menu and select the CONFIGURATION TRANSFER menu; press <Enter>. 4. Verify the TRANSFER METHOD is set to TFTP. 5. Set the TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS to the IP address of the machine running the TFTP Server Program. If you are using the ADTRAN TFTP server, the IP address displays in the STATUS field. For other TFTP servers, please refer to the appropriate documentation. 6. Change TFTP SERVER FILENAME to a unique filename. This will be the name of the configuration file saved to the remote server. An example filename would be ta_iad.cfg. Some TFTP servers constrain the format of the filename depending on the operating system of the server. For example, a TFTP server running on a PC under Windows 3.1 may only permit 8.3 format filenames (8 characters, period and three extension characters). 7. Select the SAVE CONFIG REMOTELY menu field and press <Enter>. Enter Y to confirm the request. 8. View CURRENT TRANSFER STATUS to verify the progress of the current transfer. During a successful transfer, you will first see DOWNLOAD: COPYING INTERNAL CONFIG, and then DOWNLOAD IN PROGRESS.... 9. When the transfer has successfully completed, IDLE displays in the CURRENT TRANSFER STATUS field. TFTP is not secure. No passwords are required for client access. Anyone can access files through the IP port on the server machine if they know the target file’s name. Follow-up Procedures Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 387 Section 5 DLP-009 388 Total Access 600 Series System Manual © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A LOADING THE CURRENT CONFIGURATION USING TFTP Introduction The unit supports configuration uploads from a unit (via the 10/100BASET Ethernet port) to a TFTP server located on the network or a TFTP server accessible across the WAN. This DLP provides the steps for a successful configuration upload using the 10/100BASET Ethernet port and a TFTP server. Tools and Materials Required • • • • • • • A PC with a Telnet client software A TFTP server accessible on the local network (a TFTP server is provided with the unit as part of the ADTRAN Utilities software) or a TFTP server accessible across the WAN VT100 compatible terminal or computer with terminal emulation software Appropriate cable to connect terminal to the unit (customer-provided) DB-9 female to RJ-45 female adapter (customer-provided) for connecting to the CRAFT port on the rear of the unit. This adapter is ADTRAN-proprietary. Ethernet cable from 10/100BASET port on the unit to a hub (customer-provided) Use Ethernet crossover if going from the unit to a PC (customer-provided). To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm. In this DLP, unit refers to the Total Access 604, 608, 612, 616, and 624. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 389 Section 5 DLP-010 Total Access 600 Series System Manual DLP-010 Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed Loading Configuration using TFTP Server on Local Network 1. Connect to the unit using the 10/100BASET interface. If you are not already connected to the unit’s 10/100BASET port using Telnet client software, use the procedure in DLP-006, Telnetting to the Unit to connect to the unit. 2. Log in to the unit using a FULL or SUPPORT level password (see DLP-003, Adding/Removing Telnet Users and Changing Password Security Levels for details). 3. Verify the TFTP server is running on the network. A TFTP server ships as part of the ADTRAN utilities. If using ADTRAN utilities, choose START>PROGRAMS>ADTRAN UTILITIES>TFTP SERVER to start the server. 4. Go to the SYSTEM UTILITY menu and select the CONFIGURATION TRANSFER menu, then press <Enter>. 5. Verify the TRANSFER METHOD is set to TFTP. 6. Set the TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS to the IP address of the machine running the TFTP Server Program. If you are using the ADTRAN TFTP server, the IP address displays in the STATUS field. For other TFTP servers, please refer to the appropriate documentation. 7. Change TFTP SERVER FILENAME to a unique filename including path. This will be the name of the configuration file retrieved from the remote server. An example filename would be ta_iad.cfg. Some TFTP servers constrain the format of the filename depending on the operating system of the server. For example, a TFTP server running on a PC under Windows 3.1 may only permit 8.3 format filenames (8 characters, period and three extension characters). 8. Select the LOAD AND USE CONFIG menu field and press <Enter>. Enter Y to confirm the request. 9. View CURRENT TRANSFER STATUS to verify the progress of the current upload. 10. When the upload has successfully completed, IDLE displays in the CURRENT TRANSFER STATUS field. The unit is rebooted immediately after a configuration is successfully loaded. Any online sessions will be terminated. 390 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 5 DLP-010 11. After an appropriate length of time, the user may telnet back into the unit. TFTP is not secure. No passwords are required for client access. Anyone can access files through the IP port on the server machine if they know the target file’s name. Loading Configuration using TFTP Server Accessible Across the WAN 1. Telnet into the unit using FULL or SUPPORT levels (refer to DLP-003, Adding/Removing Telnet Users and Changing Password Security Levels). 2. Verify the TFTP server is running on the network. Verify that the unit can ping the TFTP server. 3. Go to the SYSTEM UTILITY menu and select the CONFIGURATION TRANSFER menu; then press <Enter>. 4. Verify the TRANSFER METHOD is set to TFTP. 5. Set the TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS to the IP address of the machine running the TFTP Server Program. If you are using the ADTRAN TFTP server, the IP address displays in the STATUS field. For other TFTP servers, please refer to the appropriate documentation. 6. Change TFTP SERVER FILENAME to a unique filename including path. This will be the name of the configuration file retrieved from the remote server. An example filename would be ta_iad.cfg. Some TFTP servers constrain the format of the filename depending on the operating system of the server. For example, a TFTP server running on a PC under Windows 3.1 may only permit 8.3 format filenames (8 characters, period and three extension characters). 7. Select the LOAD AND USE CONFIG menu field and press <Enter>. Enter Y to confirm the request. 8. View CURRENT TRANSFER STATUS to verify the progress of the current upload. 9. When the upload has successfully completed, IDLE displays in the CURRENT TRANSFER STATUS field. The unit is rebooted immediately after a configuration is successfully loaded. Any online sessions will be terminated. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 391 Section 5 DLP-010 Total Access 600 Series System Manual 10. After an appropriate length of time, the user may telnet back into the unit. TFTP is not secure. No passwords are required for client access. Anyone can access files through the IP port on the server machine if they know the target file’s name. Follow-up Procedures Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there. 392 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A SAVING THE CURRENT CONFIGURATION USING XMODEM Introduction The unit supports configuration transfers from the unit using a VT100 terminal or terminal emulator (with XMODEM) and the CRAFT interface. This DLP provides the steps to follow for a successful configuration transfer using the CRAFT port and XMODEM. Tools and Materials Required • • VT100 terminal or PC with VT100 terminal emulation software XMODEM software To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm. In this DLP, unit refers to the Total Access 604, 608, 612, 616, and 624. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 393 Section 5 DLP-011 Total Access 600 Series System Manual DLP-011 Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed 1. Connect to the unit using the RJ-45 CRAFT interface. If you are not already connected to the unit’s CRAFT interface (either with a VT100 compatible terminal or with a PC running VT100 emulation software), follow the procedure in DLP-001 Connecting the Terminal or PC to the CRAFT Port. Connecting to the CRAFT port interface limits the config transfer procedure to XMODEM only. 2. Login to the unit. (See DLP-002 Logging in to the System for details.) 3. Go to the SYSTEM UTILITY menu and select CONFIG TRANSFER menu; press <Enter>. 4. Set the TRANSFER METHOD menu to XMODEM. 5. Select SAVE CONFIG REMOTELY to start the transfers. Enter Y to confirm the transfer and prepare the unit for the transfer download. The following message is displayed: “This will begin sending a copy of the current system configuration.” When the unit is ready to send the configuration file “XMODEM/CRC: Receive CONFIG file now...” is displayed in the bottom left corner of the terminal window. While this message is visible the menus are not available. 6. Configure the VT 100 terminal or terminal emulation software to Receive (you are prompted for filename). 7. From the terminal evaluation software, begin the XMODEM transfer by using the appropriate command sequence. For Windows Hyper Terminal, select Transfer>Receive File. Enter the filename (including path) and select XMODEM as the transfer method. If necessary, refer to the terminal emulation software documentation for help. Also, when specifying the filename, ensure that the filed save a .cfg extension. Otherwise, the file may not be available for uploading into the other units. Because XMODEM data is being transferred in-band through the menu interface, the VT100 menus of the unit will be inoperable from the CRAFT interface. You can cancel the update at any time within the terminal emulation software. (Please consult the documentation provided by the terminal emulation software to determine how to do this). 8. When the transfer has successfully completed, IDLE displays in the CURRENT TRANSFER STATUS field and UPLOAD COMPLETE displays THE PREVIOUS TRANSFER STATUS field. Follow-up Procedure Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there. 394 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A LOADING THE CURRENT CONFIGURATION USING XMODEM Introduction The unit supports configuration uploads from a unit using a VT100 terminal or terminal emulator (with XMODEM) and the CRAFT interface. This DLP provides the steps for a successful configuration upload using the CRAFT port and XMODEM. Prerequisite Procedures Obtain the configuration file (see for DLP-011Saving the Current Configuration Using XMODEM details). Tools and Materials Required • • VT100 terminal or PC with VT100 terminal emulation software XMODEM software To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm. In this DLP, unit refers to the Total Access 604, 608, 612, 616, and 624. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 395 Section 5 DLP-012 Total Access 600 Series System Manual DLP-012 Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed 1. Connect to the unit using the RJ-45 CRAFT interface. If you are not already connected to the unit’s CRAFT interface (either with a VT100 compatible terminal or with a PC running VT100 emulation software), follow the procedure in DLP-001 Connecting the Terminal or PC to the CRAFT Port. Connecting to the CRAFT interface limits the config transfer procedure to XMODEM Only. 2. Login to the unit. (See DLP-002 Logging in to the System for details.) 3. Go to the SYSTEM UTILITY menu and select CONFIGURATION TRANSFER menu; press <Enter> 4. Set the TRANSFER METHOD menu to XMODEM. 5. Select LOAD AND USE CONFIG to start the transfer. Enter Y to confirm the transfer and prepare the unit for the transfer download. The following message is displayed: “Warning: WAN link may be reset after transfer complete!” When the unit is ready to receive the XMODEM configuration file, the menu screen will clear and display XMODEM/CRC: Transmit CONFIG file now... If this does not appear, please review the steps above for possible configuration errors. 6. From the terminal emulation software, begin the XMODEM transfer by using the appropriate command sequence. For Windows HyperTerminal, select Transfer>Send File. Enter the filename (including path) and select XMODEM as the transfer method. Configuration files should have a .cfg extension. If necessary, refer to the terminal emulation software documentation for help. Because XMODEM data is being transferred in-band through the menu interface, the VT100 menus of the unit will be inoperable from the CRAFT interface. You can cancel the update at any time within the terminal emulation software. (Please consult the documentation provided by the terminal emulation software to determine how to do this.) 7. After the config transfer is complete, the Config Transfer menu will be displayed. Follow-up Procedures Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there. 396 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A SAVING AND LOADING TEXT CONFIGURATION USING THE TERMINAL COMMAND LINE Introduction The unit has the ability to download a text file, which contains the configuration of the entire unit. This configuration may then be altered in a text editor, and then uploaded to the unit. This DLP will explain how to save and load the configuration. Prerequisite Procedures You must connect to the unit with a VT100 terminal session (reference DLP-001 and DLP-002) or via a Telnet session (reference DLP-006, Telnetting to the Unit). Tools and Materials Required • • • • • • Access to a PC or other computer connected to the LAN (Telnet access only) VT100 compatible terminal or computer with terminal emulation software Appropriate cable to connect terminal to the unit (customer-provided) DB-9 female to RJ-45 female adapter (customer-provided) for connecting to the CRAFT port on the rear of the unit. This adapter is ADTRAN-proprietary. Ethernet cable from the 10/100BASET port on the unit to a hub (customer-provided) Use Ethernet crossover if going from the unit to a PC (customer-provided). To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm. In this DLP, unit refers to the Total Access 604, 608, 612, 616, and 624. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 397 Section 5 DLP-013 Total Access 600 Series System Manual DLP-013 Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed Saving the Router's Configuration 1. Establish a connection to the router with the terminal software either through the CRAFT port or via a Telnet session. 2. From the Main Menu, select SYSTEM UTILITY, then TERMINAL MODE, and then press <Enter>. 3. The following screen will appear. 4. At the terminal prompt, type download and then press <Enter>. The following screen will appear. 398 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 5 DLP-013 * 5. Don’t press another key yet! 6. Enable "capture" or "logging" in the terminal software, saving it to a file on your computer. 7. Press the SPACE BAR to continue. The router will then print its configuration to the terminal screen. (With capture enabled, the terminal software will capture the configuration and write it to the file that you designated.) 8. When the configuration stops printing, end the capture. The router's configuration is now saved to the file that you designated. 9. At the terminal prompt, type exit to go back into the configuration menu of the router. 10. Always use Ctrl+L to exit the configuration menu before closing the Telnet or terminal software. Loading a Configuration into the Router The following steps walk through uploading the text file back into the unit. These text files can be the entire configuration, or just partial commands that affect specific configuration changes. The uploading steps are the same, no matter the size of the file. 1. Establish a connection to the router with the terminal software either through the CRAFT port or via a Telnet session. 2. From the Main Menu, select SYSTEM UTILITY, then TERMINAL MODE, and then press <Enter>. 3. In the terminal software, initiate a SEND TEXT FILE or SEND CFG FILE using the saved configuration file. 4. Once the file transfer is complete, type save to save the configuration in the unit. Then type exit to go back into the configuration menu of the router. 5. Always use Ctrl+L to exit the configuration menu before closing the Telnet or terminal software. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 399 Section 5 DLP-013 Total Access 600 Series System Manual Entering Commands at the Command Prompt To do this manually from the prompt, precede each instruction with a ">". After uploading, to apply and save changes, you must issue the command "save" from the prompt. The command will apply ALL changes to the unit (the same as escaping all the way out of the terminal menu). To do a save to flash only, but not apply the changes, you can go back to the menu system and press Ctrl-W. A !exit command executes a do not save and a do not ask function (i.e. changes will not be saved and the user will not be prompted to save the changes). The commands are based on string comparisons with the menu system (with spaces replaced with underscores). This means that the config command will appear exactly as it appears in the terminal menus. To change a configuration, type in the option desired exactly as it appears on the menu. For example, to change the T1 timing mode, the command line would read >sysconfig t1_timing_mode network or >sysconfig t1_timing_mode internal or >sysconfig t1_timing_mode dsx-1. Follow-up Procedures Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there. 400 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A UNIT INSTALLATION USING THE AUTO-CONFIG FEATURE Introduction AUTO-CONFIG allows the service provider to gain initial access to a newly installed IAD while in its factory default state. This eliminates the need for a skilled technician on-site during installation, as it only requires someone to make the network interface and power connections to the IAD. After accessing the unit, the service provider remotely loads a configuration script. A fail-safe timer is then set and the configuration is saved. Next, the service provider reprovisions the network to match the IAD's configuration and accesses the unit. If the service provider can access the unit, the AUTO-CONFIG was successful, the unit is operational, and the fail-safe timer should be cancelled. If access is not gained prior to the fail-safe timer expiration, the fail-safe mechanism is invoked and the IAD returns to the default configuration. This DLP details the steps involved in an IAD installation using the AUTO-CONFIG feature. Prerequisite Procedures The unit must be at factory default. If the unit is not a new unit, factory default the unit by one of the following methods: • • Select SYSTEM UTILITY>TERMINAL MODE. At the > prompt, type fac. You will then see “Restore Factory Defaults and Reset Unit? (press 'y').” Press the y key to confirm default. The unit then resets. If connected to the CRAFT port, power reset the unit and then restore power to the unit while holding down the F key. You will then be prompted to confirm the factory default. Obtain the desired configuration file. The config file may be one of the following two formats: • A .cfg file which is loaded via TFTP. See DLP-009, Saving the Current Configuration Using TFTP. • A script obtained via the terminal mode. See DLP-013 (Saving the Router's Configuration section only). The service provider's access network Layer 1 must be provisioned to map a single 64 K DS0 from the provider's network to DS0 24 on the customer's T1 circuit with matching circuit parameters (ESF, B8ZS). 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 401 Section 5 DLP-014 Total Access 600 Series System Manual Tools and Materials Required • • • • VT100 compatible terminal or computer with terminal emulation software (only required if unit has to be factory defaulted) Appropriate cable to connect terminal to the unit (customer-provided, only required if unit has to be factory defaulted) DB-9 female to RJ-45 female adapter (customer provided) for connecting to the CRAFT port on the rear of the unit (only required if unit has to be factory defaulted) Silver Satin Cable for CRAFT access (P/N 3127004 provided with unit, only required if unit has to be factory defaulted) To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm. In this DLP, unit refers to the Total Access 604, 608, 612, 616, and 624. 402 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 5 DLP-014 DLP-014 Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed 1. Verify the unit is at factory default. 2. Connect the network interface cable to the NTWK port on the rear of the unit. 3. Power up the unit. 4. The unit begins the process of auto-detecting whether the packets received on the WAN interface are PPP LCP packets or Frame Relay signaling packets. When the second consecutive control packet of the same type is received, the unit configures itself for the detected L2 protocol. When the next control packet of the same type is received, the L2 protocol is confirmed, and the auto-detection of the L2 protocol is complete. If PPP is detected: • • The unit's PPP interface is set to accept its IP address from the service provider's peer router via the PPP IPCP config-NAK mechanism as described in RFC 1332. The unit automatically sets its default route to the service provider's edge router address as identified by PPP IPCP. If Frame Relay is detected: • • • • The frame relay network signaling is further analyzed to automatically detect the signaling protocol being used (Annex D, Annex A, or LMI). Next, the unit automatically adds the first indicated Frame Relay PVC as an interface to the IAD router. When the PVC becomes active, the unit broadcasts a DHCP request toward the provider edge router over the active PVC. When a DHCP response is received, the unit assigns the address indicated by the DHCP server as its WAN IP address. The address indicated as the gateway address is set as the default gateway. Additional information provided may also be used such as DNS server addresses, WINS addresses, Domain name, Host name, etc. 5. Once the L2 protocol detection is complete, the service provider can telnet into the unit using the IP address assigned by the router/DHCP server. The service provider's access network Layer 1 must be provisioned to map a single 64 K DS0 from the provider's network to DS0 24 on the customer's T1 circuit with matching circuit parameters (ESF, B8ZS). 6. Load the desired configuration file. The config file may be one of the following two formats: • • A .cfg file which is loaded via TFTP. See DLP-009, Saving the Current Configuration Using TFTP. A script obtained via the terminal mode. See DLP-013 (Saving the Router's Configuration section only). 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 403 Section 5 DLP-014 Total Access 600 Series System Manual 7. Set the failsafe timer by selecting SYSTEM UTILITY>TERMINAL MODE and typing fstimer start x, (where x is in seconds) at the > prompt. Select a value for x which will allow enough time for the service provider to reconfigure the network to match the unit's new configuration and which will allow an extra 3 to 5 minutes for the unit to sync up with the network. Set the failsafe timer prior to doing the save. Typing save will apply the configuration changes, and the unit will not be accessible until the network is reconfigured. 8. Type Save at the > prompt. This applies all configuration changes and the current connection is lost. 9. At this point, the service provider reconfigures the network to match the unit's new configuration. 10. After the network configuration is complete, the service provider attempts to connect to the unit. If the connection is successful, deactivate the failsafe timer by selecting SYSTEM UTILITY>TERMINAL MODE and typing fstimer stop at the > prompt. 11. If the connection is not successful, wait until the timer expires and the unit will factory default back to the AUTO-CONFIG mode. Repeat steps 4-10 of this DLP. Follow-up Procedures Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there. 404 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A TDM TO ATM UPGRADE Introduction The Echo Canceller Module provides G.165/G.168 echo cancellation for voice over ATM applications and is available with Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation (ADPCM). ADPCM is a speech coding method which uses fewer bits than traditional Pulse Code Modulation (PCM), allowing the user to get more analog voice calls on less bandwidth. Echo cancellation and ADPCM resources are built into all 600 Series units except the Total Access 612/616/624 T1 TDM units (P/N 4200612L1#TDM, 4200616L1#TDM, and 4200624L1#TDM). These units may be upgraded to include echo cancellation via three methods. This DLP discusses those three methods. Prerequisite Procedures Purchase the EC/ADPCM (P/N 1200613L1). Tools and Materials Required • • • VT100 compatible terminal or computer with terminal emulation software Appropriate cable to connect terminal to the unit (customer-provided) DB-9 female to RJ-45 female adapter (customer provided) for connecting to the CRAFT port on the rear of the unit To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm. Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling modules, wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components. Place modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing. When working on modules, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded. The Total Access 604/608 units and the third generation Total Access 612/616/624 units (P/N 1203612L1, 1203616L1, and 1203624L1) come with the Echo Canceller function built in, so there is no need for these units to be upgraded. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 405 Section 5 DLP-015 Total Access 600 Series System Manual DLP-015 Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed Purchase of Upgrade Package from ADTRAN The upgrade package may be purchased from ADTRAN. This package includes the EC/ADPCM (P/N 1200613L1) and the ADTRAN installation and test. If this package is ordered, the customer must send the Total Access TDM 612/616/624 unit back to ADTRAN. Once received, the EC/ADPCM module is installed along with the latest VoATM firmware. The upgraded unit is then tested and returned to the customer. Please call ADTRAN CAPs department at 800-9-ADTRAN extension 7722 for this service. Purchase and Installation of the EC/ADPCM Module by the Customer An EC/ADPCM module may be purchased separately and installed in the Total Access 612/616/624 T1 TDM unit by the customer. 1. Remove power from the Total Access 612/616/624. 2. Remove the screws from the back of the Total Access 612/616/624, and then remove the cover. 3. Install the EC/ADPCM Module in the Total Access 612/616/624 as shown in the following figure. FX S C ar d N et w or k C ar d * EC/ADPCM Card (Installed and secured) 4. Remove the two screws from the motherboard, install the two standoffs, and insert the screws through the top the EC/ADPCM board into the standoffs. 5. Replace the cover on the Total Access 612/616/624 and tighten the screws. 6. Restore power to the Total Access 612/616/624. 7. Obtain the latest VoATM firmware from the ADTRAN website (http://www.ADTRAN.com). Select SUPPORT>POST-SALES TECHNICAL SUPPORT>FIRMWARE UPDATES>612/616/624 ATM or contact PostSales Technical Support at 888-4ADTRAN. 406 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 5 DLP-015 8. Upgrade the Total Access 612/616/624 with the latest VoATM firmware. Instructions for upgrading the unit can be found in DLP-007 and DLP-008. 9. Factory default the Total Access 612/616/624 by one of the following methods: • • Select SYSTEM UTILITY>TERMINAL MODE. At the > prompt, type fac. You will then see “Restore Factory Defaults and Reset Unit? (press 'y').” Press the y key to confirm default. The unit then resets. If connected to the CRAFT port, power reset the unit and then restore power to the unit while holding down the F key. You will then be prompted to confirm the factory default. 10. In the ATM code, the upgrade was successful if the following two things occur: • • The SYSTEM INFO>FIRMWARE REVISION field does not display Error. When you select the MODULES>MODULES menu, the EC/ADPCM appears in Slot 7 as shown in the following screen. 11. Reconfigure the unit for the specific application. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 407 Section 5 DLP-015 Total Access 600 Series System Manual Purchase of a T1 TDM 612/616/624 Unit with the EC/ADPCM Card Installed for Later Upgrade to ATM For customers who plan to operate a TDM application initially, but eventually upgrade to an ATM application, a Total Access 612/616/624 unit may be purchased with the EC/ADPCM card installed (P/N 4200612L2#TDM, 4200616L2#TDM, 4200642L2#TDM). 1. When the circuit is converted to ATM, the customer may obtain the latest VoATM firmware from the ADTRAN website (http://www.ADTRAN.com). Select SUPPORT>POST-SALES TECHNICAL SUPPORT>FIRMWARE UPDATES>612/616/624 ATM or contact Post-Sales Technical Support at 8884ADTRAN. 2. Upgrade the Total Access 612/616/624 with the latest VoATM firmware. Instructions for upgrading the unit can be found in DLP-007 and DLP-008. 3. Factory default the Total Access 612/616/624 by one of the following methods: • • Select SYSTEM UTILITY>TERMINAL MODE. At the > prompt, type fac. You will then see “Restore Factory Defaults and Reset Unit? (press 'y').” Press the y key to confirm default. The unit then resets. If connected to the CRAFT port, power reset the unit and then restore power to the unit while holding down the F key. You will then be prompted to confirm the factory default. 4. In the ATM code, the upgrade was successful if the following two things occur: • • The SYSTEM INFO>FIRMWARE REVISION field does not display Error. When you select the MODULES>MODULES menu, the EC/ADPCM appears in Slot 7 as shown in the following screen. 5. Reconfigure the unit for the specific application. Follow-up Procedures Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there. 408 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A A.03 TO A.04 FIRMWARE UPGRADE Introduction The Total Access line of Integrated Access Devices includes both the ATM and TDM versions of the Total Access 604/608/612/616/624. Until now, the Total Access TDM units have been running firmware version A.03.xx. Recently, A.04.xx has been released to support the TDM Total Access IADs. The development of A.04.xx code is a significant step in the evolution of the Total Access product line, as it allows all Total Access family members to share the same base code. This means that features and fixes are more easily implemented and are propagated across the product line. The two possible A.03 to A.04 upgrade paths are described in this DLP. The choice of upgrade path will determine whether the unit's configuration is saved. Since the A.03 and A.04 firmware loads are significantly different, the text configuration files for the two revisions are also different. It is recommended that the customer save a text configuration file for both the A.03 revision (prior to the upgrade) and for the A.04 revision (after completion of the upgrade). Refer to DLP-009 and DLP-011 for further instructions on how to save the configuration. To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm. In this DLP, unit refers to the Total Access 604, 608, 612, 616, and 624. Prerequisite Procedures Obtain the A.04 firmware and the A.03.90 (Transition Build) firmware from the ADTRAN website (http://www.ADTRAN.com). 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 409 Section 5 DLP-016 Total Access 600 Series System Manual For the Total Access 604/608 units, select SUPPORT>POST-SALES TECHNICAL SUPPORT>FIRMWARE UPDATES>604/608 TDM. For the Total Access 612/616/624 units, select SUPPORT>POST-SALES TECHNICAL SUPPORT>FIRMWARE UPDATES>612/616/624 TDM. Do not install Total Access 604/608 firmware into the Total Access 612/616/624 units or vice versa. This could result in a non-functional unit. If further assistance is required, contact ADTRAN Technical Support at 1-888-4ADTRAN. Tools and Materials Required • • • 410 VT100 compatible terminal or computer with terminal emulation software Appropriate cable to connect terminal to the unit (customer-provided) DB-9 female to RJ-45 female adapter (customer provided) for connecting to the CRAFT port on the rear of the unit © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 5 DLP-016 DLP-016 Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed Upgrade From A.03 to A.03.90 (Transition Build) to A.04 1. Upgrade the firmware from A.03 to A.03.90 (Transition Build) firmware. See DLP-007 or DLP-008 for instructions on how to perform this upgrade. 2. Once the upgrade to A.03.90 is complete, immediately upgrade the unit to A.04. See DLP-007 or DLP-008 for instructions on how to perform this upgrade. Upgrading from A.03 to A.03.90 (Transition Build) to A.04 will save the unit's configuration. Upgrade From A.03 to A.04 Directly 1. Upgrade the firmware from A.03 to A.04 firmware. See DLP-007 or DLP-008 for instructions on how to perform this upgrade. 2. The unit must then be factory defaulted by one of the following methods: • Select SYSTEM UTILITY>TERMINAL MODE. At the > prompt, type fac. You will then see “Restore Factory Defaults and Reset Unit? (press 'y').” Press the y key to confirm default. The unit will then automatically reset. 3. If connected to the CRAFT port, power reset the unit and then restore power to the unit while holding down the F key. You will then be prompted to confirm the factory default. 4. Reconfigure the unit for the specific application. Upgrading from A.03 to A.04 directly (or from A.04 to A.03 directly) will erase the unit's configuration. Follow-up Procedures Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with the tasks indicated there. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 411 Section 5 DLP-016 412 Total Access 600 Series System Manual © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A ADTRAN UTILITIES ADTRAN delivers several PC software utilities along with the unit. These utilities are located on the CD-ROM that came with your shipment. They also include MIB files (located in the MIB directory). Review the readme file (Readme.txt) for the latest information about the utilities. The utilities make it easier to interface with the terminal menu and transfer configuration files to and from TFTP servers. The utilities all run on Microsoft Windows 3.1 or higher. The following sections describe the Telnet, VT100, and TFTP Server utilities. CONTENTS Telnet Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Session Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Capture Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 VT100 Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Session Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Port Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Capture Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 TFTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Server Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Print Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Status Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Meter Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Log Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 FIGURES Figure 1. Figure 2. Figure 3. Figure 4. Telnet Menu Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VT100 Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFTP Server Interface Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFTP Server Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 415 418 420 421 413 Section 6 ADTRAN Utilities 414 Total Access 600 Series System Manual © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 6 ADTRAN Utilities In this section, unit refers to the Total Access 604, 608, 612, 616, and 624. 1. TELNET UTILITY The Telnet utility delivered with the unit provides enhancements to standard Telnet programs that make it easier to work with unit options. Access the Telnet program remotely through the 10/100BASET Ethernet port. For a detailed description of how to work with the Telnet program, refer to Navigating the Terminal Menus in the Commons User Interface Guide section of this manual. If you need help setting up the unit for a Telnet session, refer to the Detailed Level Procedures section of this manual. The Telnet menus include SESSION, EDIT, OPTIONS, CAPTURE, and HELP (see the menu tree in Figure 1). Session Telnet Connect Disconnect Transfer Cfg Exit Edit Copy Paste Options Colors Local Echo Auto Repeat File Capture Buffer Size Save Buffer As Screen Capture Help Contents IP Status About Host Name Port Edit Entry Add New Delete Connect Background Bold Text Start Cfg Capture Stop Cfg Capture Figure 1. Telnet Menu Tree Session Menu Click on SESSION to open the Telnet session. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 415 Section 6 ADTRAN Utilities Total Access 600 Series System Manual Connect Opens dialog box for setting HOST NAME and PORT parameters for a Telnet session. Also lets you EDIT ENTRY, ADD NEW entry, and DELETE stored entries. When the parameters are set, click CONNECT to make the connection. Click CANCEL to end the session. Host Name Accepts and stores host names. You may either enter a name, an IP address, or a domain name directly from this field. Click on the drop-down arrow to display a complete list of previously stored host names. Port Provides several port options. You may enter port numbers directly into this field to connect to non-standard ports or select the drop-down combo-box to display the following options: TELNET establishes a Telnet session ECHO provides a loopback for troubleshooting DISCARD bit bucket; discards data DAYTIME returns the time CHARGEN displays as a unique character stream; used for self-tests Edit Entry Changes either the unit name or the IP address of each host. Press either Tab, Return, or a period (.) after each number in the IP address to move to the next field. If you press Return or (.) while the cursor is located in each IP field, that field entry is deleted. Add New Prompts you for the same information as the EDIT ENTRY dialog box for new host. When enabled, the USE DNS (Domain Name Server) feature allows users to request DOMAIN LOOK UP via a DNS server on the network, rather than specifying an IP address. The name then appears in the HOST NAME field. Delete Removes a host name from the list; simply select the host name you want to remove, and, at the prompt, click DELETE. Connect Establishes the Telnet session. Disconnect Terminates the Telnet session. To re-establish the session, select CONNECT from SESSION MENU or press ENTER three times. This action restores the previous connection. 416 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 6 ADTRAN Utilities Transfer Cfg This feature is used with ADTRAN products primarily for sending configuration files to the unit. Exit Ends the Telnet session and closes the Telnet screen. Edit Menu Provides COPY and PASTE commands. Options Menu Provides viewing alternatives for the terminal screen. Colors Three options change the color of the background window (BACKGROUND), bold highlights (BOLD), and text (TEXT). Local Echo Echoes each character that you enter. AutoRepeat Repeats characters you select from the keyboard, if you hold down the key. Capture Menu Provides options for capturing screen images. File Sends screen options data to a file in the format options listed below: Start Cfg Capture Used with the ADTRAN product line to start sending the scrolling screen capture to a file storage location. Stop Cfg Capture Used with the ADTRAN product line to stop sending the scrolling screen capture to a file storage location. Buffer Size Disables terminal window scroll bars when set to zero. This is the normal setting. This number represents the number of lines to capture in the memory buffer. Save Buffer As Save screen capture to a file. Screen Capture Copies the text on the current Telnet screen to the clipboard. You can open any word processor and paste the clipboard contents into the program. This option is helpful when debugging. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 417 Section 6 ADTRAN Utilities Total Access 600 Series System Manual Help Menu Provides on-line help for using the ADTRAN Utilities. Contents Opens the on-line help. IP Status Displays the local port address and the status of the connection. About Displays version and owner information. 2. VT100 UTILITY Use the VT100 to configure a unit which is directly connected to a PC. The VT100 display is almost identical to the Telnet display. For a detailed description of how to work within the terminal menu, refer to Navigating the Terminal Menus in the User Interface Guide section of this manual. If you need help setting up the unit for a VT100 session, refer to the Detailed Level Procedures section of this manual. VT100 menus include SESSION, EDIT, PORT, OPTIONS, CAPTURE, and HELP (see the menu tree in Figure 2). Session VT100 Connect Disconnect File Transfer Exit Edit Copy Paste Port Settings Options Refresh Screen Connect Colors Local Echo Auto Repeat Capture Help File Buffer Size Save Buffer As Screen Capture XMODEM CRC ASCII Cfg Files Send Cfg File Transmit Wakeup Transmit Refresh BackGround Bold Text Start Cfg Capture Stop Cfg Capture Contents About Figure 2. VT100 Menu Tree 418 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 6 ADTRAN Utilities Session Menu Opens VT100 terminal emulation session. Connect Opens a specified serial port for a VT100 session. Disconnect Closes a specified serial port at the end of a VT100 session. File Transfer Uploads and downloads files to and from the unit. XMODEM CRC Selects the XMODEM file transfer protocol. ASCII Cfg Files Selects ASCII transfer mode. Primarily useful for configuration transfers for the ADTRAN products. Edit Menu Identical to the Telnet EDIT MENU (see Edit Menu on page 417). Port Menu Changes serial COM port SETTINGS. Provides data rate settings from 300—57600 bps. Options Menu Provides terminal screen commands. Refresh Screen Redraws the screen. Connect Provides the options TRANSMIT WAKEUP and TRANSMIT REFRESH. Transmit Wakeup Provides a control sequence that puts the unit CRAFT port online in terminal mode. Transmit Refresh Provides a control sequence to refresh the screen automatically when connecting. This is the default setting. Colors Identical to Telnet COLORS MENU (see Colors on page 417). Local Echo Echoes each character that you enter. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 419 Section 6 ADTRAN Utilities Total Access 600 Series System Manual AutoRepeat Repeats characters you select from the keyboard if you hold down the key. Capture Menu Identical to the Telnet CAPTURE MENU (see Capture Menu on page 417). Help Menu Provides on-line help and information about the version number. Contents Opens on-line help. About Displays version and owner information. 3. TFTP SERVER The TFTP Server utility transfers configuration files to and from a TFTP server. You can install this program on a PC running any version of Microsoft Windows. The configuration of the unit can be saved offline as a backup file. The saved file may also be used to send the same configuration to multiple units. Transfer configuration files using the TFTP protocol (a TCP/IP user protocol) via the 10/100BASET Ethernet port. The unit must have a valid IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway (if required), and be connected to an Ethernet network before proceeding. Figure 4 shows the TFTP server interface. For information on transferring and saving configurations using TFTP, refer to the Detailed Level Procedures section of this manual. Files must be placed in the Application directory where you installed the product. Received files are also placed here. Server TFTP Server Print Log Help Enable Disable Abort Exit ...to Clipboard ...to Printer Clear Log Contents About Figure 3. TFTP Server Interface Menu Tree 420 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 6 ADTRAN Utilities Figure 4. TFTP Server Interface Only one configuration transfer session (upload or download) may be active at a time. The TCP/IP parameters are not saved or overwritten as part of the unit’s transferred configuration to allow sending identical configurations to multiple units. When you start this program, a port is automatically opened. Server Menu Provides enable, disable, abort, and exit options. Enable Enables the TFTP server. The IP address displays in the Status field and Server Ready displays in the Log field. Disable Disables the TFTP server. When you select this option, the message PORT CLOSED displays in the Status field and Port Closed displays in the Log field. Abort Terminates a transfer that is in progress. Exit Terminates active transfers and closes the TFTP window. Print Log Provides print options. ...to Clipboard Copies the information in the Log field to the clipboard. You can then open any word processor and paste the information into the program for review. ...to Printer Sends the information in the Log field to the default printer. Clear Log Deletes the information stored in the Log field. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 421 Section 6 ADTRAN Utilities Total Access 600 Series System Manual Help Provides on-line help and version information. Contents Opens on-line help. About Displays version and owner information. 4. STATUS FIELD This field displays general information about port and transfer status. This field is read-only. The unlabeled field in the center of the screen displays prompts about the status of active transfers, such as bytes transferred and received. 5. METER FIELD The XMIT meter provides a visual record of the transfer process. 6. LOG FIELD This field displays a record of all of the events that occur during the time the TFTP Server is enabled. Use the scroll bar to move up and down the list. To clear the information in this field, select CLEAR LOG from the PRINT LOG menu. Save this information to a file before deleting it with the ...TO CLIPBOARD command. 422 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A MIB This section is divided into two parts: (1) SNMP information for TDM units and (2) SNMP information for ATM units. Each section details the Management Information Bases (MIBs) supported, MIB Compilation Order, Traps Supported, and MIB Variables supported. CONTENTS MIBs SUPPORTED BY TDM UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 MIB Compilation Order For TDM Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Traps Supported by TDM Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 MIB Variables Supported by TDM Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 MIBs SUPPORTED BY ATM UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 MIB Compilation order for ATM Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Traps Supported by ATM Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 MIB Variables Supported by ATM Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 For this section, TDM units refers to Total Access 604/608/612/616/624 units running A.04 firmware or later. ATM units refers to Total Access 604/608 units running D.01.36 firmware or previous and Total Access 612/616/624 units running D.01.30 firmware or previous. The TDM units support SNMP Version 2. The ATM units support SNMP Version 1. 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 423 Section 7 MIB 424 Total Access 600 Series System Manual © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual 1. Section 7 MIB MIBs SUPPORTED BY TDM UNITS Standard RFC MIBs: RFC1573.mi2 IANAifType-MIB RFC1907.mi2 SNMPv2-MIB RFC2011.mi2 IP-MIB RFC2096.mi2 IP-FORWARD-MIB RFC2115.mi2 FRAME-RELAY-DTE-MIB RFC2493.mi2 PerfHist-TC-MIB RFC2494.mi2 DS0-MIB and DS0BUNDLE-MIB RFC2495.mi2 DS1-MIB RFC2665.mi2 EtherLike-MIB RFC2863.mi2 IF-MIB RFC3201.mi2 CIRCUIT-IF-MIB Enterprise MIBs: adtran.mi2 ADTRAN-MIB adIadSys.mi2 ADTRAN-ADIADSYS-MIB adIadRtr.mi2 ADTRAN-ADIADROUTER-MIB adIadVoi.mi2 ADTRAN-ADIADVOICE-MIB SNMPv2-SMI, SNMPv2-TC, SNMPv2-TM, SNMPv2-CONF should be included with the SNMP manager. All TDM MIBs are SNMPv2 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 425 Section 7 MIB 2. Total Access 600 Series System Manual MIB COMPILATION ORDER FOR TDM UNITS IANAifType-MIB PerfHist-TC-MIB SNMPv2-MIB (if not included with SNMP manager) IF-MIB IP-MIB IP-FORWARD-MIB FRAME-RELAY-DTE-MIB DS1-MIB DS0-MIB DS0BUNDLE-MIB EtherLike-MIB CIRCUIT-IF-MIB ADTRAN-MIB ADTRAN-IADSYS-MIB ADTRAN-IADROUTER-MIB 3. TRAPS SUPPORTED BY TDM UNITS From RFC1215-MIB: coldStart linkDown linkUp authenticationFailure 426 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual From ADTRAN-IADSYS-MIB: Section 7 MIB adIadWanDown - 1003203 adIadWanUp - 1003204 adIadBatteryAlarmAct - 1003207 adIadBatteryAlarmDeact - 1003208 (T1 WAN interface only): adIadDs1RedAlarmON - 1003209 adIadDs1YellowAlarmON - 1003210 adIadDs1BlueAlarmON - 1003211 adIadDs1RedAlarmOFF - 1003212 adIadDs1YellowAlarmOFF - 1003213 adIadDs1BlueAlarmOFF - 1003214 adIadDs1SEF - 1003215 adIadDs1FS - 1003216 adIadDs1CRC - 1003217 adIadDs1LCV - 1003218 adIadDs1SLP - 1003219 From ADTRAN-IADVOICE-MIB: adIadVoiceTestStatusActive - 1003401 adIadVoiceTestStatusClear - 1003402 adIadVoiceAlarmBitActive - 1003403 adIadVoiceAlarmBitInactive - 1003404 adIadVoiceGatewayDown - 1003405 adIadVoiceGatewayUp - 1003406 adIadVoiceaLifeLineActivated - 1003407 adIadVoiceaLifeLineDeactivated - 1003408 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 427 Section 7 MIB 4. Total Access 600 Series System Manual MIB VARIABLES SUPPORTED BY TDM UNITS SNMPv2 states the supported MIB variables by the following method: The unit will have a MIB called TA 6XX.mi2 that will describe what SNMP variables are supported. This MIB will contain an AGENT-CAPABILITIES MODULE that will describe the SNMP variables supported. 5. MIBs SUPPORTED BY ATM UNITS Standard RFC MIBs: RFC1213.mib RFC1213-MIB RFC1406.mib DS1-MIB (T1 interface only) RFC1695.mib ATM-MIB Enterprise MIBs: Adtran.mib ADTRAN-MIB adtartr_trap.mib ADTRAN-ADTARTR_TRAP-MIB RFC1155-SMI, RFC1212-MIB, and RFC1215-MIB are also needed and should come standard with any SNMP Management software. All ATM MIBs are SNMPv1. 6. MIB COMPILATION ORDER FOR ATM UNITS RFC1213-MIB RFC1406-MIB RFC1695-MIB ADTRAN-MIB ADTRAN-ADTARTR-TRAP-MIB 428 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual 7. Section 7 MIB TRAPS SUPPORTED BY ATM UNITS From ADTARTR_TRAP MIB: coldStart linkUp linkDown authenticationFailure adTARouterWanDown - 6645503 adTARouterWanUp - 6645504 adTARouterBatteryAlarmAct - 6645507 adTARouterBatteryAlarmDeact - 6645508 adTARouterVoiceGatewayDown - 6645509 adTARouterVoiceGatewayUp - 6645510 adTARouterLifeLineActivated - 6645511 adTARouterLifeLineDeactivated - 6645512 8. MIB VARIABLES SUPPORTED BY ATM UNITS ATM units do not support write access for SNMP (except for sysName, sysLocation, and sysContact. system: sysDescr RO sysObjectID RO sysUpTime RO sysContact RW sysName RW sysLocation RW sysServices RO 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 429 Section 7 MIB Total Access 600 Series System Manual interfaces: ifIndex RO ifDescr RO ifType RO ifMtu RO ifSpeed RO ifPhysAddress RO ifOperStatus RO ifInOctets RO ifInUcastPkts RO ifInNUcastPkts RO ifInDiscards RO ifInErrors RO ifInUnknownProtos RO ifOutOctets RO ifOutUcastPkts RO ifOutNUcastPkts RO ifOutDiscards RO ifOutErrors RO ifSpecific RO 430 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 7 MIB ip: ipForwarding RO ipDefaultTTL RO ipInReceives RO ipInHdrErrors RO ipInAddrErrors RO ipForwDatagrams RO ipInUnknownProtos RO ipInDiscards RO ipInDelivers RO ipOutRequests RO ipOutDiscards RO ipOutNoRoutes RO ipReasmOKs RO ipReasmFails RO ipFragOKs RO ipFragFails RO ipFragCreates RO ipAddrTable: ipAddrEntry 61200624L1-1A ipAdEntAddr RO ipAdEntIfIndex RO ipAdEntNetMask RO ipAdEntBcastAddr RO ipAdEntReasmMaxSize RO © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 431 Section 7 MIB Total Access 600 Series System Manual ipRouteTable: ipRouteEntry ipRouteDest RO ipRouteIfIndex RO ipRouteMetric1 RO ipRouteMetric2 RO ipRouteMetric3 RO ipRouteMetric4 RO ipRouteNextHop RO ipRouteType RO ipRouteProto RO ipRouteAge RO ipRouteMask RO ipRouteMetric5 RO ipRouteMetricInfo RO ipNetToMediaTable: ipNetToMediaEntry ipNetToMediaIfIndex RO ipNetToMediaPhysAddress RO ipNetToMediaNetAddress RO ipNetToMediaType RO ipRoutingDiscards RO icmp: icmpInMsgs RO icmpInErrors RO icmpInDestUnreachs RO icmpInTimeExcds RO icmpInParmProbs RO icmpInSrcQuenchs RO 432 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual icmpInRedirects RO icmpInEchos RO icmpInEchoReps RO icmpInTimestamps RO icmpInTimestampReps RO icmpInAddrMasks RO icmpInAddrMaskReps RO icmpOutMsgs RO icmpOutErrors RO icmpOutDestUnreachs RO icmpOutTimeExcds RO icmpOutParmProbs RO icmpOutSrcQuenchs RO icmpOutRedirects RO icmpOutEchos RO icmpOutEchoReps RO icmpOutTimestamps RO icmpOutTimestampReps RO icmpOutAddrMasks RO icmpOutAddrMaskReps RO Section 7 MIB tcp: tcpRtoAlgorithm RO tcpRtoMin RO tcpRtoMax RO tcpMaxConns RO tcpActiveOpens RO tcpPassiveOpens RO tcpAttemptFails RO tcpEstabResets RO 61200624L1-1A © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 433 Section 7 MIB Total Access 600 Series System Manual tcpCurrEstab RO tcpInSegs RO tcpOutSegs RO tcpRetransSegs RO tcpConnTable tcpConnEntry tcpConnState RO tcpConnLocalAddress RO tcpConnLocalPort RO tcpConnRemAddress RO tcpConnRemPort RO tcpInErrs RO tcpOutRsts RO udp: udpInDatagrams RO udpNoPorts RO udpInErrors RO udpOutDatagrams RO udpLocalAddress RO udpLocalPort RO udpTable udpEntry 434 udpEntryLocalAddress RO udpLocalPort RO © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 7 MIB egp: egpInMsgs RO egpInErrs RO egpOutMsgs RO egpOutErrors RO egpNeighState RO egpNeighAddr RO egpNeighAs RO egpNeighInMsgs RO egpNeighInErrs RO egpNeighOutMsgs RO egpNeighOutErrs RO egpNeighInErrMsgs RO egpNeighOutErrMsgs RO egpNeighStateUps RO egpNeighStateDowns RO egpNeighIntervalHello RO egpNeighIntervalPoll RO egpNeighMode RO dsx1: dsx1ConfigTable dsx1ConfigEntry 61200624L1-1A dsx1LineIndex RO dsx1IfIndex RO dsx1TimeElapsed RO dsx1ValidIntervals RO dsx1LineType RO dsx1LineCoding RO dsx1SendCode RO © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 435 Section 7 MIB Total Access 600 Series System Manual dsx1CircuitIdentifier RO dsx1LoopbackConfig RO dsx1LineStatus RO dsx1SignalMode RO dsx1TransmitClockSource RO dsx1Fdl RO dsx1CurrentTable dsx1CurrentEntry dsx1CurrentIndex RO dsx1CurrentESs RO dsx1CurrentSESs RO dsx1CurrentSEFs RO dsx1CurrentUASs RO dsx1CurrentCSSs RO dsx1CurrentPCVs RO dsx1CurrentLESs RO dsx1CurrentBESs RO dsx1CurrentLCVs RO dsx1IntervalTable dsx1IntervalEntry 436 dsx1IntervalIndex RO dsx1IntervalNumber RO dsx1IntervalESs RO dsx1IntervalSESs RO dsx1IntervalSEFs RO dsx1IntervalUASs RO dsx1IntervalCSSs RO dsx1IntervalPCVs RO © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 7 MIB dsx1IntervalLESs RO dsx1IntervalBESs RO dsx1IntervalLCVs RO dsx1TotalTable dsx1TotalEntry dsx1TotalIndex RO dsx1TotalESs RO dsx1TotalSESs RO dsx1TotalSEFs RO dsx1TotalUASs RO dsx1TotalCSSs RO dsx1TotalPCVs RO dsx1TotalLESs RO dsx1TotalBESs RO dsx1TotalLCVs RO dsx1FracTable dsx1FracEntry 61200624L1-1A dsx1FracIndex RO dsx1FracNumber RO dsx1FractIfIndex RO © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 437 Section 7 MIB Total Access 600 Series System Manual snmp: snmpInPkts RO snmpOutPkts RO snmpInBadVersions RO snmpInBadCommunityNames RO snmpInBadCommunityUses RO snmpInASNParseErrs RO snmpInTooBigs RO snmpInNoSuchNames RO snmpInBadValues RO snmpInReadOnlys RO snmpInGenErrs RO snmpInTotalReqVars RO snmpInTotalSetVars RO snmpInGetRequests RO snmpInSetRequests RO snmpInGetRequests RO snmpInTraps RO snmpOutTooBigs RO snmpOutNoSuchNames RO snmpOutBadValues RO snmpOutGenErrs RO snmpOutGetRequests RO snmpOutGetNexts RO snmpOutSetRequests RO snmpOutGetRepsonses RO snmpOutTraps RO snmpEnableAuthenTraps RO 438 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual Section 7 MIB atm: atmInterfaceTable atmInterfaceEntry atmInterfaceMaxVpcs RO atmInterfaceMaxVccs RO atmInterfaceConfVpcs RO atmInterfaceConfVccs RO atmInterfaceMaxActiveVpiBits RO atmInterfaceMaxActiveVciBits RO atmInterfaceIlmiVpi RO atmInterfaceIlmiVci RO atmInterfaceAddressType RO atmInterfaceAdminAddress RO atmInterfaceMyNeighborIpAddress RO atmInterfaceMyNeigherIfName RO atmInterfaceTCTable atmInterfaceTCEntry atmInterfaceOCDEvents RO atmInterfaceTCAlarmState RO atmTrafficDescrParamTable atmTrafficDescrParamEntry 61200624L1-1A atmTrafficDescrParamIndex RO atmTrafficDescrType RO atmTrafficDescrParam1 RO atmTrafficDescrParam2 RO atmTrafficDescrParam3 RO atmTrafficDescrParam4 RO atmTrafficDescrParam5 RO © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 439 Section 7 MIB Total Access 600 Series System Manual atmTrafficDescrQosClass RO atmTrafficDescrRowStatus RO atmVclVpi RO atmVclVci RO atmVclAdminStatus RO atmVclOperStatus RO atmVclLastChange RO atmVclReceiveTrafficDescrIndex RO atmVclTransmitTrafficDescrIndex RO atmVccAalType RO atmVccAal5CpcsTransmitSduSize RO atmVccAal5CpcsReceiveSduSize RO atmVccAal5EncapsType RO atmVclCrossConnectIdentifier RO atmVclRowStatus RO aal5VccVpi RO aal5VccVci RO aal5VccCrcErrors RO aal5VccSarTimeOuts RO aal5VccOverSizedSDUs RO atmVclTable atmVclEntry aal5VccTable aal5VccEntry 440 © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A Total Access 600 Series System Manual 61200624L1-1A Section 7 MIB © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 441 Section 7 MIB 442 Total Access 600 Series System Manual © 2002 ADTRAN, Inc. 61200624L1-1A ">

Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement
Key features
- Remote Management
- Built-in IP router
- Life-line voice backup
- Various WAN technologies
- Support for VoDSL gateway management systems and firmware download
- Analog FXS ports
- Secure networking
- Support for popular CLASS features
- Advanced testing capabilities
- Multiple network protocols